Latest / Non-Fiction Library / Mental Fascination - William Atkinson

Transcript

Mental Fascination - William Atkinson · Non-Fiction Library

• 0:00
  Speaker 1: Preface. This book is side Light Manual number one, accompanying
• 0:05
  Speaker 1: my main work entitled The Secret of Mental Magic, and
• 0:10
  Speaker 1: being in the nature of a sequel, supplement or side
• 0:13
  Speaker 1: light there too. The side light manuals, of which this
• 0:18
  Speaker 1: is the first, are designed to bring out the details
• 0:21
  Speaker 1: and special features of several of the lessons of which
• 0:25
  Speaker 1: The Secret of Mental Magic is composed, and to give
• 0:29
  Speaker 1: something in the nature of special instruction regarding the actual
• 0:33
  Speaker 1: operation or workings of the principles referred to in the
• 0:36
  Speaker 1: lessons of my main work. The present manual bears the
• 0:40
  Speaker 1: above mentioned relation to that lesson in my main work
• 0:44
  Speaker 1: entitled Personal Influence. In order to obliviate the repetition of
• 0:50
  Speaker 1: the information contained in my main work, I have been
• 0:53
  Speaker 1: obliged to constantly refer to the latter. This would be
• 0:57
  Speaker 1: inexcusable were the present book offered as a separate and
• 1:00
  Speaker 1: independent work, for it might be justly considered as an
• 1:04
  Speaker 1: effort to force my main work upon the attention of
• 1:07
  Speaker 1: the reader for the purpose of increasing its sale. But
• 1:11
  Speaker 1: insomuch as the present book is advertised as a side light,
• 1:15
  Speaker 1: and its relation to my main work is plainly stated
• 1:18
  Speaker 1: in every notice, and particularly as its sale will be
• 1:22
  Speaker 1: almost exclusively among those who have already purchased and studied
• 1:25
  Speaker 1: my main work. I think I may reasonably ask to
• 1:29
  Speaker 1: be absolved from such suspicion. I think that I have
• 1:33
  Speaker 1: condensed much valuable information within the pages of this book,
• 1:37
  Speaker 1: and I trust that my readers will like the work
• 1:39
  Speaker 1: as well as I do. But be that as it may,
• 1:43
  Speaker 1: I defy any one to read it without gaining a
• 1:45
  Speaker 1: strong practical realization of the powerful part for good or
• 1:49
  Speaker 1: ill that mental fascination is playing in this twentieth century
• 1:53
  Speaker 1: world of ours. And I feel that the majority will
• 1:57
  Speaker 1: agree with me that it is time that this post
• 2:00
  Speaker 1: an influence should be studied, understood, mastered, and its string
• 2:05
  Speaker 1: extracted by such universal knowledge of its principles as will
• 2:09
  Speaker 1: serve to destroy its improper employment. To those who may
• 2:14
  Speaker 1: consider this rather dangerous knowledge to be spread broadcast, I
• 2:18
  Speaker 1: will say that ignorance is no protection. I believe that
• 2:21
  Speaker 1: in all cases, the best way to dispel darkness and
• 2:24
  Speaker 1: all that goes with it, is to turn on the light.
• 2:29
  Speaker 1: And this, then, is the spirit in which this book
• 2:31
  Speaker 1: has been written. May you so receive it? William Walker Atkinson, Chicago, Illinois, USA,
• 2:41
  Speaker 1: May thirteenth, nineteen oh seven. What is mental fascination? Fascination
• 2:49
  Speaker 1: means the act of fascinating or state of being fascinated.
• 2:54
  Speaker 1: The word fascinate springs from the Latin word fastenar, meaning
• 2:59
  Speaker 1: to an chant, be which charmed by eyes or tongue, captivate, attract, etc.
• 3:08
  Speaker 1: The definition of the English word fascinate is as follows,
• 3:12
  Speaker 1: to act upon by some powerful or irresistible influence. To
• 3:17
  Speaker 1: influence by an irresistible charm, to allure or excite irresistibly
• 3:23
  Speaker 1: or powerfully, to charm, captivate, or attract powerfully. To influence
• 3:30
  Speaker 1: the imagination, reason, or will of another in an uncontrollable manner.
• 3:36
  Speaker 1: To enchant, captivate, or allure powerfully or irresistibly. The above
• 3:43
  Speaker 1: definition is condensed from a number of the best dictionaries
• 3:47
  Speaker 1: and gives the cream of the idea embodied in the word.
• 3:52
  Speaker 1: My definition. In this manual, I shall use the term
• 3:56
  Speaker 1: mental fascination in the sense of the action of a
• 4:01
  Speaker 1: mental force that powerfully influences the imagination, desire, or will
• 4:06
  Speaker 1: of another.
• 4:08
  Speaker 2: This is my own.
• 4:08
  Speaker 1: Broad definition, which includes all the varied phenomena of personal magnetism,
• 4:15
  Speaker 1: psychological influence, hypnotism, mesmerism, charming, et cetera, et cetera, all
• 4:22
  Speaker 1: of which I hold to be but varying phases of
• 4:25
  Speaker 1: phenomena of one force. These things are all a bit
• 4:29
  Speaker 1: of the same piece, In spite of the claims to
• 4:32
  Speaker 1: the contrary on the part of those who did not
• 4:35
  Speaker 1: like the relationship. The nature of the force? What is
• 4:39
  Speaker 1: the nature of the force which produces that which we
• 4:42
  Speaker 1: call mental fascination, which latter I have defined as the
• 4:47
  Speaker 1: action of a mental force that powerfully influences the imagination, desire,
• 4:52
  Speaker 1: or will of another. Mental fascination is the manifestation? What
• 4:58
  Speaker 1: is the nature of the mental falf that powerfully influences?
• 5:03
  Speaker 1: As you will see in some of the following chapters,
• 5:06
  Speaker 1: there have been many theories advanced to account for this force,
• 5:10
  Speaker 1: the theories varying from magnetic fluids to mere simple suggestions
• 5:15
  Speaker 1: on the part of the influencing person. Nearly every writer
• 5:19
  Speaker 1: on the subject has had his own pet theory. But
• 5:23
  Speaker 1: although these theories varied and differed greatly, the effects produced
• 5:27
  Speaker 1: were about the same, which naturally leads us to look
• 5:31
  Speaker 1: for some common basic principle operating under all forms. Regardless
• 5:36
  Speaker 1: of the many theories advanced by those producing the effects.
• 5:40
  Speaker 1: It is the old story here, as elsewhere. A man
• 5:44
  Speaker 1: finds that he is able to produce certain phenomena by
• 5:48
  Speaker 1: certain methods. He works along practical lines for a time,
• 5:52
  Speaker 1: endeavoring to perfect his methods and increase the variety and
• 5:56
  Speaker 1: effectiveness of the phenomena. He has advanced. Along these lines,
• 6:02
  Speaker 1: he begins to look around him for a theory to
• 6:04
  Speaker 1: fit the facts of the case. And here is where
• 6:07
  Speaker 1: he usually makes his mistake. He evolves some fantastic theory
• 6:12
  Speaker 1: which seems to him to account for the effects produced,
• 6:16
  Speaker 1: and then he endeavors to fit the facts into the theory.
• 6:20
  Speaker 1: If the facts will not so fit in well, so
• 6:23
  Speaker 1: much worse for the facts, and he either discards the
• 6:26
  Speaker 1: non conforming facts, or else ignores or denies them. This
• 6:31
  Speaker 1: has been the course of theorists since the beginning. After
• 6:35
  Speaker 1: a while, some man of a more scientific mind examines
• 6:39
  Speaker 1: the recorded facts and discovers the true underlying principle and
• 6:44
  Speaker 1: reconciles the differing theories of the original theorists by a
• 6:48
  Speaker 1: new synthesis which combines the true principles in all the
• 6:52
  Speaker 1: other theories, discarding the pet hobbies or prejudices of the
• 6:56
  Speaker 1: previous authorities. And so it is the case of mental fascination,
• 7:01
  Speaker 1: as we shall see the underlying theory. I shalt not
• 7:07
  Speaker 1: have much to say about theory in this book. I
• 7:10
  Speaker 1: have explained the theory and principle underlying mental fascination in
• 7:14
  Speaker 1: my larger book entitled The Secret of Mental Magic, of
• 7:19
  Speaker 1: which this little manual is a sidelight. In that book,
• 7:23
  Speaker 1: I have explained the underlying force beneath all forms of
• 7:26
  Speaker 1: mental magic, and mental fascination is one of those forms.
• 7:31
  Speaker 1: It is the universal mentative energy, of which and in
• 7:35
  Speaker 1: which each individual mind is a center of activity. I
• 7:40
  Speaker 1: have also explained that the mentative energy of each individual
• 7:44
  Speaker 1: mind is and may be transmitted from one person to
• 7:48
  Speaker 1: another by means of mentative currents or waves, and that
• 7:53
  Speaker 1: these mentative currents and waves tend to induce in the
• 7:57
  Speaker 1: minds of other persons the emotions feelings existing in the
• 8:01
  Speaker 1: mental states of the person sending out the waves or
• 8:05
  Speaker 1: currents the mental polls. I have also explained that there
• 8:11
  Speaker 1: are two mental poles, known as the motive and emotive poles, respectively,
• 8:17
  Speaker 1: which manifest will power and desire force respectively. Desire force
• 8:23
  Speaker 1: acts in the direction of drawing pulling, attracting, luring, coaxing, charming, etc.
• 8:31
  Speaker 1: While willpower acts in the direction of compelling, forcing, driving, impelling, commanding, demanding, etc.
• 8:42
  Speaker 1: Desire always draws its object toward itself, while will always
• 8:47
  Speaker 1: overpowers and compels its object, generally in the sense of
• 8:51
  Speaker 1: driving it into action. In mental fascination, both desire force
• 8:56
  Speaker 1: and willpower are employed generally in combination. Desire force has
• 9:02
  Speaker 1: been called the feminine phase of menative energy, and will
• 9:05
  Speaker 1: power the masculine, And in this as in everything else,
• 9:10
  Speaker 1: the combination of those two qualities produces the most marked results.
• 9:15
  Speaker 1: The student will be able to distinguish between the action
• 9:18
  Speaker 1: of these two phases of the force as he reads
• 9:21
  Speaker 1: the pages of this book in which instances of mental
• 9:24
  Speaker 1: fascination are given. That is all that I shall have
• 9:27
  Speaker 1: to say about theory in this book, except where the
• 9:30
  Speaker 1: various points are brought out in illustrating the examples given,
• 9:34
  Speaker 1: I must refer my students to My Secret of Mental
• 9:37
  Speaker 1: Magic for details of theory and principle. The present book
• 9:42
  Speaker 1: deals with the how, rather than the why.
• 9:45
  Speaker 3: Mental fascination among the animals. Even before the human race
• 9:50
  Speaker 3: was evolved, mental fascination was known instinctively to the lower
• 9:54
  Speaker 3: forms of life. It is said that the fels in
• 9:57
  Speaker 3: the blood of living things become aware of the presence
• 10:00
  Speaker 3: of each other at distances which must preclude any theory
• 10:04
  Speaker 3: of ordinary sense awareness. Not only do they recognize or
• 10:08
  Speaker 3: sense the presence of each other, but they seem to
• 10:11
  Speaker 3: be attracted toward each other by some force or fascination,
• 10:15
  Speaker 3: which must operate along the lines of desire and will.
• 10:19
  Speaker 3: Eminent scientists inform us that even the atoms manifest an
• 10:24
  Speaker 3: attraction for each other, varying in degree according to the
• 10:27
  Speaker 3: nature of the respective atoms, and the same authorities tell
• 10:31
  Speaker 3: us that this attracting operates along the lines of a
• 10:34
  Speaker 3: desire for each other and a will which causes them
• 10:38
  Speaker 3: to fly to each other. Is it not reasonable to
• 10:41
  Speaker 3: suppose that in this instinctive manifestation of attraction and the
• 10:45
  Speaker 3: response to attraction among the atoms, there is to be
• 10:48
  Speaker 3: found the elemental principle of mental fascination, And are not
• 10:53
  Speaker 3: the phenomena of electrical attraction and magnetic attraction related to
• 10:57
  Speaker 3: the human phenomena by a long series of links in
• 11:00
  Speaker 3: a grand chain the two phases. But leaving the above
• 11:06
  Speaker 3: questions without further consideration, we may find an abundance of
• 11:10
  Speaker 3: proof among the higher forms of the lower animals. Among
• 11:14
  Speaker 3: the animals, we find many instances of the power of
• 11:17
  Speaker 3: charming or fascinating, both of which I hold to be
• 11:21
  Speaker 3: but varying forms of manifestation of mental fascination, as I
• 11:25
  Speaker 3: use the term, i e. The action of a mental
• 11:28
  Speaker 3: force that powerfully influences the imagination, desire, or will of another.
• 11:34
  Speaker 3: This mental fascination among the animals manifests along two lines, viz.
• 11:39
  Speaker 3: One along the lines of desire, operating in the direction
• 11:42
  Speaker 3: of sex manifestation, such as the winning of mates et cetera,
• 11:46
  Speaker 3: and two along the lines of will operation in the
• 11:51
  Speaker 3: direction of overcoming the prey of the animal, such as
• 11:54
  Speaker 3: the charming of birds by serpents or of the smaller
• 11:57
  Speaker 3: animals by tigers, et cetera. These cases are capable of
• 12:01
  Speaker 3: liberal illustration and proof, and natural history affords us full
• 12:05
  Speaker 3: authority for accepting the same instances of animal fascination. I
• 12:12
  Speaker 3: recently read an account of a naturalist who related that
• 12:15
  Speaker 3: one day in a tropical country, he noticed a winged
• 12:18
  Speaker 3: insect circling around and around a scorpion. After a bit,
• 12:23
  Speaker 3: the insect made a series of desperate plunges at the scorpion,
• 12:26
  Speaker 3: as if in a frantic desire to terminate the charm,
• 12:30
  Speaker 3: the scorpions soon striking down the insect and afterwards devouring it.
• 12:35
  Speaker 3: It is related by travelers that when one comes suddenly
• 12:38
  Speaker 3: in the presence of a lion, tiger, or leopard, his
• 12:41
  Speaker 3: legs seem paralyzed, and the eyes of the beast seem
• 12:44
  Speaker 3: to exert a peculiar fascination and power over him. I
• 12:49
  Speaker 3: have seen a mouse manifest the same emotion in the
• 12:51
  Speaker 3: presence of a cat, and the same is true of
• 12:54
  Speaker 3: a rat in the presence of a ferret or similar enemy.
• 12:57
  Speaker 3: On the other hand, every observer had noticed the wonderful
• 13:01
  Speaker 3: charming power that animals exert over others of their kind
• 13:05
  Speaker 3: of the opposite sex. If you have ever witnessed the
• 13:08
  Speaker 3: courting of a bird during the mating season, you will
• 13:11
  Speaker 3: have a keen sense of the reality of the power
• 13:13
  Speaker 3: employed one of the birds. And it may be either
• 13:17
  Speaker 3: the male or female will be seen to actually fascinate
• 13:20
  Speaker 3: or charm the one of the opposite sex, the latter
• 13:23
  Speaker 3: lying still with quivering wings and a helpless expression in
• 13:27
  Speaker 3: its eyes. When compared with the attitude of the same
• 13:30
  Speaker 3: bird when charmed by a serpent, the resemblance will be striking.
• 13:35
  Speaker 3: Scientific testimony. I have before me a book written in
• 13:39
  Speaker 3: eighteen forty seven which relates quite a number of instances
• 13:43
  Speaker 3: in the operation of mental fascination among the lower animals.
• 13:47
  Speaker 3: I will give you a few of them, condensed and abbreviated.
• 13:50
  Speaker 3: Professor Silliman is quoted as stating that one day, while
• 13:54
  Speaker 3: crossing the Hudson River at Catskill, he passed along a
• 13:57
  Speaker 3: narrow road with the river on one side and a
• 14:00
  Speaker 3: steep bank covered by bushes on the other side. His
• 14:03
  Speaker 3: attention was attracted by the sight of a number of
• 14:06
  Speaker 3: birds of a variety of species, who were flying forward
• 14:09
  Speaker 3: and backwards across the road, turning and wheeling in strange gyrations,
• 14:13
  Speaker 3: and with noisy chirpings, seemingly centering over a particular point
• 14:17
  Speaker 3: of the road. Upon examination, the professor found an enormous
• 14:21
  Speaker 3: black snake, partly coiled and partly erect, showing an appearance
• 14:25
  Speaker 3: of great animation, with his eyes flashing like a brilliant diamond,
• 14:29
  Speaker 3: and his tongue darting in and out. The snake was
• 14:32
  Speaker 3: the center of the motion of the birds. The professor
• 14:35
  Speaker 3: adds that although the snake disappeared in the bushes, frightened
• 14:39
  Speaker 3: that the approach of the men. Still the birds seemed
• 14:42
  Speaker 3: too dazed to escape, and perched on the nearby bushes,
• 14:45
  Speaker 3: evidently awaiting the reappearance of their charmer. The charming by snakes.
• 14:51
  Speaker 3: The same book relates an instant of a man in
• 14:54
  Speaker 3: Pennsylvania who saw a large black snake charming a bird.
• 14:58
  Speaker 3: The bird described gradually decreasing circles around the snake, at
• 15:02
  Speaker 3: the same time uttering piteous cries. It seemed almost ready
• 15:06
  Speaker 3: to drop into the jaws of the snake when the
• 15:08
  Speaker 3: man drove off the latter when the bird arose with
• 15:11
  Speaker 3: a song of joy. Another case is related of a
• 15:15
  Speaker 3: ground squirrel which was observed running to and fro between
• 15:18
  Speaker 3: a creek and a large tree a few yards distant.
• 15:21
  Speaker 3: The squirrel's fur was badly ruffled, and he exhibited fright
• 15:24
  Speaker 3: and distress. Investigation disclosed the head and neck of a
• 15:28
  Speaker 3: rattlesnake protruding from the whole of the tree and pointing
• 15:31
  Speaker 3: directly at the squirrel. The poor squirrel at last gave
• 15:35
  Speaker 3: up the fight, and, yielding to the fascination, laid himself
• 15:38
  Speaker 3: down with his head very close to the snake's mouth.
• 15:41
  Speaker 3: The snake then proceeded to swallow the squirrel when his
• 15:44
  Speaker 3: meal was interrupted with a cut of a carriage whip
• 15:47
  Speaker 3: in the hands of the observer, and the squirrel, released
• 15:50
  Speaker 3: from the spell, ran briskly away. Interesting instances. Doctor Good
• 15:56
  Speaker 3: is quoted as having made quite a study of the curious,
• 15:59
  Speaker 3: fascinating power that rattlesnakes manifest over small animals such as birds, squirrels,
• 16:04
  Speaker 3: and young hairs, et cetera. He relates that these animals
• 16:08
  Speaker 3: seem incapable of drawing their eyes away from those of
• 16:11
  Speaker 3: the snake, and although seemingly struggling to get away, they
• 16:15
  Speaker 3: still gradually approach the snake as though urged toward him,
• 16:19
  Speaker 3: re attracted by a power superior to their natural instincts.
• 16:23
  Speaker 3: He goes on to state that the animals creep nearer
• 16:26
  Speaker 3: and nearer, until at last it is drawn into the
• 16:29
  Speaker 3: serpent's mouth, which has been open all the while to
• 16:32
  Speaker 3: receive them. Doctor Barrow is quoted as relating many instances
• 16:37
  Speaker 3: of this kind known to peasants in all parts of
• 16:39
  Speaker 3: the world. Valiant, the African traveler, tells of an instance
• 16:44
  Speaker 3: in which he witnessed a shrike at the very act
• 16:46
  Speaker 3: of being fascinated by a large snake at a distance,
• 16:49
  Speaker 3: the fiery eyes and open mouths of which was gradually
• 16:52
  Speaker 3: approaching the bird, the latter manifesting convulsive trembling and uttering,
• 16:57
  Speaker 3: piercing shrieks of distress. The travelers shot the snake, but
• 17:01
  Speaker 3: upon picking up the bird, he found it dead, killed
• 17:04
  Speaker 3: either by fear or the power of the serpent, or
• 17:07
  Speaker 3: perhaps by the violent breaking of the spell. He measured
• 17:10
  Speaker 3: the distance between the snake and the bird and found
• 17:13
  Speaker 3: it to be three and one half feet strange stories.
• 17:18
  Speaker 3: A case is related in one of the early reports
• 17:20
  Speaker 3: of the Philosophical Society, in which a mouse was put
• 17:24
  Speaker 3: in a cage with a viper by way of an experiment.
• 17:27
  Speaker 3: The mouse at first seemed greatly agitated, which state was
• 17:31
  Speaker 3: followed by a condition of fascination, the mouse drawing nearer
• 17:35
  Speaker 3: and nearer to the viper, which remained motionless with distended
• 17:39
  Speaker 3: jaws and glistening eyes. The mouse finally actually entered the
• 17:43
  Speaker 3: jaws of the viper and was devoured. Bruce, the African traveler,
• 17:49
  Speaker 3: relates that the natives of an interior tribe seemed to
• 17:52
  Speaker 3: be protected by nature against the bite of scorpions and vipers.
• 17:56
  Speaker 3: They are said to handle these creatures fearlessly, the latter
• 17:59
  Speaker 3: seeming to be robbed of their power of resistance. He
• 18:02
  Speaker 3: states that the creatures seemed to sicken the moment they
• 18:05
  Speaker 3: are touched by the natives, and are sometimes so exhausted
• 18:08
  Speaker 3: by the invisible fascinating power that they perish shortly. He says,
• 18:13
  Speaker 3: I have constantly observed that, however lively the viper was before,
• 18:17
  Speaker 3: upon being seized by any of these barbarians, he seemed
• 18:20
  Speaker 3: as if taken with sickness and feebleness, and frequently would
• 18:24
  Speaker 3: shut his eyes and would never turn his mouth toward
• 18:27
  Speaker 3: the arm that held him. Snake charmer personally, I have
• 18:32
  Speaker 3: seen a somewhat similar case. When I was a boy
• 18:34
  Speaker 3: in Maryland. I knew of a farm hand who was
• 18:37
  Speaker 3: called a snake charmer. How he did it, I could
• 18:40
  Speaker 3: never find out. But he would exert some kind of
• 18:43
  Speaker 3: influence over all kinds of snakes, poisonous ones included, and
• 18:46
  Speaker 3: would cause them to remain fascinated until, with a quick
• 18:49
  Speaker 3: movement he would grab them by the neck with his
• 18:52
  Speaker 3: bare hands. This man generally carried a few pet snakes
• 18:56
  Speaker 3: around with him for company. They seemed perfectly contented, and
• 19:00
  Speaker 3: would poke their heads up out of his pocket in
• 19:02
  Speaker 3: order to look at someone else with whom he might
• 19:04
  Speaker 3: be talking. The negroes on the farm had a mortal
• 19:07
  Speaker 3: terror of this man, and would walk a couple of
• 19:09
  Speaker 3: miles rather than pass by his house. Fascinating fierce animals.
• 19:15
  Speaker 3: The power of charming animals, dogs and wild beasts is
• 19:18
  Speaker 3: undoubtedly possessed by some men in varying degrees, and nearly
• 19:22
  Speaker 3: every one has known of men who could charm the
• 19:24
  Speaker 3: wildest horses as if by magic. I have read of
• 19:28
  Speaker 3: some burglars who seemed able to quiet the most ferocious
• 19:31
  Speaker 3: watch dogs. The Swedish writer Linda Krantz tells of certain
• 19:35
  Speaker 3: natives of Lapland who are possessed of some process of
• 19:38
  Speaker 3: charming dogs to such an extent that they have been
• 19:41
  Speaker 3: known to cow the most savage greathound, causing him to
• 19:44
  Speaker 3: fly from them with all the signs of abject fear.
• 19:47
  Speaker 3: Many of my readers have seen or heard of the
• 19:50
  Speaker 3: horse whisperers found in various parts of the country, who
• 19:53
  Speaker 3: will shut themselves in a stable with a fierce horse,
• 19:56
  Speaker 3: and by whispering to him, will manage to tame him
• 19:59
  Speaker 3: completely and make him passive to their will. Charmed by
• 20:03
  Speaker 3: a snake, there are cases recorded in which men who
• 20:07
  Speaker 3: have been charmed by a snake have afterwards given in
• 20:10
  Speaker 3: their experience. One of these cases relates that a man
• 20:14
  Speaker 3: was walking in his garden when he suddenly came into
• 20:16
  Speaker 3: the presence of a snake, whose eyes gleamed in a
• 20:19
  Speaker 3: peculiar manner. He found himself fascinated, as if by a spell,
• 20:23
  Speaker 3: and unable to withdraw his eyes from those of the creature.
• 20:27
  Speaker 3: The snake, he stated afterward, seemed to begin to increase
• 20:30
  Speaker 3: immensely in size and assumed, in rapid succession a mixture
• 20:34
  Speaker 3: of brilliant colors. He grew dizzy and would have fallen
• 20:38
  Speaker 3: in the direction of the snake had not his wife approached,
• 20:41
  Speaker 3: throwing her arms around him and breaking the spell. Another
• 20:45
  Speaker 3: similar case is related in which a man found his
• 20:47
  Speaker 3: companion standing still on the road with his eyes fixed
• 20:51
  Speaker 3: intently upon those of a large rattlesnake, which was regarding
• 20:54
  Speaker 3: him fixedly with gleaming eyes scintillating in its raised head.
• 20:59
  Speaker 3: The man was leaning toward the snake, and would have
• 21:01
  Speaker 3: fallen toward it in a few moments. He was crying,
• 21:04
  Speaker 3: feebly but piteously. He will bite me, he will kill me,
• 21:09
  Speaker 3: Sure he will, replied his friend, why don't you run away?
• 21:12
  Speaker 3: Why are you staying here? But the man seemed perfectly
• 21:15
  Speaker 3: dazed and distracted and could not answer. The companion finally
• 21:19
  Speaker 3: picked up a stick and struck at the snake, which
• 21:21
  Speaker 3: glided away savagely. The fascinated man was sick for several
• 21:25
  Speaker 3: hours afterward. A personal experience. When I was a boy,
• 21:30
  Speaker 3: I had somewhat similar experience, although not nearly so serious.
• 21:34
  Speaker 3: Walking one day among a grove of trees belonging to
• 21:37
  Speaker 3: my grandfather, I found myself standing staring intently at a
• 21:41
  Speaker 3: snake about two feet long, whose eyes glistened like large diamonds.
• 21:46
  Speaker 3: In a moment, I ceased to see anything but those
• 21:48
  Speaker 3: awful eyes, which glistened and displayed all the prismatic colors
• 21:52
  Speaker 3: to my frightened glance. It lasted but a moment, however,
• 21:56
  Speaker 3: for the snake glided away, seemingly as anxious to get
• 21:59
  Speaker 3: away from me as I was to part company with him.
• 22:03
  Speaker 3: I cannot say whether the spell would have been broken
• 22:06
  Speaker 3: by me if the snake had not moved away. Perhaps
• 22:09
  Speaker 3: it might, or perhaps not. All that I remember now
• 22:13
  Speaker 3: after the passage of thirty five years or more, is
• 22:16
  Speaker 3: that I did not seem to feel fear after the
• 22:18
  Speaker 3: first shock, my feeling and emotion seemingly being that of
• 22:22
  Speaker 3: great wonder and amazement, arising from what I saw in
• 22:25
  Speaker 3: those eyes an elemental force. But I have said enough
• 22:31
  Speaker 3: regarding the manifestation of mental fascination among the lower animals.
• 22:35
  Speaker 3: There are many interesting instances of this sort scattered through
• 22:39
  Speaker 3: the pages of books on animal life, and nearly every
• 22:42
  Speaker 3: one who has lived in the woods or among wild
• 22:44
  Speaker 3: life knows of many cases illustrating this fact, which have
• 22:47
  Speaker 3: come under his own observation. I have mentioned these features
• 22:51
  Speaker 3: of the subject merely for the purpose of showing you
• 22:54
  Speaker 3: that we have to deal with a general natural principle
• 22:57
  Speaker 3: which manifests throughout all life. This book has to deal
• 23:00
  Speaker 3: with the manifestation of this force among men. But in
• 23:04
  Speaker 3: closing this chapter, I would ask you to notice the
• 23:07
  Speaker 3: resemblance between the manifestation of the force among the animals
• 23:10
  Speaker 3: on the one hand, and among mankind on the other.
• 23:15
  Speaker 3: The animals employ the force for two purposes, i e.
• 23:19
  Speaker 3: The captivating of mates and the capture of prey. And
• 23:23
  Speaker 3: how do men and women use it among similar lines? Yes,
• 23:27
  Speaker 3: I mean this as startling as it may appear, For
• 23:30
  Speaker 3: it is not the use of fascination in direction of
• 23:33
  Speaker 3: attracting the opposite sex, akin to the sex charming noticed
• 23:36
  Speaker 3: among the birds and animals. And is not the use
• 23:40
  Speaker 3: of fascination in the direction of influencing men and women
• 23:44
  Speaker 3: along the lines of business or personal interest, akin to
• 23:47
  Speaker 3: the charming of prey by wild animals, serpents, etc. You
• 23:51
  Speaker 3: may see that evolution simply changes the form of use
• 23:55
  Speaker 3: in this and other natural qualities and power, the force
• 23:58
  Speaker 3: or power remaining the same under all of the changes.
• 24:02
  Speaker 3: And does it not become important for us to understand, study,
• 24:06
  Speaker 3: and guard ourselves against the employment of such an elemental
• 24:10
  Speaker 3: force as this, which manifests along all planes of life,
• 24:14
  Speaker 3: from lowest to highest. I emphatically answer yes. The story
• 24:19
  Speaker 3: of mental fascination. The story of mental fascination runs along
• 24:24
  Speaker 3: with the history of the human race, for it has
• 24:27
  Speaker 3: always been known to man in some form, coming to
• 24:30
  Speaker 3: primitive man, along with other inheritances from still lower forms,
• 24:35
  Speaker 3: it was used from the beginning. Its earliest forms were
• 24:39
  Speaker 3: similar to its employment by the lower animals, such as
• 24:42
  Speaker 3: has been mentioned in the preceding chapter. The strong willed
• 24:46
  Speaker 3: of the race influenced and dominated the weaker willed ones
• 24:49
  Speaker 3: without understanding its laws. The strong willed barbarians discovered that
• 24:54
  Speaker 3: they possessed a strange power of inducing mental states among
• 24:58
  Speaker 3: their weaker willed companions, and were thus enabled to work
• 25:01
  Speaker 3: their will upon them. Many of the leaders of barbarian
• 25:05
  Speaker 3: races owe their positions of prominence and leadership to this
• 25:09
  Speaker 3: law of mental induction the magic of the priests. But
• 25:15
  Speaker 3: along with the rise of leaders there was manifested a
• 25:18
  Speaker 3: similar rise in power and influence of the priests. All
• 25:22
  Speaker 3: races have had their priests and have to day. A
• 25:25
  Speaker 3: priest is a man whose office is that of a
• 25:27
  Speaker 3: mediator between men and their divinities, one who claims to
• 25:31
  Speaker 3: represent the supernatural entities in their dealings with men, a
• 25:35
  Speaker 3: religious or spiritual middle man, as it were. I used
• 25:39
  Speaker 3: this expression in all seriousness, and with no desire to
• 25:42
  Speaker 3: sneer at the priestly offices, which have played an important
• 25:45
  Speaker 3: part in the history of the race. The priests, not
• 25:49
  Speaker 3: being occupied with warfare or agriculture, and by reason of
• 25:53
  Speaker 3: their support being contributed by the people, found plenty of
• 25:57
  Speaker 3: time to think a somewhat rare privilege in the early days,
• 26:01
  Speaker 3: and even in these times, for that matter, And so
• 26:04
  Speaker 3: there gradually arose among all peoples a priestly caste that
• 26:08
  Speaker 3: possessed the bulk of intelligence of the race. These priests
• 26:12
  Speaker 3: soon began to recognize the importance of the mental forces,
• 26:16
  Speaker 3: and they studied the underlying principles and laws of operation. This,
• 26:20
  Speaker 3: of course, gave them an additional hold on the people
• 26:23
  Speaker 3: and a power over them. There seems to be no
• 26:26
  Speaker 3: doubt but that even in the early days of the race,
• 26:29
  Speaker 3: the priestly caste held a very wide knowledge of the
• 26:32
  Speaker 3: laws and practice of mental fascination mystic powers. In the
• 26:38
  Speaker 3: heart of Africa. Today we find the voodoo men, or
• 26:41
  Speaker 3: conjurors or medicine men well versed in the application of
• 26:45
  Speaker 3: mental fascination. It was known among the early American Indians,
• 26:50
  Speaker 3: although their degenerated descendants seemed to have lost the knowledge
• 26:54
  Speaker 3: except in a few instances. The power of the priesthood
• 26:58
  Speaker 3: among primitive races is based almost entirely upon some form
• 27:02
  Speaker 3: of mental fascination. And as we see the race ascending
• 27:06
  Speaker 3: in the scale, so do we see the priests displaying
• 27:09
  Speaker 3: a broader and fuller knowledge of the subject in question.
• 27:13
  Speaker 3: The history of the Oriental races show that a full
• 27:16
  Speaker 3: knowledge of the operation of mental fascination has been possessed
• 27:20
  Speaker 3: by them for thousands of years. In the pictured stories
• 27:24
  Speaker 3: of the Egyptians, the traces of which appear in the
• 27:27
  Speaker 3: ruined temples and other buildings, we see that they understood
• 27:30
  Speaker 3: the art perfectly. In ancient Persia and Chaldea, the art
• 27:35
  Speaker 3: arose to great heights. In fact, among all of the
• 27:39
  Speaker 3: advanced ancient races of Men, we find an important place
• 27:42
  Speaker 3: given to the subject before us the ancient mysteries. Among
• 27:48
  Speaker 3: the ancient mysteries, the various ceremonies of the temples of
• 27:52
  Speaker 3: the early races, we see many instances of the use
• 27:55
  Speaker 3: of mental fascination. Back of the rites and ceremonies was
• 27:59
  Speaker 3: always the same underlying principle of menative induction. In the
• 28:04
  Speaker 3: early use of the force, its employment was largely along
• 28:07
  Speaker 3: the lines of healing, which phase of the subject does
• 28:10
  Speaker 3: not concern us in this particular manual, although it belongs
• 28:13
  Speaker 3: to the general subject of mental magic. But still we
• 28:17
  Speaker 3: read in the pages of early history of many instances
• 28:20
  Speaker 3: of mental fascination, pure and simple, that which was afterward
• 28:24
  Speaker 3: called mesmerism, hypnotism, et cetera. Was well known to the ancients,
• 28:30
  Speaker 3: and in fact, some of the recorded results coming down
• 28:33
  Speaker 3: to us from the past have never been equalled by
• 28:35
  Speaker 3: modern experimenters. Some of the feats of the modern Hindu
• 28:40
  Speaker 3: magicians or fakirs, which will be mentioned in detail as
• 28:43
  Speaker 3: we proceed, have never been equalled by Western hypnotists. The
• 28:48
  Speaker 3: tale of the Magi, as I have stated in less
• 28:52
  Speaker 3: than four of mental magic, the name magnet given to
• 28:55
  Speaker 3: the load stone or natural magnet, was bestowed by the
• 28:58
  Speaker 3: ancients because the observed properties of the loadstone resembled the
• 29:02
  Speaker 3: mental power of the magi or esoteric priesthood of ancient
• 29:06
  Speaker 3: Persia and Medeia. These priests were the magi or wise
• 29:10
  Speaker 3: men of the East, who had developed wonderful manative powers,
• 29:14
  Speaker 3: and who were known as wonder workers. The word magic
• 29:18
  Speaker 3: comes from the same source. When the attracting power and
• 29:21
  Speaker 3: quality of induction of the loadstone were noticed, it was
• 29:25
  Speaker 3: remarked that the physical phenomena closely resembled the mental phenomena
• 29:29
  Speaker 3: of the magi, and therefore the loadstone was called the
• 29:33
  Speaker 3: magian stone or the magic stone from which sprung the
• 29:37
  Speaker 3: terms magnet and magnetism. As the sentries rolled by and
• 29:42
  Speaker 3: the Western world had its attention called to the mysterious
• 29:45
  Speaker 3: phenomena of mesmerism et cetera. In the eighteenth century, the
• 29:50
  Speaker 3: public mind instinctively connected the phenomena with that of magnetism,
• 29:55
  Speaker 3: and the terms animal, magnetism, personal magnetism, et cetera came
• 30:00
  Speaker 3: into general use, and these terms persist to this day,
• 30:04
  Speaker 3: and we hear the terms very magnetic, lacking magnetism, magnetic personality,
• 30:10
  Speaker 3: et cetera, et cetera as applied to people. And so
• 30:15
  Speaker 3: history worked out an instance of the law of compensation.
• 30:19
  Speaker 3: The magnet, which took its name because its properties resembled
• 30:22
  Speaker 3: the phenomena resulting from the use of menative influence by
• 30:26
  Speaker 3: the magi, repaid the debt after many centuries and served
• 30:30
  Speaker 3: to give a name to mental manifestations resembling those of
• 30:34
  Speaker 3: the magi in the dim past. The magnet gives back
• 30:38
  Speaker 3: to the modern magi the name it borrowed from the
• 30:40
  Speaker 3: magi of ancient Persia. This is an interesting bit of
• 30:44
  Speaker 3: occult history, little known to the general public. Julius Caesar's
• 30:49
  Speaker 3: fascination ancient history as full of instances of the operation
• 30:54
  Speaker 3: of mental fascination among the people of the early days.
• 30:58
  Speaker 3: It is related that Julius Caesar, while quite a young man,
• 31:01
  Speaker 3: fell in with pirates near the Isle of Rhodes, who
• 31:04
  Speaker 3: captured his ship and took him prisoner. They held him
• 31:07
  Speaker 3: for several weeks while awaiting the ransom money being raised
• 31:11
  Speaker 3: by his relatives. Plutarch writes that while the young Caesar
• 31:15
  Speaker 3: was a captive of the pirates, he asserted his mastery
• 31:18
  Speaker 3: over them to such an extent that he seemed a
• 31:20
  Speaker 3: ruler rather than a prisoner. When he wished to rest
• 31:24
  Speaker 3: or sleep, he forbade them to make any noise, and
• 31:27
  Speaker 3: they obeyed him without question. He abused them and ordered
• 31:31
  Speaker 3: them around like servants, and they did not seem to
• 31:34
  Speaker 3: disobey him. He did not hesitate to threaten them with
• 31:38
  Speaker 3: death when he regained his liberty, and they did not
• 31:40
  Speaker 3: resent it, and he afterward made good his threat. The
• 31:45
  Speaker 3: mystic power of Alcibiades. It is related of Alcibiades the
• 31:50
  Speaker 3: Athenian that he once made a bet with some of
• 31:52
  Speaker 3: the young Athenian nobles that he would publicly box the
• 31:56
  Speaker 3: ears of Hipponicus, a venerable and greatly respected citizen. Not
• 32:01
  Speaker 3: only did he bet that he would do this thing,
• 32:04
  Speaker 3: but he also claimed that he would afterward compel the
• 32:06
  Speaker 3: old man to give him his favorite daughter in marriage.
• 32:10
  Speaker 3: The day following, when Hipponicus came out, Alcibiades walked up
• 32:14
  Speaker 3: to him and gave him a resounding box on the ears.
• 32:17
  Speaker 3: The old man seemed dazed and bewildered and retired to
• 32:21
  Speaker 3: his home. A great public outcry arose, and the young
• 32:25
  Speaker 3: man seemed likely to fall a victim to the indignation
• 32:27
  Speaker 3: of the citizens. But the next day Alcibiades went to
• 32:32
  Speaker 3: the home of Epponicus, and after making a pretense of
• 32:35
  Speaker 3: bearing his back for punishment, he managed to induce in
• 32:39
  Speaker 3: the old man a feeling of good humor and mirth,
• 32:42
  Speaker 3: and obtained his pardon and good will, the latter increasing
• 32:46
  Speaker 3: daily thereafter, until finally he grew so devoted to the
• 32:49
  Speaker 3: young man that he offered him the hand of his
• 32:51
  Speaker 3: daughter in marriage, which was accepted. Anyone who is acquainted
• 32:55
  Speaker 3: with the recorded character of the Athenians will realize what
• 32:58
  Speaker 3: a wonderful occurrence this was. It was a striking exhibition
• 33:02
  Speaker 3: of mental fascination. Without a question, the Napoleonic charm. All
• 33:09
  Speaker 3: the great generals of history have possessed this quality. Caesar,
• 33:13
  Speaker 3: Alexander the Great, Napoleon, Frederick the Great, and the modern
• 33:17
  Speaker 3: mystic warrior General Gordon all managed their men in a
• 33:20
  Speaker 3: mysterious and wonderful manner, so that their troops worshiped them
• 33:25
  Speaker 3: as almost gods, and went to their death willingly and joyfully.
• 33:30
  Speaker 3: The single instance of Napoleon, when he returned from Elba
• 33:34
  Speaker 3: and confronted the Bourbon army drawn up to capture him,
• 33:38
  Speaker 3: should satisfy any one of the possession of the greatest
• 33:40
  Speaker 3: fascinating power by this wonderful man. You remember that the
• 33:45
  Speaker 3: troops were drawn up confronting Napoleon, their muskets leveled at
• 33:50
  Speaker 3: his breast in obedience to the command aim. Napoleon, who
• 33:55
  Speaker 3: was on foot, marched deliberately toward the troops with measured tread,
• 34:00
  Speaker 3: gazing directly into their eyes. Then the officers shouted fire.
• 34:05
  Speaker 3: A single shot would have killed Napoleon and would have
• 34:08
  Speaker 3: brought to the man who fired it a fortune from
• 34:11
  Speaker 3: the Bourbon king. But not a man obeyed the order,
• 34:16
  Speaker 3: so completely were they under the spell of Napoleon's fascination.
• 34:20
  Speaker 3: Instead of firing, they threw down their guns and ran
• 34:23
  Speaker 3: joyfully toward the Corsicans, shouting vive l'm pore. Their officers
• 34:28
  Speaker 3: fled a. Napoleon, placing himself at the head of the troops,
• 34:32
  Speaker 3: marched on to Paris. Other troops flocked to his standard
• 34:36
  Speaker 3: at each point where he confronted them, although they had
• 34:39
  Speaker 3: been sent out to capture or kill him. By the
• 34:43
  Speaker 3: time the gate of Paris were reached, he was at
• 34:45
  Speaker 3: the head of an immense army. The fascination manifested by
• 34:49
  Speaker 3: this man was one of the marked instances of its
• 34:52
  Speaker 3: possession of which we have any record, and it seems
• 34:55
  Speaker 3: to endure to this day, almost a century after his death.
• 34:59
  Speaker 3: The very mention of his name makes one's blood tingle.
• 35:04
  Speaker 3: Modern examples, all great leaders of men, statesmen, orators, politicians,
• 35:10
  Speaker 3: et cetera, have the power of mental fascination developed to
• 35:14
  Speaker 3: a considerable degree. If you have ever come in contact
• 35:17
  Speaker 3: with a man of this sort, you will always remember
• 35:20
  Speaker 3: the impression he made upon you. Every man who knew
• 35:24
  Speaker 3: James G. Blaine will remember his personal magnetism, of which
• 35:28
  Speaker 3: so much was said during his lifetime. Anyone who heard
• 35:32
  Speaker 3: the famous speech of William J. Bryan at the Chicago Convention,
• 35:36
  Speaker 3: in which he made use of the famous expression thou
• 35:39
  Speaker 3: shalt not press upon the brow of labor the crown
• 35:42
  Speaker 3: of thorns, Thou shalt not crucify mankind upon the cross
• 35:46
  Speaker 3: of gold. Needs no further proof of the reality of
• 35:49
  Speaker 3: mental fascination. Brian was almost unknown to the majority of
• 35:53
  Speaker 3: the delegates, and no thought of nominating him was entertained
• 35:57
  Speaker 3: by them. But his magnetism was so great that it
• 36:00
  Speaker 3: swept the convention like a mighty tidal wave, carrying all
• 36:04
  Speaker 3: before it, and Brian was carried around the hall on
• 36:07
  Speaker 3: the shoulders of the delegates, who afterward made him their
• 36:10
  Speaker 3: nominee for president. And although defeated twice, this man still
• 36:14
  Speaker 3: possesses a wonderful fascination over hundreds of thousands of people
• 36:18
  Speaker 3: in this country, who would rally around his standard at
• 36:21
  Speaker 3: any time that he would sound the call. Henry Ward Beecher,
• 36:26
  Speaker 3: at the Great Meeting in England manifested the same power.
• 36:30
  Speaker 3: The whole meeting was against him and drowned his words
• 36:33
  Speaker 3: by hoots, yells, and other noises. But Beecher looked them
• 36:37
  Speaker 3: straight in the eye and gradually cowed them into subjection,
• 36:41
  Speaker 3: and then talked to them for two hours, and fairly
• 36:44
  Speaker 3: carried the meeting by storm. He was but one man,
• 36:48
  Speaker 3: facing thousands of other men hostile to him and determined
• 36:51
  Speaker 3: to prevent him from speaking. But the single man won
• 36:55
  Speaker 3: by the power of his mental fascination, manifesting in the
• 36:58
  Speaker 3: phase of will. It was not alone the words. In
• 37:02
  Speaker 3: these cases, it was the will behind the words. The
• 37:06
  Speaker 3: will is an actual living force, and as one of
• 37:09
  Speaker 3: the two great phases or poles of mental fascination. Mesmer
• 37:14
  Speaker 3: and his work. Coming down to the latter part of
• 37:18
  Speaker 3: the eighteenth century, and omitting all reference to the phenomena
• 37:22
  Speaker 3: of mental fascination recorded in the Middle Ages, we reach
• 37:25
  Speaker 3: what may be called the beginning of the revival of
• 37:28
  Speaker 3: the subject among the Western peoples. I allude to the
• 37:32
  Speaker 3: work of Frederick Anton Mesmer, a man who understood far
• 37:36
  Speaker 3: more than he taught, but who was regarded as a
• 37:38
  Speaker 3: charlatan and a trickster by the ignorant learned men of
• 37:42
  Speaker 3: his day. Those who are informed regarding the secret history
• 37:46
  Speaker 3: of Mesmer know that he was an occultist of no
• 37:48
  Speaker 3: mean attainments, who was compelled to cloak his real teachings
• 37:52
  Speaker 3: with popular theories and sensational phenomena in order to gain
• 37:56
  Speaker 3: the attention of the world and also to escape religious partions.
• 38:00
  Speaker 3: Mesmer was born in seventeen thirty four and in seventeen
• 38:04
  Speaker 3: seventy five began his work in Vienna by writing and
• 38:07
  Speaker 3: teaching about a mysterious universal fluid which was able to
• 38:11
  Speaker 3: control the wills of people and also cure them of diseases,
• 38:15
  Speaker 3: and which could be controlled and operated by man. He
• 38:19
  Speaker 3: taught that there was a universal fluid which permeated everything
• 38:23
  Speaker 3: and was capable of receiving and communicating all kinds of
• 38:26
  Speaker 3: motions and impressions. This fluid, he thought, acted immediately upon
• 38:31
  Speaker 3: the nerves in which it is embodied and produced in
• 38:34
  Speaker 3: the human body, phenomena similar to that of the lodestone
• 38:38
  Speaker 3: or magnet. He called this fluid animal magnetism. He taught
• 38:43
  Speaker 3: that this magnetism flowed rapidly from body to body, acted
• 38:48
  Speaker 3: at a distance, was reflected by a mirror like light,
• 38:51
  Speaker 3: et cetera, et cetera. Mesmer attracted to himself great attention
• 38:55
  Speaker 3: and great abuse. On the one hand, he was sneered
• 38:59
  Speaker 3: and scoffed at, and also driven out of the church
• 39:02
  Speaker 3: for possessing the power of the devil. And witchcraft. But
• 39:05
  Speaker 3: on the other hand he gathered around him a body
• 39:08
  Speaker 3: of supporters and students. He was investigated by a royal
• 39:12
  Speaker 3: commission and by scientific bodies, with varying results. The coming
• 39:16
  Speaker 3: of the French Revolution interfered with a general interest in
• 39:19
  Speaker 3: the subject. For a number of years, Mesmer's followers adhered
• 39:23
  Speaker 3: to his general lines of theory and practice, with unimportant
• 39:27
  Speaker 3: additions or changes. The Abpipharia in eighteen fourteen. The Abpipharia
• 39:35
  Speaker 3: attracted much interest in Paris. His theories were different from
• 39:39
  Speaker 3: those of Mesmer inasmuch as he claimed that the sleep
• 39:42
  Speaker 3: produced by Mesmer and his followers was not the result
• 39:45
  Speaker 3: of any outside force, but was caused by the patient himself.
• 39:50
  Speaker 3: For a number of years, a spirited contest was waged
• 39:52
  Speaker 3: between the two schools of Mesmerists, and much bad feeling
• 39:56
  Speaker 3: was developed. Braid and hypnotism. Then came James Braid, the
• 40:04
  Speaker 3: Manchester surgeon, who proceeded to tear down the accepted theories,
• 40:08
  Speaker 3: substituting one of his own. Braid may be called the
• 40:11
  Speaker 3: father of hypnotism, the term being first employed in connection
• 40:15
  Speaker 3: with his work. His theory was that there was no
• 40:18
  Speaker 3: such thing as animal magnetism, but the phenomena obtained by
• 40:22
  Speaker 3: Mesmer and his followers were caused by physiological condition brought
• 40:26
  Speaker 3: about by physical means such as fixing the eyes, rigidity
• 40:30
  Speaker 3: of the muscles, et cetera. Braid made some very important
• 40:34
  Speaker 3: contribution to the knowledge on the subject, although of course
• 40:38
  Speaker 3: all that he wrote or taught was colored by his
• 40:40
  Speaker 3: own particular theories. Braid regarded the hypnotic sleep produced by
• 40:45
  Speaker 3: his methods as the necessary condition and cause of the
• 40:48
  Speaker 3: phenomena of animal magnetism. Braid's writings brought the subject before
• 40:53
  Speaker 3: the attention of physicians who had up to his time
• 40:56
  Speaker 3: avoided it as unprofessional et cetera, and a series of
• 40:59
  Speaker 3: investsstigations where medical men in France and Germany were begun
• 41:03
  Speaker 3: and have continued up to this time. The result of
• 41:07
  Speaker 3: such investigation has been the placing of the subject upon
• 41:10
  Speaker 3: a scientific basis. Les Baux and suggestion, doctor Libeu of
• 41:17
  Speaker 3: the school of Nanci France, first brought into prominence the
• 41:21
  Speaker 3: theory of suggestion, which has since found so many followers.
• 41:25
  Speaker 3: Doctor Burnham, a people of Libaux, in his work Suggestive Therapeutics,
• 41:30
  Speaker 3: carried his teacher's theories on still Further, the theory of
• 41:34
  Speaker 3: suggestion as taught by Libaux and Bernheim, was that the
• 41:38
  Speaker 3: cause of the phenomena of mesmerism and animal magnetism, et
• 41:41
  Speaker 3: cetera lay in the verbal suggestion or verbal command of
• 41:45
  Speaker 3: the hypnotist to the subject, given and received while the
• 41:49
  Speaker 3: subject was in a deep hypnotic sleep. This hypnotic sleep
• 41:53
  Speaker 3: was considered to be an essential and fundamental prerequisite of
• 41:56
  Speaker 3: the phenomena. It was all sleep with the teachers, students,
• 42:01
  Speaker 3: and investigators at that day, and the majority of them
• 42:04
  Speaker 3: are still under the spell of the old teachings. Burnham's
• 42:09
  Speaker 3: mistake as an instance of how near a man may
• 42:12
  Speaker 3: come to a thing and still miss it. I may
• 42:15
  Speaker 3: mention that Burnham has recorded that in rare cases where
• 42:19
  Speaker 3: the conditions were exceptionally favorable, he could obtain results even
• 42:23
  Speaker 3: when the subject was not asleep. But he missed his
• 42:27
  Speaker 3: opportunity of following up this promising lead, and to the
• 42:30
  Speaker 3: end he proceeded upon the belief and theory that the
• 42:33
  Speaker 3: hypnotic sleep was a necessary precedent to the phenomena obtained.
• 42:38
  Speaker 3: He endeavored to produce the condition of deep sleep or
• 42:41
  Speaker 3: profound hypnosis, believing that the same was a necessary condition
• 42:46
  Speaker 3: for suggestibility. The very word hypnosis arises from the Greek
• 42:51
  Speaker 3: word meaning to lull, to sleep, so you can see
• 42:54
  Speaker 3: how deeply this idea of sleep was and is among hypnotists.
• 42:59
  Speaker 3: Remember this, always please, Hypnosis means a condition of sleep,
• 43:04
  Speaker 3: so never use the word in any other way. Mental
• 43:08
  Speaker 3: fascination is not hypnosis, although hypnosis is a form of
• 43:13
  Speaker 3: application of mental fascination the New School. During the past
• 43:19
  Speaker 3: ten years or so there has arisen a new school
• 43:22
  Speaker 3: of investigators of the phenomena of mesmerism, etc. This new
• 43:26
  Speaker 3: school proceeds upon the theory that the hypnotic sleep is
• 43:30
  Speaker 3: merely an incident, and that all the phenomena obtained by
• 43:34
  Speaker 3: the earlier authorities is possible without the production of a
• 43:37
  Speaker 3: sleep condition. In other words, sleep is not a necessary
• 43:41
  Speaker 3: condition of suggestibility. This brings a new school of the
• 43:46
  Speaker 3: suggestionists very near to the occult idea of mental fascination,
• 43:50
  Speaker 3: although there are some radical differences, as I shall show
• 43:53
  Speaker 3: in a moment. In eighteen eighty four, doctor Bremond announced
• 43:58
  Speaker 3: that he had made the discovery that there is a
• 44:00
  Speaker 3: fourth hypnotic state, which he called fascination, which left the
• 44:05
  Speaker 3: subject in full consciousness of his surroundings and remembrance of
• 44:08
  Speaker 3: what had taken place. If Ramond had only had the
• 44:11
  Speaker 3: courage to omit the fetish word hypnotic from his statement,
• 44:15
  Speaker 3: he would have founded a new school. But he didn't.
• 44:18
  Speaker 3: The German Freeman wrote a large book on the subject
• 44:22
  Speaker 3: of fascination, which he defined as hypnotism without the putting
• 44:25
  Speaker 3: to sleep, The Truth about Suggestion. Some of the best
• 44:32
  Speaker 3: work along the without sleep hypnotism has been done by
• 44:35
  Speaker 3: American experimenters and investigators, principally physicians, nearly all of whom
• 44:41
  Speaker 3: believe that suggestion is the explanation of the whole thing,
• 44:45
  Speaker 3: and that there is no such thing as a passage
• 44:47
  Speaker 3: of mental currents. These suggestionists hold that the subject act
• 44:51
  Speaker 3: upon the command and suggestion and does what he is told,
• 44:55
  Speaker 3: and that that is all there is to it. The
• 44:58
  Speaker 3: suggestible condition, to them, means a condition in which the
• 45:01
  Speaker 3: subject yields up his whole attention to the operator and
• 45:05
  Speaker 3: thus becomes suggestible, the degrees varying with the temperament, et
• 45:09
  Speaker 3: cetera of the subject. While the suggestionists believe that suggestion
• 45:14
  Speaker 3: is a whole explanation and cause, I hold that it
• 45:17
  Speaker 3: is but one of the methods of producing the effects
• 45:20
  Speaker 3: and that back of suggestion, is the induction of the
• 45:23
  Speaker 3: mental state by the suggestors. I have stated in my
• 45:26
  Speaker 3: work on Mental Magic, and as I shall bring out
• 45:29
  Speaker 3: in the present manual Personal Magnetism. Along with the new
• 45:36
  Speaker 3: theories of suggestion without sleep, there has arisen a great
• 45:40
  Speaker 3: interest in personal magnetism. During the past few years. There
• 45:44
  Speaker 3: has been much written on the subject, some good and
• 45:47
  Speaker 3: some ridiculous, and some between the two extremes. The laws
• 45:51
  Speaker 3: of the subject are being studied by the thinking public.
• 45:55
  Speaker 3: There has been a great revival in the interest in occultism, which,
• 45:59
  Speaker 3: together with the various phases of mental science, theosophy, new Thought,
• 46:03
  Speaker 3: and kindred subjects, has attracted the attention of a large
• 46:07
  Speaker 3: portion of the public to the general subject of mental
• 46:10
  Speaker 3: magic and to the special subject of mental fascination in particular.
• 46:15
  Speaker 3: And to this manual is written in response to the
• 46:17
  Speaker 3: present demand for definite information on the subject. I feel
• 46:21
  Speaker 3: sure that I will be able to show you that
• 46:24
  Speaker 3: the law of menative energy, in its operation along the
• 46:27
  Speaker 3: line of menative currents, as stated in my book on
• 46:29
  Speaker 3: Mental Magic, will account for all the phenomena mentioned above.
• 46:33
  Speaker 3: In the history of the general subject, as well as
• 46:36
  Speaker 3: many other forms. I believe that I can bring it
• 46:39
  Speaker 3: all under the definition of the action of a mental
• 46:42
  Speaker 3: force that powerfully influences the imagination, desire, or will of another,
• 46:48
  Speaker 3: which is my definition of mental fascination the reconciliation.
• 46:54
  Speaker 4: In my last chapter I have shown you the opposing
• 46:56
  Speaker 4: theories of the various schools which have investigated and experimented
• 46:59
  Speaker 4: along the lines of mental fascination under some of its
• 47:02
  Speaker 4: many names. All of these schools obtained results, notwithstanding their
• 47:07
  Speaker 4: varying in diametrically opposite theories, the same kinds of results. Remember,
• 47:12
  Speaker 4: and more than this, they all obtained these results in
• 47:15
  Speaker 4: very much the same way. When we come to examine
• 47:17
  Speaker 4: the essence of the procedure, after discarding the forms added
• 47:21
  Speaker 4: to fit in with the particular theories of the practitioner,
• 47:25
  Speaker 4: a new synthesis. I believe that all the opposing theories
• 47:28
  Speaker 4: of the schools may be reconciled by a new synthesis,
• 47:31
  Speaker 4: that of meditative energy, with its incidental phenomenon of meditative induction,
• 47:36
  Speaker 4: as set forth in My Mental Magic, and further expounded
• 47:39
  Speaker 4: in this little manual of which this chapter is a part,
• 47:43
  Speaker 4: I believe that theories so far are divergent as Mesmer's
• 47:46
  Speaker 4: universal magnetic fluid, Abipharia's sleep, Braid's hypnotism, Bovi, Dodd's electro biology,
• 47:54
  Speaker 4: Lebolt's suggestion, Bernheim's suggestion, the later suggestion without slap, Bremen's fascination,
• 48:02
  Speaker 4: and the various other theories advanced since the time of
• 48:05
  Speaker 4: Mesmer can be reconciled and harmonized by a careful application
• 48:08
  Speaker 4: of the theory of mentitative induction, as advanced in my
• 48:12
  Speaker 4: work on mental magic. And I believe that all the
• 48:15
  Speaker 4: phenomena obtained by any and all of the above schools,
• 48:18
  Speaker 4: as well as the phenomena of the ancient fascinators, and
• 48:21
  Speaker 4: the phenomena known as personal magnetism, charming, personal influence, magnetic personality, etc.
• 48:28
  Speaker 4: Et cetera, of ancient and modern times, may be accounted
• 48:31
  Speaker 4: for by the same theory. And so this chapter shall
• 48:34
  Speaker 4: be devoted to the reconciliation of the various old theories
• 48:37
  Speaker 4: with this basic principle of mentitative induction. Mesmer explained. Let
• 48:43
  Speaker 4: us first examine the real facts underlying Mesmer's theory of
• 48:46
  Speaker 4: the universal magnetic fluid. Mesmer taught that there existed a peculiar,
• 48:50
  Speaker 4: subtle fluid, magnetic in its nature, which was diffused throughout
• 48:54
  Speaker 4: all space, which permeated everything, and which was capable of
• 48:58
  Speaker 4: receiving and communicating all sorts of mine and impressions. He
• 49:02
  Speaker 4: taught that this fluid flowed freely from one body to another,
• 49:05
  Speaker 4: acted at a distance, and could be reflected by a mirror,
• 49:08
  Speaker 4: et cetera. He did not explain what this fluid was,
• 49:11
  Speaker 4: except that it produced magnetic effects and must therefore be
• 49:14
  Speaker 4: magnetic in its nature. He proved that he could produce effects,
• 49:19
  Speaker 4: and he gave out a theory to fit in with
• 49:20
  Speaker 4: the facts, and that was within the comprehension of the
• 49:23
  Speaker 4: people of his time. Now let us apply the idea
• 49:26
  Speaker 4: of universal meditative energy with its incidental phenomenon of meditative induction,
• 49:31
  Speaker 4: to Mesmer's theory, and see how easily the reconciliation is effected.
• 49:35
  Speaker 4: The meditative energy, like Mesmer's fluid, is universal, is diffused
• 49:39
  Speaker 4: through all space, permeates everything. Like the fluid, it apparently
• 49:43
  Speaker 4: passes from body to body, and communicates impressions, et cetera.
• 49:47
  Speaker 4: But now we know that the energy is transmitted in
• 49:49
  Speaker 4: waves or vibrations, which reproduce the original feeling by meditative induction.
• 49:54
  Speaker 4: In the second person, there is no necessity for the
• 49:57
  Speaker 4: flowing fluid anymore than there is for an electric fluid
• 50:00
  Speaker 4: flowing over wires or through the air. The fluid idea
• 50:04
  Speaker 4: has been superseded by the wave idea in both physics
• 50:06
  Speaker 4: and metaphysics the nature of the magnetic fluid. We may
• 50:10
  Speaker 4: readily see that this magnetic fluid theory of Mesmer may
• 50:14
  Speaker 4: be explained by the theory of meditative energy and mentitative induction.
• 50:18
  Speaker 4: There is no magnetic fluid. The energy is mental in nature,
• 50:21
  Speaker 4: in operation, and the phenomena arising therefrom is mentitative. Also
• 50:26
  Speaker 4: Mesmer sought for his answer in physics, but we find
• 50:29
  Speaker 4: it in metaphysics. The force is not physical, it is mental.
• 50:33
  Speaker 4: All the phenomena obtained by Mesmer and his followers may
• 50:35
  Speaker 4: be accounted for by the theory of meditative energy and
• 50:38
  Speaker 4: meditative induction. The mental states of the mesmerist may be
• 50:42
  Speaker 4: communicated to his subject by waves of meditative energy, and
• 50:45
  Speaker 4: a corresponding feeling or mental state is induced by meditative induction.
• 50:51
  Speaker 4: As we shall see as we proceed, the sleep of
• 50:53
  Speaker 4: the Mesmerists and hypnotists is merely an induction condition, arising
• 50:57
  Speaker 4: from the desire in the mind of the operator, accompanied
• 51:00
  Speaker 4: by the suggestion on his part. Fabria explained the theory
• 51:05
  Speaker 4: of abbe Pharia, that the sleep condition was not the
• 51:08
  Speaker 4: result of any outside force, but arose from within the
• 51:10
  Speaker 4: patient himself, is also reconciled by the theory of menditative
• 51:14
  Speaker 4: energy and induction. Of course, the sleep arises from within
• 51:17
  Speaker 4: the patient himself, but it is induced by the waves
• 51:19
  Speaker 4: of menditative energy of the operator accompanied by his active suggestions.
• 51:24
  Speaker 4: Braid reconciled. Braid's theory is also reconciled. He held that
• 51:29
  Speaker 4: the phenomenon was of a physical nature rather than a
• 51:31
  Speaker 4: mental and that it was a reflex physical action, arising
• 51:35
  Speaker 4: from fixing the eyes, rigidity of the muscles, et cetera.
• 51:38
  Speaker 4: His hypnotic sleep was undoubtedly heightened by his practice of
• 51:41
  Speaker 4: tiring the eyes and muscles, on the same principle that
• 51:44
  Speaker 4: one is tired mentally by unusual exertion of the eyes,
• 51:47
  Speaker 4: as in the case of visiting an art gallery, museum,
• 51:49
  Speaker 4: strange city, et cetera, and that the power of resistance
• 51:52
  Speaker 4: is thereby weakened, and one is far more likely to
• 51:55
  Speaker 4: then accept suggestions of menditative waves. How many of us
• 51:59
  Speaker 4: have felt mentally done out after visiting a museum, or
• 52:01
  Speaker 4: after witnessing a long parade, or after sitting through a
• 52:03
  Speaker 4: modern circus performance with its three rings going at one time.
• 52:07
  Speaker 4: And who does not remember how many foolish things he
• 52:09
  Speaker 4: had done at times when he was too tuckered out
• 52:11
  Speaker 4: to object to the suggestions and influences of those around
• 52:14
  Speaker 4: him a danger signal. Many a girl has gone to
• 52:18
  Speaker 4: our ruin by the subtle suggestions and influence of some
• 52:21
  Speaker 4: male scoundrel directed toward her after an evening of the
• 52:23
  Speaker 4: show or circus, or after a day of sight seeing
• 52:26
  Speaker 4: in a strange city. I tell you, friends, that in
• 52:28
  Speaker 4: such cases, the will becomes tired by overuse, arising from
• 52:31
  Speaker 4: unaccustomed tasks, and it becomes woozy and incapable of resisting
• 52:35
  Speaker 4: the attacks upon it. As I have told you in
• 52:37
  Speaker 4: my larger work, beware of all suggestions, et cetera. When
• 52:40
  Speaker 4: in a tired state, make a habit of saying no
• 52:43
  Speaker 4: to attempts to make you commit yourself. At such times,
• 52:46
  Speaker 4: wait until you feel fresh and strong and the will
• 52:48
  Speaker 4: is able to attend its business for you. Many a
• 52:51
  Speaker 4: man has said yes, to his sorrow to propositions advanced
• 52:54
  Speaker 4: to him when he was tired by the day's work,
• 52:55
  Speaker 4: and his will was weak and unable to resist. I
• 52:58
  Speaker 4: cannot say this to you too often, and have therefore
• 53:01
  Speaker 4: dragged it in again at this place. There is a
• 53:03
  Speaker 4: great psychological principle involved in this point, and you will
• 53:06
  Speaker 4: do well to fasten it in your memory. Braid's theory
• 53:09
  Speaker 4: may be reconciled to the idea of meditative energy and
• 53:12
  Speaker 4: induction when we see that his eye fixation and muscular
• 53:14
  Speaker 4: rigidity is merely the means of producing a suggestible condition,
• 53:18
  Speaker 4: that is to say, a condition in which suggestions are
• 53:21
  Speaker 4: more readily accepted and meditative currents are more readily received.
• 53:25
  Speaker 4: In both cases, the tired will allowing the outside influence
• 53:29
  Speaker 4: to enter suggestion explained. The theories of suggestion are not
• 53:34
  Speaker 4: contrary to those of meditative energy and induction when properly understood.
• 53:38
  Speaker 4: The facts of the suggestionists are undoubted, but they make
• 53:41
  Speaker 4: the mistake of ignoring the mental states of the suggestionist.
• 53:45
  Speaker 4: They think that their effects are produced by suggestion alone,
• 53:47
  Speaker 4: and forget the mental state behind the suggestion, which is
• 53:50
  Speaker 4: the real motive force. If their theories be true. Why
• 53:53
  Speaker 4: is it that two men using the same words of
• 53:55
  Speaker 4: suggestion upon the same subject produce varying degrees of effect.
• 53:58
  Speaker 4: It is because the mental state or dynamic mentation of
• 54:01
  Speaker 4: the two men varying quality and degree. The suggestionist thinks
• 54:04
  Speaker 4: that he is merely directing his suggestion by words, etc.
• 54:07
  Speaker 4: Towards the subject, but all the time he is pouring
• 54:09
  Speaker 4: out a current of menditative energy which rapidly induces the
• 54:12
  Speaker 4: desired mental state in the subject. The best suggestionists are
• 54:16
  Speaker 4: those who have acquired the suggestive manner, which is developed
• 54:19
  Speaker 4: by the exercise of authoritative utterances and commands, the physical appearance,
• 54:23
  Speaker 4: manner and tones arising from a reflection of the mental
• 54:26
  Speaker 4: state within. I have seen this in the case of
• 54:28
  Speaker 4: one of America's most celebrated suggestionists, a prominent physician and
• 54:32
  Speaker 4: scientist with whom I was associated in magazine and other
• 54:35
  Speaker 4: work in the year's nineteen hundred and one. I have
• 54:38
  Speaker 4: seen the doctor giving the most powerful suggestions at one
• 54:41
  Speaker 4: of his classes or clinics. So powerful were the emanations
• 54:44
  Speaker 4: of menditative energy or currents of the same that the
• 54:47
  Speaker 4: members of the class could distinctly feel the same and
• 54:49
  Speaker 4: at times could almost see them. And yet the doctor,
• 54:52
  Speaker 4: who was wedded to his particular theories of suggestion pure
• 54:56
  Speaker 4: and simple, after such a wonderful manifestation, would calmly inform
• 54:59
  Speaker 4: his class that that it was nothing but suggestion, nothing
• 55:01
  Speaker 4: more to it, and he believed it. But hundreds who
• 55:04
  Speaker 4: attended his classes went away more firmly convinced than ever
• 55:07
  Speaker 4: that there was something more to it, and that there
• 55:10
  Speaker 4: was a cause behind his suggestions. The theory of suggestion
• 55:13
  Speaker 4: is all right, But what lies back of suggestion? What
• 55:16
  Speaker 4: gives the suggestion its force? Of what inner and invisible
• 55:19
  Speaker 4: thing is the suggestion? The visible and outward sign menditative
• 55:23
  Speaker 4: energy in harmony harmonized and my theory of meditative energy
• 55:28
  Speaker 4: and induction may be reconciled with the theories of the
• 55:30
  Speaker 4: later suggestionists, including those who still adhere to the sleep delusion,
• 55:34
  Speaker 4: as well as those who have advanced beyond it. And
• 55:36
  Speaker 4: it explains all the phenomena of the ancients with the
• 55:39
  Speaker 4: religious and mystic rights. The phenomena of charming, fascination, personal magnetism,
• 55:44
  Speaker 4: personal influence, et cetera, is all embraced under the theory
• 55:47
  Speaker 4: advanced in this work, and my larger work which preceded it.
• 55:50
  Speaker 4: As we proceed with this work, we shall see the
• 55:52
  Speaker 4: menditative energy and menditative induction in actual active operation in
• 55:56
  Speaker 4: these various phases of phenomena. But I trust that this
• 55:59
  Speaker 4: chapter will have show you that there is one principle
• 56:01
  Speaker 4: underlying all of the various theories and phenomena, and that
• 56:04
  Speaker 4: the facts of meditative energy and the operation of the
• 56:07
  Speaker 4: same in its phenomenal incident a meditative induction, are sufficient
• 56:11
  Speaker 4: to include and cover all of the varying manifestations of
• 56:14
  Speaker 4: the force observable under the disguises of the conflicting theories
• 56:18
  Speaker 4: of the various schools and cults. There is but one
• 56:20
  Speaker 4: underlying cause, and that is meantitative energy. There is but
• 56:24
  Speaker 4: one underlying law of the operation of this force in
• 56:26
  Speaker 4: the direction of affecting other minds, and that law is
• 56:29
  Speaker 4: menditative induction, either direct i e. By meditative currents or
• 56:33
  Speaker 4: indirect i e. By suggestion, or, as is generally the case,
• 56:37
  Speaker 4: by both combined the rationale of fascination. In this chapter,
• 56:43
  Speaker 4: I shall proceed to lay before you the rationale of fascination,
• 56:46
  Speaker 4: that is, an exposition of the principles of its operation.
• 56:50
  Speaker 4: While the phenomena of fascination extends over a very wide
• 56:53
  Speaker 4: area or field. There is still to be found a
• 56:55
  Speaker 4: certain unity of principle of operation underlying all of the
• 56:58
  Speaker 4: forms and phases. From this point of view, we may
• 57:01
  Speaker 4: speak of the science of fascination as well as of
• 57:04
  Speaker 4: the philosophy of fascination. The fundamental principle, the fundamental principle
• 57:09
  Speaker 4: of the operation of the mental phenomena known as fascination
• 57:13
  Speaker 4: is found in the theory of mentitative induction, as stated
• 57:16
  Speaker 4: in my work on Mental Magic, and which is briefly
• 57:18
  Speaker 4: stated in the first chapter of the present book. This theory,
• 57:21
  Speaker 4: you will remember, holds that each individual mind is a
• 57:24
  Speaker 4: center of menditative energy, and that the menditative energy of
• 57:27
  Speaker 4: an individual mind may be and is transmitted from one
• 57:31
  Speaker 4: person to another by means of menditative waves or currents.
• 57:34
  Speaker 4: That these meditative waves or currents tend to induce in
• 57:37
  Speaker 4: the minds of other persons the emotions or feelings existing
• 57:40
  Speaker 4: in the mental states of the person sending out the
• 57:42
  Speaker 4: waves or currents. In this connection, we must also remember
• 57:46
  Speaker 4: that there are two mental poles, known as the motive
• 57:49
  Speaker 4: and emotive poles, respectively. The motive pole manifesting as will power,
• 57:53
  Speaker 4: and the emotive pole manifesting as desire force. Desire force
• 57:57
  Speaker 4: acts in the direction of drawing, pulling a train, luring, coaxing, charming,
• 58:02
  Speaker 4: et cetera, while will power acts in the direction of compelling, forcing, driving, impelling, commanding, demanding,
• 58:09
  Speaker 4: et cetera. Desire force always draws its object towards itself,
• 58:14
  Speaker 4: while will power always overpowers and compels its object, generally
• 58:18
  Speaker 4: in the sense of driving it into action meantitative induction.
• 58:23
  Speaker 4: This mentitative induction acts along similar lines to the induction
• 58:26
  Speaker 4: of electricity and magnetism. That is, it sets up similar
• 58:30
  Speaker 4: states in the object affected. And the resemblance is even
• 58:32
  Speaker 4: still further marked when we consider that the phenomena of
• 58:35
  Speaker 4: electricity closely resemble the action of the will inasmuch as
• 58:39
  Speaker 4: both tend to drive outward in the form of an
• 58:42
  Speaker 4: impelling force, and that the phenomena of magnetism resemble the
• 58:45
  Speaker 4: action of desire inasmuch as both tend to draw inward
• 58:49
  Speaker 4: in the form of an attracting energy. An interesting question
• 58:54
  Speaker 4: in this connection, however, I would direct the attention of
• 58:56
  Speaker 4: the student to one fact concerning the effect of induced states,
• 59:00
  Speaker 4: which some have failed to grasp in my teachings in
• 59:02
  Speaker 4: my work on mental magic. The matter may be stated
• 59:05
  Speaker 4: by the inquiry of a student of the last mentioned
• 59:07
  Speaker 4: work who inquires as follows, Please inform me how it
• 59:11
  Speaker 4: is that an induced mental state reproduces the original mental
• 59:14
  Speaker 4: state of the mentator. In the following case, a man
• 59:18
  Speaker 4: desires to have another perform a certain act and sends
• 59:21
  Speaker 4: a meditative current which acts by induction on the mind
• 59:24
  Speaker 4: of the second person, setting up an induced mental state therein.
• 59:28
  Speaker 4: The second person then performs the act desired by the
• 59:30
  Speaker 4: first person. Now, if the induced mental state was the
• 59:33
  Speaker 4: same as the original one, would not the second party
• 59:36
  Speaker 4: simply also desire that the first party should do the act,
• 59:39
  Speaker 4: just as the first party desired that the second should
• 59:42
  Speaker 4: do it. But it does not work so, for the
• 59:44
  Speaker 4: second party does not so desire, but instead merely desires
• 59:48
  Speaker 4: to do just what the first party desired him to do.
• 59:50
  Speaker 4: That is, he feels within himself a desire to do
• 59:53
  Speaker 4: that which the first party desires shall be done. It
• 59:56
  Speaker 4: seems to me that the induced state is really the
• 59:58
  Speaker 4: opposite of the original state. Please set me straight on
• 1:00:01
  Speaker 4: this the answer. I am very glad to have the
• 1:00:05
  Speaker 4: opportunity to set straight my students on this point. A
• 1:00:08
  Speaker 4: careful examination will show that both states are similar. For instance,
• 1:00:12
  Speaker 4: A desires that B shall do a certain thing and
• 1:00:14
  Speaker 4: induces a similar state in B. The induced state produces
• 1:00:18
  Speaker 4: in B a like desire that the things shall be
• 1:00:20
  Speaker 4: done as he proceeds to do it. No opposite action
• 1:00:24
  Speaker 4: here is there. The essence of the desire in both
• 1:00:26
  Speaker 4: cases is the same, namely that the thing shall be done.
• 1:00:30
  Speaker 4: The expression of the feeling of the two persons in
• 1:00:32
  Speaker 4: the case as one I desire that you shall do
• 1:00:35
  Speaker 4: and two I desire to do, respectively, are merely the
• 1:00:39
  Speaker 4: personal forms of expression and not the essence of the
• 1:00:41
  Speaker 4: desire or feeling. The desire or feeling in its real
• 1:00:45
  Speaker 4: essence is I desire this thing done, and both hold
• 1:00:48
  Speaker 4: the same desire. A holding the original desire or feeling,
• 1:00:52
  Speaker 4: and be the induced desire or feeling. Think this over
• 1:00:55
  Speaker 4: a little until you see the point. Induced will acts
• 1:00:59
  Speaker 4: in the same way as the above mentioned instance of
• 1:01:01
  Speaker 4: the action of the induced desire. Of course, in all
• 1:01:04
  Speaker 4: cases of the action of desire, the will is also
• 1:01:07
  Speaker 4: called into operation. In the above cited case, it works
• 1:01:10
  Speaker 4: as follows. A feels the desire to have the thing done,
• 1:01:14
  Speaker 4: and so his will is called into operation to concentrate
• 1:01:16
  Speaker 4: the meditative currents and to project them to a focused
• 1:01:19
  Speaker 4: point on the mind of B. Then B, feeling the
• 1:01:22
  Speaker 4: induced desire that the thing shall be done, awakens his
• 1:01:25
  Speaker 4: will and does the thing. Do you see this also,
• 1:01:28
  Speaker 4: You had better fix this process firmly in your minds,
• 1:01:30
  Speaker 4: for it is the key to the operation of the
• 1:01:32
  Speaker 4: principle of fascination and other meditative phenomenon making another feel
• 1:01:37
  Speaker 4: like doing. Now to get back to the first principle,
• 1:01:40
  Speaker 4: which is that one person may make a second person
• 1:01:43
  Speaker 4: feel like doing a thing that the first person wishes
• 1:01:45
  Speaker 4: to have done. That is the thing in a nutshell.
• 1:01:48
  Speaker 4: And in the degree that the second person so feels
• 1:01:51
  Speaker 4: like doing the thing, so will be the degree of
• 1:01:53
  Speaker 4: desire and will induced in him, and consequently, so will
• 1:01:56
  Speaker 4: be the likelihood of his actually doing it. You see,
• 1:01:59
  Speaker 4: the matter of feeling like is at the bottom of
• 1:02:01
  Speaker 4: it all. And this being so, it is readily seen
• 1:02:04
  Speaker 4: that if one is able to induce a state of
• 1:02:06
  Speaker 4: feeling like in another, he has the secret of the
• 1:02:08
  Speaker 4: control of the other person's actions. Now this is the
• 1:02:11
  Speaker 4: basis of mental fascination. Now let us see how this
• 1:02:15
  Speaker 4: principle works out in a case of mesmerism or hypnotism
• 1:02:18
  Speaker 4: so called, which after all, is but a phase of
• 1:02:20
  Speaker 4: mental fascination governed by the above mentioned principle. I prefer
• 1:02:24
  Speaker 4: the term mesmerism for several reasons, among them being the
• 1:02:27
  Speaker 4: fact that it is a recognition of mesmer its discoverer
• 1:02:30
  Speaker 4: or rediscoverer, and also the fact that hypnotism means sleep,
• 1:02:34
  Speaker 4: while mesmerism covers the whole phenomena in both its waking
• 1:02:37
  Speaker 4: or sleep conditions. A case of mesmerism, well, let us
• 1:02:41
  Speaker 4: suppose a case of mesmerism. The mesmerist, whom I will
• 1:02:44
  Speaker 4: call the operator, faces the subject. The operator assumes a
• 1:02:47
  Speaker 4: positive state of mind, his will power being active and concentrated.
• 1:02:51
  Speaker 4: Practice having improved him along these lines. The subject naturally
• 1:02:54
  Speaker 4: assumes a negative mental state, opening his emotive mental poll
• 1:02:57
  Speaker 4: to the influence of the mind or will of the operator,
• 1:03:00
  Speaker 4: and allowing his motive mental pull to remain quiescent or relaxed.
• 1:03:04
  Speaker 4: That is to say, he opens his desire mind to
• 1:03:07
  Speaker 4: the influence of the operator and lets his will remain
• 1:03:09
  Speaker 4: inactive and relaxed. The operator desires and wills that the
• 1:03:13
  Speaker 4: subject be influenced, and the subject degrees consciously or unconsciously
• 1:03:16
  Speaker 4: to be so influenced. One wills and the other is willing,
• 1:03:20
  Speaker 4: which latter paradoxical expression means that he is not willing.
• 1:03:25
  Speaker 4: The operator naturally asserts his positivity, while the subject assumes
• 1:03:28
  Speaker 4: a decided state of negativity. One asserts a supremacy of will,
• 1:03:31
  Speaker 4: and the others submits. I would call your attention to
• 1:03:34
  Speaker 4: the fact that there is no physical compulsion or influence
• 1:03:37
  Speaker 4: in the matter. It is all a matter of mentation,
• 1:03:39
  Speaker 4: and both parties fully recognize the reality of the phenomenon
• 1:03:44
  Speaker 4: the silent conflict. The above relative mental state of the
• 1:03:47
  Speaker 4: two persons is apparent in a greater or lesser degree.
• 1:03:50
  Speaker 4: Whenever two persons meet, one is always stronger meantitatively than
• 1:03:54
  Speaker 4: the other, and a silent conflict ensues, from which one
• 1:03:57
  Speaker 4: or the other emerges a victor, and the result is wrecked, ignized,
• 1:04:00
  Speaker 4: and acquiesced in by both victor and vanquished ord Narrowly, However,
• 1:04:04
  Speaker 4: the distinction is not nearly so marked or great as
• 1:04:06
  Speaker 4: in the case of a strong mesmerist and his negative subject,
• 1:04:10
  Speaker 4: the latter having probably been trained in negativity by repeated
• 1:04:13
  Speaker 4: trials and experiments in private and in public. For know
• 1:04:17
  Speaker 4: you that even as positivity may be cultivated, developed, and
• 1:04:20
  Speaker 4: strengthened by practice in actual performance, so alas may negativity
• 1:04:24
  Speaker 4: be encouraged, developed, and made habitual by a continued practice
• 1:04:27
  Speaker 4: of giving in to the will of another or others.
• 1:04:30
  Speaker 4: It is all a matter of habit, positive and negative.
• 1:04:36
  Speaker 4: It will be seen at once that given a subject
• 1:04:38
  Speaker 4: and operator bearing the stated degrees of relative positivity and negativity,
• 1:04:42
  Speaker 4: the subject will have a tendency to accept and obey
• 1:04:44
  Speaker 4: the wishes and commands of the operator with a minimum
• 1:04:46
  Speaker 4: degree of resistance. The operator will strongly wish the subject
• 1:04:50
  Speaker 4: to feel in a certain way and to act upon
• 1:04:52
  Speaker 4: the feeling. To accomplish this result, he will concentrate his
• 1:04:56
  Speaker 4: desire by his will, and then direct a combined and
• 1:04:58
  Speaker 4: focused attack on the mon of the subject. He is
• 1:05:02
  Speaker 4: likely to call suggestion to his aid in the attack,
• 1:05:04
  Speaker 4: for by so doing he is able to obtain an
• 1:05:06
  Speaker 4: additional advantage. For a suggestion, as I have stated in
• 1:05:10
  Speaker 4: my work on mental magic, is a physical agent inducing
• 1:05:12
  Speaker 4: mental states, or an outward invisible sign of an inward
• 1:05:15
  Speaker 4: feeling or mental state which tends to induce a similar
• 1:05:18
  Speaker 4: feeling in the mind of accepting the suggestion the suggestive command.
• 1:05:24
  Speaker 4: The operator gives the subject in the suggestion by command
• 1:05:27
  Speaker 4: and in accordance with the phrase of suggestion known as
• 1:05:29
  Speaker 4: suggestion through obedience see my work on mental magic. The
• 1:05:33
  Speaker 4: subject obeys. It must not be forgotten, however, that the
• 1:05:36
  Speaker 4: suggestion is merely the outward symbol of the inward mental
• 1:05:38
  Speaker 4: state of the operator, and becomes effective only by reason
• 1:05:41
  Speaker 4: of this fact. The operator throws his intensified desire, force,
• 1:05:45
  Speaker 4: and will power into the suggestion and receives an effect
• 1:05:48
  Speaker 4: along the line of the threefold activity. With his will,
• 1:05:51
  Speaker 4: he produces a dual effect i e. One, he captivates
• 1:05:54
  Speaker 4: the desire of the subject and induces in it the
• 1:05:57
  Speaker 4: desired feeling like state. Two, he takes captive the will
• 1:06:00
  Speaker 4: of the subject and subjugates it to his own, and
• 1:06:03
  Speaker 4: at the same time, by his desire, he also produces
• 1:06:06
  Speaker 4: a dual effect i e. One, he induces a similar
• 1:06:09
  Speaker 4: desire in the mind of the subject by meditative waves
• 1:06:11
  Speaker 4: or currents, and two he allures or seduces the will
• 1:06:14
  Speaker 4: of the subject by the strength of his desire. The
• 1:06:17
  Speaker 4: result of this combined attack causes the mind of the
• 1:06:19
  Speaker 4: subject to act as follows, which adds a third dual
• 1:06:22
  Speaker 4: effect to the operation, i e. One, the subject's desire,
• 1:06:26
  Speaker 4: being induced as stated by the operator, acts to influence
• 1:06:30
  Speaker 4: his own will, thus making the latter fall in with
• 1:06:32
  Speaker 4: the induced desire. Two, the subject's will, controlled as stated
• 1:06:36
  Speaker 4: by the operator, acts upon its own desire, thus making
• 1:06:38
  Speaker 4: the latter fall in with the seduced will. It must
• 1:06:42
  Speaker 4: be remembered that the three mental operations above mentioned are concurrent,
• 1:06:45
  Speaker 4: that is, they act at the same time and exercise
• 1:06:47
  Speaker 4: joint action and control upon the mind of the subject,
• 1:06:50
  Speaker 4: and neither the operator nor the subject are necessarily conscious
• 1:06:53
  Speaker 4: of there being three dual actions underway. The operator simply
• 1:06:57
  Speaker 4: desires and wills with or without suggestion, while the subject
• 1:07:00
  Speaker 4: simply feels like as before stated and accepts the suggestion
• 1:07:04
  Speaker 4: if one is given, without recognizing the various mental operations
• 1:07:07
  Speaker 4: going on to reduce the feeling like. The detailed explanation
• 1:07:10
  Speaker 4: may make the operation seem complicated, while in reality it
• 1:07:13
  Speaker 4: appears to both the operator and subject as quite a
• 1:07:16
  Speaker 4: simple matter. Indeed, the day dream state the above process
• 1:07:20
  Speaker 4: is the same whether the operator merely produces the simplest
• 1:07:23
  Speaker 4: result upon the subject or whether he secures the most
• 1:07:25
  Speaker 4: remarkable and startling exhibitions of the control of one mind
• 1:07:28
  Speaker 4: by another. The principle of operation is the same in
• 1:07:31
  Speaker 4: all cases, with sleep or without sleep. It is the same.
• 1:07:35
  Speaker 4: In fact, as we shall see, the very sleep condition
• 1:07:37
  Speaker 4: is produced just as are the other effects, and its
• 1:07:40
  Speaker 4: production merely tends to produce a day dream state in
• 1:07:43
  Speaker 4: the subject and thus makes him act in a daydreamlike
• 1:07:46
  Speaker 4: manner with appropriate illusions. Sleep phenomena are merely one of
• 1:07:50
  Speaker 4: the side issues of mesmerism when the true principle is understood.
• 1:07:54
  Speaker 4: Habit and reputition. Habit and repetition. In our consideration of the
• 1:08:00
  Speaker 4: operation of mesmerism, we must not forget the part that
• 1:08:02
  Speaker 4: habit and repetition play in the matter. For instance, the
• 1:08:05
  Speaker 4: operator may be able to produce only the simplest effects
• 1:08:08
  Speaker 4: at first trial, but at each subsequent trial, in which
• 1:08:11
  Speaker 4: he gains more and more control over the subject and
• 1:08:13
  Speaker 4: a greater acquiescence and degree of obedience, he is able
• 1:08:16
  Speaker 4: to obtain a still more marked effect. If you will
• 1:08:18
  Speaker 4: read my remarks on the suggestion by repetition in my
• 1:08:21
  Speaker 4: work on mental Magic, page one twenty, you will realize
• 1:08:25
  Speaker 4: the awful force of repetition and habit, as well as
• 1:08:27
  Speaker 4: the power of repeated statement. This psychological fact is like
• 1:08:31
  Speaker 4: the operation of the wedge. Admit the thin edge in
• 1:08:33
  Speaker 4: each additional blow drives it further. In this works along
• 1:08:36
  Speaker 4: the lines of both good and evil. Remember, the wise
• 1:08:39
  Speaker 4: use it to their own strengthening, while the foolish allow
• 1:08:41
  Speaker 4: it to be their undoing. Beware of the thin edge
• 1:08:44
  Speaker 4: of the wedge of undesirable habits of thought and action,
• 1:08:47
  Speaker 4: a psychological law. The mesmerist understands well, often too well,
• 1:08:52
  Speaker 4: the nature and results of the above mentioned psychological law.
• 1:08:55
  Speaker 4: He has found out by experience that although it may
• 1:08:58
  Speaker 4: be difficult to control a subject the first time, it
• 1:09:01
  Speaker 4: will be easier than next, and so on and on
• 1:09:03
  Speaker 4: until perfect control is obtained. And knowing this, he bends
• 1:09:07
  Speaker 4: his endeavors to inserting the very thinnest edge of the wedge,
• 1:09:10
  Speaker 4: understanding that in this he has his hardest task before him.
• 1:09:14
  Speaker 4: And alas, how many of us know that the same
• 1:09:16
  Speaker 4: principle is in operation in everyday life, although seemingly having
• 1:09:20
  Speaker 4: nothing to do with mesmerism. How many of us are
• 1:09:22
  Speaker 4: able to regret the day of the entry of the
• 1:09:24
  Speaker 4: thin edge of the wedge. Another point to be remembered
• 1:09:28
  Speaker 4: is that the subject, who is under a fair degree
• 1:09:30
  Speaker 4: of control, does not feel as if he were obeying
• 1:09:32
  Speaker 4: the commands or wishes of the operator alone. That is not,
• 1:09:35
  Speaker 4: in the main. It is true that he instinctively obeys
• 1:09:38
  Speaker 4: the command of the suggestion, just as a horse quickens
• 1:09:40
  Speaker 4: his gait when spoken to, or a soldier acts quickly
• 1:09:43
  Speaker 4: in obedience to orders, et cetera, et cetera. But the
• 1:09:46
  Speaker 4: motive for the action or feeling seems to come from
• 1:09:49
  Speaker 4: within himself. To a great degree, it has the force
• 1:09:52
  Speaker 4: and effect of an instinctive action proceeding along subconscious lines.
• 1:09:55
  Speaker 4: He seems to want to do the thing of his
• 1:09:57
  Speaker 4: own accord. This is the dangerous fee. This, then, in
• 1:10:01
  Speaker 4: a general way, is the rationale of mental fascination, as
• 1:10:04
  Speaker 4: shown in its phase of mesmerism, and its corresponding exhibitions
• 1:10:07
  Speaker 4: along less pronounced lines. If you will acquaint yourselves with
• 1:10:10
  Speaker 4: these principles of operation, you will have a grasp on
• 1:10:12
  Speaker 4: the whole subject. In our next chapter we shall have
• 1:10:15
  Speaker 4: a view of the mental states of operator and subject,
• 1:10:17
  Speaker 4: which will throw additional light upon the subject before us impressionability.
• 1:10:23
  Speaker 4: In the last chapter I laid before you an exposition
• 1:10:25
  Speaker 4: of the principles of the operation of mental fascination, particularly
• 1:10:29
  Speaker 4: in its phases of mesmerism. The student who has followed
• 1:10:32
  Speaker 4: what I have said therein has seen that there must
• 1:10:35
  Speaker 4: of necessity be a marked difference in the degree of
• 1:10:37
  Speaker 4: impressionability or to receptivity to mental induction, manifested by the
• 1:10:42
  Speaker 4: operator in subject, respectively, in order that the pronounced phenomena
• 1:10:46
  Speaker 4: may be manifested. But this difference of degree of impressionability
• 1:10:49
  Speaker 4: is manifested by all men and women. Between the one
• 1:10:52
  Speaker 4: extreme point and the scale of impressionability to the other extreme,
• 1:10:55
  Speaker 4: there are many degrees, and each person has his or
• 1:10:58
  Speaker 4: her own degree, subject of course to change by development
• 1:11:03
  Speaker 4: magnetic positivity. I would like to quote from my work
• 1:11:06
  Speaker 4: on mental magic illustrating this last mentioned point I have
• 1:11:09
  Speaker 4: said therein. I do not mean that the degree of
• 1:11:11
  Speaker 4: magnetic positivity is fixed permanently in either person. For the
• 1:11:16
  Speaker 4: contrary is the case. One of the persons who is
• 1:11:19
  Speaker 4: really the stronger usually may be weaker at that particular moment,
• 1:11:22
  Speaker 4: owing to his will being fatigued, or by reason of
• 1:11:25
  Speaker 4: his having relaxed his will power, as often is the case,
• 1:11:28
  Speaker 4: And in such case the defeated, one may be the
• 1:11:30
  Speaker 4: victor at the last encounter, or may even rally his
• 1:11:33
  Speaker 4: energies a moment later and thus turn the tables. One
• 1:11:36
  Speaker 4: may have a strong will in moments of activity, and
• 1:11:38
  Speaker 4: yet in moments of passivity he may relax it very much.
• 1:11:42
  Speaker 4: And this is a still more important fact. One may
• 1:11:44
  Speaker 4: so increase his will power that he will be able
• 1:11:46
  Speaker 4: to completely dominate those who formerly overmastered and then overawed him.
• 1:11:50
  Speaker 4: All of us know of instances of this kind in
• 1:11:53
  Speaker 4: our own personal experience. The two extremes. At the extreme
• 1:11:58
  Speaker 4: point of mental positivity are the wonderfully strong willed men
• 1:12:01
  Speaker 4: who are natural leaders and managers. At the extreme of
• 1:12:04
  Speaker 4: negative menative point are those people who are moved by
• 1:12:07
  Speaker 4: every passing suggestion or mental current with which they may
• 1:12:09
  Speaker 4: come in contact. Those impressionable people who seem to live
• 1:12:13
  Speaker 4: in the emotional plane of their being and who are
• 1:12:15
  Speaker 4: always open to outside influences and are like weathercocks, moved
• 1:12:18
  Speaker 4: by every passing breeze. These people are really the reflection
• 1:12:21
  Speaker 4: of the thoughts, desires, and wills of others, the last
• 1:12:24
  Speaker 4: person who catches their attention being the right one to follow.
• 1:12:27
  Speaker 4: You all know the type don't you. I do not
• 1:12:29
  Speaker 4: mean by this that only persons naturally weak willed may
• 1:12:32
  Speaker 4: be mesmerized. But I do say that when strong willed
• 1:12:35
  Speaker 4: people allow themselves to be mesmerized, they must relax their
• 1:12:37
  Speaker 4: wills and become passive or negative to the operator, else
• 1:12:40
  Speaker 4: there will be no result gained. A strong willed man
• 1:12:43
  Speaker 4: may voluntarily relax and become negative in order to be mesmerized.
• 1:12:47
  Speaker 4: I have seen this done in many cases, although I
• 1:12:49
  Speaker 4: have always urged against it, for I consider it inadvisable
• 1:12:52
  Speaker 4: for one to surrender his will in this way, even
• 1:12:54
  Speaker 4: for the purpose of scientificate investigation. I am sure that
• 1:12:57
  Speaker 4: I would not do so myself, and therefore I cannot
• 1:13:00
  Speaker 4: approve of the practice on the part of others. The
• 1:13:03
  Speaker 4: artistic temperament. Then again, I have known people of a
• 1:13:06
  Speaker 4: highly developed artistic temperament, such as actors, poets, artists, writers,
• 1:13:11
  Speaker 4: and others, who possessed strong wills, to allow themselves to
• 1:13:14
  Speaker 4: become very impressionable by reason of their active imaginations. That
• 1:13:18
  Speaker 4: is to say, they would allow themselves to be so
• 1:13:20
  Speaker 4: carried away with the idea of being impressed that they
• 1:13:22
  Speaker 4: would throw themselves into the parts of the mesmerized subject.
• 1:13:25
  Speaker 4: And actually mesmerize themselves, although allowing the operators to take
• 1:13:28
  Speaker 4: the credit. This last explanation will throw light on a
• 1:13:31
  Speaker 4: phase of phenomena that apparently presents an exception to the rule,
• 1:13:34
  Speaker 4: but which, when viewed in the light of the above explanation,
• 1:13:37
  Speaker 4: may be seen to come strictly within the rule of
• 1:13:39
  Speaker 4: positivity and negativity, a mesmerist's trick. Public performers of mesmerism,
• 1:13:45
  Speaker 4: when they meet with an imaginative subject whose will is
• 1:13:48
  Speaker 4: too strong to subdue, often begin to bend their efforts
• 1:13:51
  Speaker 4: toward arousing the imagination of the person, and thus causing
• 1:13:53
  Speaker 4: him to become passive and in a subjective condition of
• 1:13:56
  Speaker 4: acting out to the part suggested by the operator. In
• 1:13:59
  Speaker 4: such caseis there is no conflict of wills whatever, but
• 1:14:02
  Speaker 4: on the contrary, the subject wills to act out the
• 1:14:06
  Speaker 4: part and becomes the partner of the mesmerists instead of
• 1:14:09
  Speaker 4: his opponent. The subject in such cases mesmerizes himself and
• 1:14:13
  Speaker 4: voluntarily allows himself to be led by the suggestions of
• 1:14:15
  Speaker 4: the operator, so long as the suggestions are not contrary
• 1:14:18
  Speaker 4: to the subject's own interests. This act or instinct is
• 1:14:21
  Speaker 4: very strong in some people, and this self mesmerism is
• 1:14:24
  Speaker 4: far more common than people imagine. It is seen on
• 1:14:27
  Speaker 4: the stage and among speakers and writers mesmeric subjects. Even
• 1:14:33
  Speaker 4: many of the best mesmeric subjects who travel around with
• 1:14:35
  Speaker 4: the professional mesmerists are of this last mentioned class to
• 1:14:38
  Speaker 4: a certain degree. They are able to throw themselves into
• 1:14:40
  Speaker 4: the parts and play them well, so long as they
• 1:14:43
  Speaker 4: are not adversely affected thereby. They are far different beings
• 1:14:46
  Speaker 4: from the weak willed, flabby creatures that are so often
• 1:14:49
  Speaker 4: seen following around after the professional mesmerists. The imaginative professional
• 1:14:53
  Speaker 4: subject is alive to his own interests, And as a
• 1:14:56
  Speaker 4: somewhat cynical friend of mine, who had made a close
• 1:14:58
  Speaker 4: study of the subject, one said, even the most obedient
• 1:15:01
  Speaker 4: subject of this class would utterly fail to act upon
• 1:15:04
  Speaker 4: the suggestion of his powerful operator, to effect that the
• 1:15:07
  Speaker 4: subject consent to a reduction of his weekly wages paid
• 1:15:11
  Speaker 4: by the operator, even though the deep stage of hypnotic
• 1:15:13
  Speaker 4: sleep be produced. Don't surrender your will, But I consider
• 1:15:19
  Speaker 4: that even this imaginative class of subjects are unwise in
• 1:15:21
  Speaker 4: allowing themselves to be guided and governed by the suggestions
• 1:15:24
  Speaker 4: and commands of any operator. For I believe that even
• 1:15:26
  Speaker 4: such a habit is injurious to the will. The will
• 1:15:29
  Speaker 4: is a precious thing and should not be prostituted in
• 1:15:31
  Speaker 4: this way. I cannot urge this too strongly upon my students.
• 1:15:34
  Speaker 4: I say to them, surrender your will into no one's keeping,
• 1:15:37
  Speaker 4: regarded as a woman should her virtue, and allow no
• 1:15:39
  Speaker 4: one to take liberties with it. Who can exert fascination?
• 1:15:45
  Speaker 4: The average person possessing self confidence in force can and
• 1:15:48
  Speaker 4: does exert mental fascination over others with whom he comes
• 1:15:50
  Speaker 4: in contact, although it requires a developed will to become
• 1:15:53
  Speaker 4: an expert in this line of mental work. Besides this,
• 1:15:57
  Speaker 4: there is undoubtedly a certain knack and technique about the work,
• 1:15:59
  Speaker 4: which is acquired by practice, although some seem to have
• 1:16:02
  Speaker 4: it considerably developed. Naturally, there are geniuses in fascination as
• 1:16:06
  Speaker 4: well as an art, and there are others who have
• 1:16:08
  Speaker 4: acquired the mastery in both by careful practice and determination.
• 1:16:12
  Speaker 4: The requisite for fascination. In considering the qualities that go
• 1:16:16
  Speaker 4: to make up the person in whom mental fascination is
• 1:16:18
  Speaker 4: likely to be strongly developed, I may mention the following
• 1:16:21
  Speaker 4: one physical well being. For there is a certain strength
• 1:16:24
  Speaker 4: about a man or woman in strong, robust health that
• 1:16:26
  Speaker 4: must be taken into consideration. It is true that some
• 1:16:29
  Speaker 4: persons not physically well but unhealthy have exercised strong powers
• 1:16:32
  Speaker 4: of fascination. But this was in spite of their lack
• 1:16:35
  Speaker 4: of physical health and owing to a strong will which
• 1:16:37
  Speaker 4: allowed them to master even this obstacle. But all else
• 1:16:40
  Speaker 4: being equal, there is a power about a strong, healthy,
• 1:16:42
  Speaker 4: vigorous person that makes itself felt. Two Belief in oneself.
• 1:16:47
  Speaker 4: For without this, no one manifests positivity. Believe in your
• 1:16:51
  Speaker 4: own power and ability, and you impress others with the
• 1:16:53
  Speaker 4: same belief. Confidence is contagious. Cultivate the I can and
• 1:16:57
  Speaker 4: I will. Three Poise, for the calm, well poised, imperturbable
• 1:17:02
  Speaker 4: man has an enormous advantage over one lacking these qualities.
• 1:17:05
  Speaker 4: The man who meets any emergency without losing his head
• 1:17:07
  Speaker 4: has something about him that makes him looked up to
• 1:17:10
  Speaker 4: as a natural leader. He has one of the qualities
• 1:17:12
  Speaker 4: of positivity. Cultivate the calm, masterful mood. Four fearlessness, for
• 1:17:18
  Speaker 4: fear is the most negative emotion in the being of man.
• 1:17:20
  Speaker 4: Fearlessness is a most positive quality, just as fear is
• 1:17:23
  Speaker 4: the most negative. Cultivate the I do, I dare. Five
• 1:17:28
  Speaker 4: Concentration for this one pointedness focuses the will power upon
• 1:17:32
  Speaker 4: the object. Do one thing at a time, and do
• 1:17:34
  Speaker 4: it with all the power there is in you. Six
• 1:17:37
  Speaker 4: fixity of purpose, For you must learn to know what
• 1:17:40
  Speaker 4: you want to do and then stick to it until
• 1:17:42
  Speaker 4: it is done. Cultivate the bulldog quality. It is needed
• 1:17:46
  Speaker 4: to those who recognize the need of the above mentioned qualities,
• 1:17:49
  Speaker 4: but who lack them, I would recommend the careful study
• 1:17:52
  Speaker 4: and determined application of the principles of mental architecture, as
• 1:17:55
  Speaker 4: stated in my seventh lesson in my work on mental Magic,
• 1:17:58
  Speaker 4: in which the matter is gone into detail with exercises
• 1:18:01
  Speaker 4: et cetera. Nonsense exposed. There has been much nonsense written
• 1:18:06
  Speaker 4: about who make good subjects et cetera. And works upon mesmerism, hypnotism,
• 1:18:10
  Speaker 4: et cetera. And many amusing rules for the determination of
• 1:18:13
  Speaker 4: the degree of impressionability have been given by many writers.
• 1:18:16
  Speaker 4: Some say that brunettes are the most impressionable, while others
• 1:18:19
  Speaker 4: assert that blonds yield more readily et cetera, et cetera.
• 1:18:22
  Speaker 4: But the experienced investigator laughs at such distinctions. Some consider
• 1:18:25
  Speaker 4: that women make the best subjects, while others assert that
• 1:18:27
  Speaker 4: men really are more readily influenced. My own opinion is
• 1:18:30
  Speaker 4: that the percentage is about the same in both sexes.
• 1:18:33
  Speaker 4: Then again, one must remember that the degrees of impressionability
• 1:18:36
  Speaker 4: are relative. For instance, A may be positive to B,
• 1:18:39
  Speaker 4: while B may be positive to C, and so on
• 1:18:42
  Speaker 4: to the end of the alphabet. And using the same illustration,
• 1:18:45
  Speaker 4: M is negative to L though positive to N. Do
• 1:18:48
  Speaker 4: you see this a line nailed? Some writers have tried
• 1:18:52
  Speaker 4: to make people believe that only strong minded people may
• 1:18:55
  Speaker 4: be mesmerized, and give as proof thereof the fact that
• 1:18:57
  Speaker 4: idiots and insane people are almost immune from hypnotic and
• 1:19:00
  Speaker 4: mesmeric influence. This is a favorite argument of the professional hypnotists,
• 1:19:04
  Speaker 4: who use it in order to put at easther subjects
• 1:19:06
  Speaker 4: or possible subjects who might not wish to appear as
• 1:19:09
  Speaker 4: weak minded people. The truth is that the reason that
• 1:19:12
  Speaker 4: the above classes are exempt is because one the idiots
• 1:19:15
  Speaker 4: have little or no power of attention and are like
• 1:19:17
  Speaker 4: mere machines, and consequently cannot be induced to pay attention
• 1:19:20
  Speaker 4: long enough to be mesmerized. But all advanced students of
• 1:19:23
  Speaker 4: mental influence know that idiots as well as animals, may
• 1:19:25
  Speaker 4: be influenced by mental vibrations or mental waves et cetera.
• 1:19:28
  Speaker 4: By treatments. Two insane people are usually carried away with
• 1:19:32
  Speaker 4: a fixed idea or delusion, and are in fact practically
• 1:19:35
  Speaker 4: in a state akin to that produced by hypnotic or
• 1:19:37
  Speaker 4: mesmeric process to a market degree. Their minds are centered
• 1:19:41
  Speaker 4: on the delusion and cannot be taken off of it.
• 1:19:43
  Speaker 4: If the attraction could be removed, the patient would no
• 1:19:45
  Speaker 4: longer be insane. And although the sleep condition cannot well
• 1:19:48
  Speaker 4: be induced in insane patients, still the best authorities know
• 1:19:52
  Speaker 4: that such people often yield to strong suggestions and mental
• 1:19:54
  Speaker 4: treatments to a certain degree, so that the rule does
• 1:19:57
  Speaker 4: not always holdtionable people. The class of people who yield
• 1:20:02
  Speaker 4: most readily to the mesmeric influence, outside of the subclass
• 1:20:05
  Speaker 4: of imaginative people mentioned a few pages further back, are
• 1:20:08
  Speaker 4: those who have not manifested their will, determination, and self
• 1:20:11
  Speaker 4: reliance very much, people who have led a life in
• 1:20:14
  Speaker 4: which implicit obedience or reliance upon others have been cultivated.
• 1:20:18
  Speaker 4: These are the people who are the most impressionable. They
• 1:20:20
  Speaker 4: have not used their wills and are more readily ruled
• 1:20:22
  Speaker 4: by the wills of others or through their emotions. As
• 1:20:25
  Speaker 4: I have said my larger work, the degree of response
• 1:20:28
  Speaker 4: to suggestion by command is to be observed in the
• 1:20:30
  Speaker 4: highest degree among those who have always depended upon others
• 1:20:32
  Speaker 4: for orders or instruction, and have not had to use
• 1:20:35
  Speaker 4: their own wits and resources in life. Unskilled laborers and
• 1:20:38
  Speaker 4: the sons of rich men who have had someone to
• 1:20:41
  Speaker 4: think for them often belong to this class. These people
• 1:20:44
  Speaker 4: seem to want someone else to do their thinking for them,
• 1:20:46
  Speaker 4: even in the smallest event of their lives, and are
• 1:20:48
  Speaker 4: most impressionable along the proper lines. Then, the degree of
• 1:20:51
  Speaker 4: positivity rises as we consider the people who have had
• 1:20:54
  Speaker 4: to do things for themselves and who have not depended
• 1:20:57
  Speaker 4: so much upon others. Positivity is the greatest among people
• 1:21:00
  Speaker 4: who have had the ordering of others to do, or
• 1:21:02
  Speaker 4: who have had to depend upon their own resources and
• 1:21:05
  Speaker 4: their own wits in getting through life. The men of
• 1:21:08
  Speaker 4: marked initiative have scarcely a trace of this form of suggestibility. Initiative,
• 1:21:12
  Speaker 4: you know, is a term for doing things without being told,
• 1:21:15
  Speaker 4: using one's own wits and resources and will. The above
• 1:21:18
  Speaker 4: applies equally to the subject of impressionability to mesmeric influence
• 1:21:23
  Speaker 4: and what does it all mean when it is boiled down?
• 1:21:25
  Speaker 4: Just this that the degree of impressionability depends upon the
• 1:21:28
  Speaker 4: degree of the lack of will development. The word will
• 1:21:31
  Speaker 4: is the keynote, and this in spite of all the talk,
• 1:21:34
  Speaker 4: twaddle and nonsense written spoken by those who are interested
• 1:21:37
  Speaker 4: in having the people appreciate the wonderful virtue of hypnotism
• 1:21:42
  Speaker 4: the mob's spirit. The reason that mobs allow themselves to
• 1:21:45
  Speaker 4: be influenced is because they surrender their individuality and individual
• 1:21:49
  Speaker 4: will and allow it to become merged with the wills
• 1:21:51
  Speaker 4: of others, until a mob will is created which represents
• 1:21:54
  Speaker 4: the average of the crowd, the weaker wills, diluting the
• 1:21:56
  Speaker 4: strength of the whole. When this mess of mingled and
• 1:21:59
  Speaker 4: weakened will is proper mixed, it remains in a dazed
• 1:22:01
  Speaker 4: and excited condition until some individual springs to the front,
• 1:22:04
  Speaker 4: some leader of men who has held on to his
• 1:22:07
  Speaker 4: individual will, and impresses his will upon the more negative
• 1:22:09
  Speaker 4: will of the crowd, and the mob accepts his suggestions
• 1:22:12
  Speaker 4: and follows like sheep or mesmerized subjects, and does his
• 1:22:14
  Speaker 4: bidding until some other leader catches its attention and interest. Emotionability,
• 1:22:20
  Speaker 4: there is another phase of mentality that has its bearing
• 1:22:22
  Speaker 4: upon the degree of impressionability. I refer to the quality
• 1:22:26
  Speaker 4: known as emotion ability. An emotional person is one who
• 1:22:29
  Speaker 4: more readily throws off the influence of his own will
• 1:22:31
  Speaker 4: and reason and gives himself up to the play of
• 1:22:33
  Speaker 4: the emotional side of his nature. Such a person is
• 1:22:35
  Speaker 4: more impressionable than one who is not so emotional, but
• 1:22:38
  Speaker 4: whose will is really no stronger. The reason is that
• 1:22:41
  Speaker 4: by his mental habits, he has accustomed himself to open
• 1:22:43
  Speaker 4: up his emotive poll of mentality to outside influences, and
• 1:22:47
  Speaker 4: allowing him his motive poll to remain inactive, he allows
• 1:22:50
  Speaker 4: his feelings to rule him. Instead of ruling his feelings,
• 1:22:53
  Speaker 4: he allows his emotional nature to usurp the throne of
• 1:22:55
  Speaker 4: his will, the latter being relegated to second place. And
• 1:22:58
  Speaker 4: the consequence is that is a motive nature has become
• 1:23:01
  Speaker 4: more open to unresisted outside influences and impressions, and responds
• 1:23:04
  Speaker 4: more readily to the same It has acquired the impressionable habit.
• 1:23:08
  Speaker 4: Do you see this last explanation will throw some light
• 1:23:11
  Speaker 4: on the fact that certain races of people are far
• 1:23:13
  Speaker 4: more impressionable than others. They are emotional, that's all. Who
• 1:23:17
  Speaker 4: is an impressionable? In the following chapters, I shall use
• 1:23:20
  Speaker 4: the term impressionable as a noun designating a person who
• 1:23:23
  Speaker 4: is sufficiently impressionable to respond to the influence of a
• 1:23:26
  Speaker 4: mesmerist or hypnotist to a greater or lesser degree. These
• 1:23:29
  Speaker 4: impressionables are comparatively easily impressed by the mentitative force and
• 1:23:33
  Speaker 4: suggestions of the experimenter. Along these lines, please remember the
• 1:23:37
  Speaker 4: sense in which I shall use the term Later on,
• 1:23:39
  Speaker 4: I shall use the term hyper impressionable as a noun
• 1:23:41
  Speaker 4: indicating a person excessively or abnormally impressible by mesmeric influence.
• 1:23:46
  Speaker 4: The latter class will be further described to the proper
• 1:23:48
  Speaker 4: place in the book. Let me give you a fanciful
• 1:23:50
  Speaker 4: illustration of the subject of impressionability. It will form the
• 1:23:53
  Speaker 4: subject of our next chapter, which will be entitled the
• 1:23:56
  Speaker 4: Fable of the mentitative Couple. It will explain not only
• 1:23:59
  Speaker 4: the matter of response to the mesmeric influence, but will
• 1:24:01
  Speaker 4: also throw light on the exercise of personal mental influence
• 1:24:04
  Speaker 4: that is going on around us in everyday life, all
• 1:24:06
  Speaker 4: the time, everywhere. You will have a much clearer idea
• 1:24:09
  Speaker 4: of the matter after reading this fable, and you will
• 1:24:11
  Speaker 4: also be much more on your guard because of the
• 1:24:13
  Speaker 4: lesson taught therein, do not fail to read it carefully
• 1:24:16
  Speaker 4: and seek for the secret contained within its lines.
• 1:24:20
  Speaker 5: The fable of the Mentative Couple. Once upon a time
• 1:24:25
  Speaker 5: there lived in the land of mental Vania, in a
• 1:24:28
  Speaker 5: wonderful building called the Mentative Castle, a man and a woman,
• 1:24:32
  Speaker 5: called the mentative couple. They were happy though married. They
• 1:24:37
  Speaker 5: lived in harmony because they were useful to one another,
• 1:24:40
  Speaker 5: and neither was complete without the presence of the other,
• 1:24:44
  Speaker 5: and neither did his or her best work unless the
• 1:24:47
  Speaker 5: other was present and assisting.
• 1:24:50
  Speaker 6: Well.
• 1:24:51
  Speaker 5: Now, the man was called Volus, which is the same
• 1:24:54
  Speaker 5: as the English name Will, and the women was called Imosione,
• 1:24:59
  Speaker 5: which in the life language of that country meant something
• 1:25:02
  Speaker 5: like the combination of emotion, desire, and imagination. Now the
• 1:25:07
  Speaker 5: chronicle's informosts that these two people had natures entirely different
• 1:25:12
  Speaker 5: from each other. As has been said, we are told
• 1:25:16
  Speaker 5: that Vullus was of a stern, inflexible, strong, positive nature,
• 1:25:21
  Speaker 5: apt to stick to a thing once begun, full of
• 1:25:24
  Speaker 5: the will to live and vitality, full of determination and spirit,
• 1:25:29
  Speaker 5: with the strong dash of the let me alone and
• 1:25:32
  Speaker 5: get out of my way. In his makeup, with a
• 1:25:36
  Speaker 5: taste for meeting difficulties and overcoming obstacles, with a goodly
• 1:25:41
  Speaker 5: degree of habit of reaching out and taking hold of
• 1:25:44
  Speaker 5: what emotionone wanted and needed, and a powerful lot of
• 1:25:49
  Speaker 5: self respect and self reliance in him, he was apt
• 1:25:53
  Speaker 5: to be firm, although his firmness was not the stubbornness
• 1:25:57
  Speaker 5: of the mule, and his general keynote strength. He was
• 1:26:02
  Speaker 5: a good warrior and defender of his castle. But Emocione
• 1:26:06
  Speaker 5: was of an entirely different type temperament and character. She
• 1:26:11
  Speaker 5: was most impressionable, imaginative, emotional, credulous, fanciful, full of desire, curious, sympathetic,
• 1:26:21
  Speaker 5: and easily persuaded. While Volus was all willing and thinking,
• 1:26:27
  Speaker 5: Emocione was all feeling fullas was a strong character, but
• 1:26:33
  Speaker 5: lacked certain qualities that make for success. But these qualities
• 1:26:38
  Speaker 5: Emocione possessed, and she supplied the deficiency in Vulus. Vulus
• 1:26:43
  Speaker 5: had to figure out everything, while Emocione had intuition and
• 1:26:48
  Speaker 5: jumped at a conclusion in a way remarkable to Volus,
• 1:26:52
  Speaker 5: who couldn't understand the process at all. When he would
• 1:26:56
  Speaker 5: ask Emocione for an explanation, she would say lightly, oh,
• 1:27:01
  Speaker 5: just because, which answer would often provoke profane and irreverent
• 1:27:06
  Speaker 5: discourse on the part of Volus. But nevertheless he learned
• 1:27:11
  Speaker 5: to respect these becauses of emotionone and found that they
• 1:27:16
  Speaker 5: helped him in his business. Emocione would dream out things
• 1:27:20
  Speaker 5: and see things a long way ahead, and then Vulus
• 1:27:23
  Speaker 5: would proceed to put these plans into operation. Vulus couldn't
• 1:27:28
  Speaker 5: see very far ahead of his nose. Well, Emocione could
• 1:27:31
  Speaker 5: see miles beyond and years ahead. And besides this faculty
• 1:27:37
  Speaker 5: of mental imagery that came in so useful in Vulus's business,
• 1:27:42
  Speaker 5: Emocione also possessed a burning and ardent desire for things,
• 1:27:46
  Speaker 5: which he managed to communicate to Vulus, thereby causing him
• 1:27:50
  Speaker 5: to get out and do things that otherwise he would
• 1:27:54
  Speaker 5: never have dreamed of doing. Emocione was like fire and
• 1:27:58
  Speaker 5: Vulus like water. The water would hold the fire in check,
• 1:28:03
  Speaker 5: but at the same time the fire would heat up
• 1:28:05
  Speaker 5: the water, and the result would be the steam of action.
• 1:28:09
  Speaker 5: And so you see these two. This mintative couple formed
• 1:28:13
  Speaker 5: a fine co partnership and prospered mightily. But alas the
• 1:28:20
  Speaker 5: tempter entered Eden and the attractive stranger meandered in the
• 1:28:25
  Speaker 5: direction of the mentative castle and when he reached there,
• 1:28:28
  Speaker 5: trouble occurred, And this is what happened. One day Volus
• 1:28:34
  Speaker 5: was absent from the castle, being engaged in some arduous enterprise,
• 1:28:39
  Speaker 5: and consequently the castle was unguarded. Volos had provided against
• 1:28:44
  Speaker 5: this by instructing Emotionone that she was to keep the
• 1:28:47
  Speaker 5: castle gate closed tight when he was away from home,
• 1:28:51
  Speaker 5: and never to gaze without in his absence, for there
• 1:28:55
  Speaker 5: was some mysterious danger looking without when he was away.
• 1:29:00
  Speaker 5: Emotionone had faithfully followed the directions of her liege lord,
• 1:29:05
  Speaker 5: although her womanly curiosity was picked thereat. Many the time
• 1:29:11
  Speaker 5: she had heard the strange knockings at the castle gate,
• 1:29:14
  Speaker 5: but she heeded them not, and even refrained from looking
• 1:29:18
  Speaker 5: out of the little peep hole in the gate, though
• 1:29:22
  Speaker 5: this last was much against her inclination, for she could
• 1:29:26
  Speaker 5: see no harm in just looking. But to return to
• 1:29:30
  Speaker 5: our tale, this particular day, when Vulus was absent from home,
• 1:29:35
  Speaker 5: her curiosity was too much for Emocione when she heard
• 1:29:39
  Speaker 5: the strange knocking at the gate, and, breaking her rule,
• 1:29:43
  Speaker 5: she ventured to peep without looking down. She saw a
• 1:29:48
  Speaker 5: most attractive stranger with a fascinating smile on his lips.
• 1:29:53
  Speaker 5: He looked almost as strong as Wolace, but he seemed
• 1:29:57
  Speaker 5: to have a dash of the woman in him. Besides,
• 1:30:01
  Speaker 5: he had the strength but also the charm that Emocione
• 1:30:04
  Speaker 5: recognized as being part of her own nature. Ah, sighed Emotionione,
• 1:30:11
  Speaker 5: here is a man who can understand me. The fascinating
• 1:30:16
  Speaker 5: stranger smiled sweetly, and looking her in the eyes, masterfully
• 1:30:20
  Speaker 5: asked to be admitted. No. No, replied Emocione. I cannot
• 1:30:26
  Speaker 5: let you.
• 1:30:26
  Speaker 6: In, for Folos told me not to.
• 1:30:30
  Speaker 5: Ah, fair lady, said the stranger softly. Volos means all right,
• 1:30:36
  Speaker 5: but he is rather old, fogische, and behind the times
• 1:30:43
  Speaker 5: he does not understand as do you. And I pray
• 1:30:48
  Speaker 5: let me in. And like mother Eve, Emocione took the
• 1:30:54
  Speaker 5: bait well to make a long story short. When Folos
• 1:30:59
  Speaker 5: came home, he found that Emotiononi had subscribed to a
• 1:31:03
  Speaker 5: set of the Levieux More than Art, a beautiful work
• 1:31:07
  Speaker 5: issued by the Deluxe Brothers of Fifth Avenue, to be
• 1:31:11
  Speaker 5: issued in eight hundred and twenty four weekly parts at
• 1:31:15
  Speaker 5: the nominal price of five dollars apart, seven hundred and
• 1:31:19
  Speaker 5: thirty nine parts of which were already out and would
• 1:31:22
  Speaker 5: be delivered shortly She had also given a number of
• 1:31:27
  Speaker 5: side orders for manifold wares, which had dazzled her untrained
• 1:31:32
  Speaker 5: and unguarded fancy. Bolos cried to the gods of his
• 1:31:36
  Speaker 5: lad but it was too late. The contracts had been signed.
• 1:31:42
  Speaker 5: But that was but the beginning. Bolos did not understand
• 1:31:46
  Speaker 5: just what was the matter, and contented himself with scolding
• 1:31:50
  Speaker 5: emotionone whereat. She wept bitterly, but the poison went on
• 1:31:57
  Speaker 5: with its deadly work, And when Bulus again was absent
• 1:32:00
  Speaker 5: from home, the habit reasserted itself, and when the fascinating
• 1:32:05
  Speaker 5: stranger again called at the castle, he was admitted. And
• 1:32:09
  Speaker 5: when Ullos returned he found the castle furnished from dungeon
• 1:32:13
  Speaker 5: to watch tower, with costly rugs and furniture and various
• 1:32:17
  Speaker 5: other articles bought from Morgenstern's popular installment house at one
• 1:32:23
  Speaker 5: thousand down and one hundred dollars per week. He also
• 1:32:27
  Speaker 5: found that the castle had been lightning rotted from ground
• 1:32:30
  Speaker 5: to turret on each wing tower and annex, and that
• 1:32:35
  Speaker 5: notes containing a law proof judgment confessed clause had been
• 1:32:39
  Speaker 5: given in exchange. Therefore, and then Ullos sware by the
• 1:32:43
  Speaker 5: beard of Mars. The war God that he would have
• 1:32:46
  Speaker 5: no more of this, he would remain at home thereafter,
• 1:32:50
  Speaker 5: and he did. But the subtle stranger was onto the
• 1:32:54
  Speaker 5: game in all of its details, and this is how
• 1:32:59
  Speaker 5: he played it on Volus, even though the latter remained
• 1:33:02
  Speaker 5: at home. A few days later, after Vulus had determined
• 1:33:07
  Speaker 5: to remain at home, there came a band of Montebanks, singing, dancing,
• 1:33:12
  Speaker 5: and performing juggling tricks. Volos sat on the great stone
• 1:33:16
  Speaker 5: beside the open castle gate, and his attention was attracted
• 1:33:19
  Speaker 5: by the sounds and sights. Faster the dancer's world louder beat,
• 1:33:24
  Speaker 5: the drums sweeter grew, the singing, more bewildering, grew the
• 1:33:28
  Speaker 5: feats of jugglery, until poor Volas forgot all about the
• 1:33:32
  Speaker 5: open castle gate, so wrapped was he at the strange sights, sounds,
• 1:33:37
  Speaker 5: dances and feats of jugglery. Then one of the Montebank gang,
• 1:33:42
  Speaker 5: who was really the attractive stranger, disguised in motley array,
• 1:33:47
  Speaker 5: slipped unseen past Bolus and in a moment was engaged
• 1:33:50
  Speaker 5: in eager conversation with the impressionable emotion Ma. Bolos watched
• 1:33:57
  Speaker 5: the crowd until it moved away, and entering the castle
• 1:34:01
  Speaker 5: and closing the gate behind him. He was confronted by
• 1:34:04
  Speaker 5: e Muscione and tears, for she dreaded the coming storm.
• 1:34:10
  Speaker 5: Alack a day wowes me, she cried, I am again
• 1:34:15
  Speaker 5: in trouble. O volus, my liege lord, I have.
• 1:34:19
  Speaker 7: Just ordered from the fascinating stranger who slipped past you
• 1:34:23
  Speaker 7: at the gate, a baby grand self plain, automatic liquid air, valved, radium, carburetor, harpsichord,
• 1:34:31
  Speaker 7: upon which I may play for you all classes of music,
• 1:34:35
  Speaker 7: ranging from Wagner's Gotta Damum to the popular ragtime air
• 1:34:40
  Speaker 7: entitled Kiss You Babe Goodbye, with feeling, depth of expression,
• 1:34:47
  Speaker 7: and soulful understanding. According to the words of the fascinating
• 1:34:51
  Speaker 7: stranger who took.
• 1:34:52
  Speaker 5: My order, god zouks ejaculated walis fain would I cry
• 1:34:57
  Speaker 5: aloud the name of that production of Wagner's just mentioned
• 1:35:02
  Speaker 5: by THEE and by my halidam e'en shalt thou soon
• 1:35:06
  Speaker 5: be singing to me? The words of that ragtime melody
• 1:35:10
  Speaker 5: just quoted by thy false red lips zounds the truth.
• 1:35:15
  Speaker 5: I have been stung again by that fascinating stranger. I
• 1:35:19
  Speaker 5: must gaze no more upon these fleeting scenes of merriment.
• 1:35:22
  Speaker 5: And amazement. Lest I be again decorated with the ass's ears. Aha,
• 1:35:29
  Speaker 5: Vallas is himself again, And the next time the fascinating
• 1:35:34
  Speaker 5: stranger appears upon the scene, he shall be smitten hip
• 1:35:38
  Speaker 5: and thigh with my trusty battle axe and my snicker
• 1:35:41
  Speaker 5: see shall pierce his foul carcass. But alas even once
• 1:35:47
  Speaker 5: more was poor Volas deceived and trifled with. What's more,
• 1:35:52
  Speaker 5: was poor Emocione fascinated by the stranger. And it came
• 1:35:57
  Speaker 5: about in this way. On the day of his last
• 1:36:00
  Speaker 5: end doing, Vulus sat on the open step in front
• 1:36:04
  Speaker 5: of the narrowly opened castle door. No man shall pass me, now,
• 1:36:09
  Speaker 5: cried he. But fate willed otherwise, For as he sat there,
• 1:36:16
  Speaker 5: there approached many people who took seat upon the steps
• 1:36:19
  Speaker 5: before the gate and engaged Vulus in long, heated and
• 1:36:23
  Speaker 5: wearisome discourses regarding the outlook for the crops, the presidential campaign,
• 1:36:29
  Speaker 5: the Japanese question, raced Suicide, the New theology, how old
• 1:36:35
  Speaker 5: was Anne, the problem of the final outcome of the
• 1:36:38
  Speaker 5: collision between the irresistible force and the immovable body, the
• 1:36:44
  Speaker 5: canals on Mahars, what Roosevelt will do when his term expires,
• 1:36:49
  Speaker 5: and many other weighty, interesting, and fascinating topics of general interest.
• 1:36:56
  Speaker 5: Most agreeable were these visitors, and most considered of Vullus's
• 1:37:00
  Speaker 5: feelings were they. And although they seemed to differ from
• 1:37:04
  Speaker 5: him at the beginning of each argument, still they courteously
• 1:37:07
  Speaker 5: allowed him to convince them inch by inch, until they
• 1:37:11
  Speaker 5: finally acknowledged that he was invincible in argument and invulnerable
• 1:37:17
  Speaker 5: in logic. Tis passing strange, quoth Bullis. But nevertheless tis
• 1:37:23
  Speaker 5: true that I always find myself on the right side
• 1:37:27
  Speaker 5: of every question. And the wonder grows when they all
• 1:37:31
  Speaker 5: admit it. In the end, verily I am developing into
• 1:37:36
  Speaker 5: a wise guy and pondering. Thus he fell sweetly asleep
• 1:37:44
  Speaker 5: from the rigor of his disputes, the flattering attentions shown him,
• 1:37:49
  Speaker 5: the joys of the victory, and the exceeding amount of
• 1:37:53
  Speaker 5: attention and interest he had expended. For human nature has
• 1:37:58
  Speaker 5: its limitations, even in the case of one so strong
• 1:38:02
  Speaker 5: as Vallas. And while he slumbered, the fascinating stranger, who
• 1:38:08
  Speaker 5: was really the leader of the argumentative visiting committee, crept
• 1:38:12
  Speaker 5: into the house and unloaded upon emotionone a choice collection
• 1:38:17
  Speaker 5: of guilt edged mining stock, pure guilt all the way
• 1:38:21
  Speaker 5: through in fact a bunch of flying machine bonds and
• 1:38:25
  Speaker 5: five thousand donkey power vestibuled drawing room observation car automobile
• 1:38:32
  Speaker 5: called the Yellow Peril. And when Vollos discovered what had happened,
• 1:38:37
  Speaker 5: he wept aloud, crying bitterly odds Bones's death of assert
• 1:38:44
  Speaker 5: m I the baron e z Mark, and thereupon he
• 1:38:49
  Speaker 5: sent for the wise man who dwelt in the next barony.
• 1:38:53
  Speaker 5: The wise man came, and, after hearing the story, said,
• 1:38:58
  Speaker 5: my children, yours is a sad case, but matters and
• 1:39:05
  Speaker 5: may be adjusted without a visit to sue falls and
• 1:39:09
  Speaker 5: without the raising of the question of alimony. The trouble
• 1:39:13
  Speaker 5: is as follows. Vullus without emotione has no desire or
• 1:39:20
  Speaker 5: incentive to do things. He has no wants to satisfy,
• 1:39:25
  Speaker 5: and therefore does nothing. He needs emotionone to supply the desire,
• 1:39:33
  Speaker 5: and without her he has no feeling. He is nothing
• 1:39:36
  Speaker 5: but a hard shell clam Therefore he needs her to
• 1:39:42
  Speaker 5: supply the feeling, for verily and of a truth. Feeling
• 1:39:46
  Speaker 5: is the spice of life, and without her he has
• 1:39:50
  Speaker 5: no imagination and cannot see beyond the end of his nose.
• 1:39:55
  Speaker 5: And what is life without imagination god zeuks one might
• 1:40:00
  Speaker 5: as well be a mummy. And on the other hand,
• 1:40:04
  Speaker 5: emotion one without Bulus is a consuming fire of desire,
• 1:40:09
  Speaker 5: an unrestrained imagination, an intuitive faculty degenerated into the basis superstition,
• 1:40:18
  Speaker 5: most deplorable credulity, and the idlest fancy. Vulus has no desire, emotion,
• 1:40:27
  Speaker 5: or imagination of his own, and emotion one has no
• 1:40:30
  Speaker 5: will of her own. Barely cannot it be seen by
• 1:40:37
  Speaker 5: all that this couple needs one another the worst way.
• 1:40:41
  Speaker 5: Each alone is but an incomplete half. United. They stand divided,
• 1:40:47
  Speaker 5: they fall, and union alone is their strength for them.
• 1:40:52
  Speaker 5: And more than this, each without the other falls a
• 1:40:56
  Speaker 5: prey to the wiles of some fascinating stranger. We have
• 1:41:00
  Speaker 5: seen how Emocione was fascinated and controlled by the will
• 1:41:04
  Speaker 5: of the stranger who gained access to the castle. But
• 1:41:08
  Speaker 5: I have also seen by my magic art that when
• 1:41:12
  Speaker 5: Volus was away from home on important business, without having
• 1:41:17
  Speaker 5: emotionone along to keep him straight, he fell a victim
• 1:41:21
  Speaker 5: to the wiles of the desire and imagination of a
• 1:41:24
  Speaker 5: fair stranger across the river, and did her bidding and
• 1:41:28
  Speaker 5: used his will to perform her tasks. Instead of those
• 1:41:32
  Speaker 5: desired by his own Emotionone verily art these people quits
• 1:41:37
  Speaker 5: with one another, and should now begin over again. True
• 1:41:42
  Speaker 5: it is that harmony will be theirs only when they
• 1:41:44
  Speaker 5: are together, And this is the secret of the undoing
• 1:41:49
  Speaker 5: of Emotionone without the will of oulas to protect her,
• 1:41:53
  Speaker 5: direct her, and advise her emotionone allowed her desire, imagination,
• 1:41:59
  Speaker 5: and emotion to run wild and unrestrained. And so she
• 1:42:04
  Speaker 5: became so impressionable as to allow herself to be mastered
• 1:42:08
  Speaker 5: by the will of the stranger, who took advantage of
• 1:42:11
  Speaker 5: the same and gathered to himself many choice orders for things.
• 1:42:15
  Speaker 5: And even when Vullus sat by the door watching the players,
• 1:42:19
  Speaker 5: dancers and jugglers, his attention was so centered on what
• 1:42:24
  Speaker 5: he saw that the fascinating stranger slipped through the gate.
• 1:42:28
  Speaker 5: It was even as if Wallace had been absent from home.
• 1:42:32
  Speaker 5: And again, when Vullus allowed himself to become engaged in
• 1:42:35
  Speaker 5: weighty discourse with the visiting committee, and used up his
• 1:42:39
  Speaker 5: energy and force in argument and dispute with them, and
• 1:42:43
  Speaker 5: when he permitted himself to be jollied into a false
• 1:42:47
  Speaker 5: security by these united brethren of the Blarney Stone, he
• 1:42:51
  Speaker 5: relaxed his vigilance and allowed himself to become tired, drowsy
• 1:42:56
  Speaker 5: and sleeping, and so fell into a doze at his post,
• 1:43:00
  Speaker 5: And the stranger again entered and took Emocione's orders for goods.
• 1:43:05
  Speaker 5: And this then is the remedy, as my successor, Lawson
• 1:43:08
  Speaker 5: of Boston, will say in the centuries to follow, this
• 1:43:12
  Speaker 5: is the remedy. Each person of this mentative couple must
• 1:43:17
  Speaker 5: stick close to the other. Volos must have no important
• 1:43:22
  Speaker 5: business across the river, which will allow Emocione to be
• 1:43:26
  Speaker 5: without a protector and adviser. And emotionone must stick close
• 1:43:30
  Speaker 5: to Vulus and satisfy her curiosity, imagination, emotion, and desire
• 1:43:35
  Speaker 5: by setting him to work out things for her, to
• 1:43:39
  Speaker 5: do things dreamed of by her, to get her things
• 1:43:42
  Speaker 5: she desires, to express the things felt by her. This
• 1:43:47
  Speaker 5: is the secret of success. Dear mentative couple, mutual work
• 1:43:51
  Speaker 5: by desire and will, working in unison and harmony, each
• 1:43:56
  Speaker 5: faithful to the other, each guarding the other from the
• 1:43:59
  Speaker 5: fascinating stone strangers that be set each when separated. Now
• 1:44:03
  Speaker 5: then children get to work, And saying this, the wise
• 1:44:07
  Speaker 5: man vanished from sight and the moral of this fable
• 1:44:11
  Speaker 5: of the mentative couple. Is this that the mind of
• 1:44:14
  Speaker 5: every man and woman is a mentative castle, wherein dwells
• 1:44:19
  Speaker 5: a vullus and an emotionone. And what happened to the
• 1:44:23
  Speaker 5: couple in the fable may happen and does happen to
• 1:44:27
  Speaker 5: many in everyday life. The will, straying from home and
• 1:44:31
  Speaker 5: paying attention to other attractions, leaves the castle unguarded, and
• 1:44:35
  Speaker 5: the fascinating stranger enters. And again the will has its
• 1:44:40
  Speaker 5: attention distracted by passing objects of interest and forgets the
• 1:44:44
  Speaker 5: castle door. And again the will allows itself to be fatigued, tired,
• 1:44:50
  Speaker 5: and jollied by useless argument and talk and cogitation at
• 1:44:54
  Speaker 5: the instigation of the designing fascinating stranger, and the latter
• 1:45:00
  Speaker 5: slips past the gate. And in each case inside the
• 1:45:03
  Speaker 5: gate is emotion one, unprotected, an innocent, true to her
• 1:45:08
  Speaker 5: own nature, credulous, imaginative, fanciful, desireful, and emotional. Is it
• 1:45:15
  Speaker 5: any wonder that she orders goods that are not wanted
• 1:45:19
  Speaker 5: by the family. And the remedy of the wise man
• 1:45:22
  Speaker 5: as given to the mentative couple, may be and should
• 1:45:26
  Speaker 5: be applied to every man and woman in his or
• 1:45:29
  Speaker 5: her mental castle, And This, then, is the moral of the.
• 1:45:33
  Speaker 2: Fable experimental fascination. In this work, I shall get the
• 1:45:41
  Speaker 2: student an idea of the methods of conducting experimental work
• 1:45:46
  Speaker 2: in that phase of fascination, which has been called mental impression,
• 1:45:51
  Speaker 2: et cetera, following the lines of the best investigators and
• 1:45:56
  Speaker 2: experimenters in America and Europe. My reason for so doing
• 1:46:02
  Speaker 2: is that the student may have a thorough idea of
• 1:46:05
  Speaker 2: the practical work, even though he may not wish to
• 1:46:09
  Speaker 2: conduct such experiments in person. I think that everyone should
• 1:46:14
  Speaker 2: be made acquainted with these things as a matter of knowledge,
• 1:46:18
  Speaker 2: and also for purposes of the self protection which arises
• 1:46:22
  Speaker 2: from an understanding of the subject startling phenomena explained. I
• 1:46:30
  Speaker 2: also desire to satisfy the careful student and investigator that
• 1:46:35
  Speaker 2: defeats tests and phenomena which have heretofore been regarded by
• 1:46:40
  Speaker 2: the general public as inseparably connected with mesmerism, hypnotism, and
• 1:46:45
  Speaker 2: sleep conditions may be reproduced without the aid of sleep
• 1:46:50
  Speaker 2: conditions and without the hocus pocus of the public performer.
• 1:46:56
  Speaker 2: The entire phenomena of mesmerism hypnotism at some may be
• 1:47:01
  Speaker 2: produced by simple and scientific methods along the line of
• 1:47:05
  Speaker 2: mental fascination by means of mentative induction, without any attempt
• 1:47:11
  Speaker 2: to produce sleep as a necessary precedent condition. When this
• 1:47:16
  Speaker 2: matter is thoroughly understood by the public, the glamour and
• 1:47:20
  Speaker 2: sensationalism of public mesmeric and hypnomic performances will vanish, and
• 1:47:27
  Speaker 2: the subject will receive the scientific consideration that it merits.
• 1:47:33
  Speaker 2: But at the same time, people will begin to realize
• 1:47:36
  Speaker 2: the mighty power of the mental influence that is capable
• 1:47:40
  Speaker 2: of producing such styling manifestations in a waking state, and
• 1:47:45
  Speaker 2: will seek to guard themselves against the abuse of the power.
• 1:47:51
  Speaker 2: Hypnomic performances condemned. It should be almost unnecessary for me
• 1:47:57
  Speaker 2: to add that I have no sympathy with the the
• 1:48:00
  Speaker 2: public performances of that phase of mental impression known as hypnotism, mesmerism, etc.
• 1:48:08
  Speaker 2: In which subjects are made to go through all sorts
• 1:48:11
  Speaker 2: of foolish and absurd performances. Outside of my objection to
• 1:48:16
  Speaker 2: people surrendering their will to another in this way, I
• 1:48:20
  Speaker 2: feel that such exhibitions are lacking in feeling, good taste,
• 1:48:25
  Speaker 2: and often indecency. To say the least, it is making
• 1:48:30
  Speaker 2: horseplay of a scientific phenomenon. I have nothing in sympathy
• 1:48:37
  Speaker 2: with such manifestations or exhibitions, and shall speak of them
• 1:48:41
  Speaker 2: in this work only to condemn the methods employed scientific
• 1:48:48
  Speaker 2: methods in my remarks and instruction along the line of
• 1:48:53
  Speaker 2: dentific methods, along the lines of the best authorities upon
• 1:48:57
  Speaker 2: the subject, and in accordance with the rules observed at
• 1:49:01
  Speaker 2: the best conducted experiments of such authorities, at which experiments
• 1:49:06
  Speaker 2: I have frequently been present. I wish my students to
• 1:49:11
  Speaker 2: place themselves in a scientific attitude of mind, just as
• 1:49:15
  Speaker 2: if they were attending lectures on the subject at some
• 1:49:18
  Speaker 2: leading university in its scientific course. The subject is a
• 1:49:24
  Speaker 2: strictly scientific one and should be approached, considered, and investigated
• 1:49:29
  Speaker 2: only in accordance with the scientific spirit of investigation. It
• 1:49:35
  Speaker 2: is not a matter of fun or idle amusements. I
• 1:49:39
  Speaker 2: trust that I have made my position on this point
• 1:49:42
  Speaker 2: sufficiently clear to all, so that there may be no
• 1:49:46
  Speaker 2: understanding regarding the same the importance of the knowledge. I
• 1:49:54
  Speaker 2: do not advise all of my students to engage in
• 1:49:57
  Speaker 2: this experimental work, for there is no necess yes for them,
• 1:50:00
  Speaker 2: so doing what I am really trying to do is
• 1:50:05
  Speaker 2: to acquaint them with the methods used in these experiments
• 1:50:09
  Speaker 2: and the results obtained. In this way, they may acquire
• 1:50:14
  Speaker 2: an extended knowledge of the subject, which will enable them
• 1:50:17
  Speaker 2: to really understand the different phases and prevent them from
• 1:50:22
  Speaker 2: entertaining erroneous ideas concerning the matter. This knowledge will also
• 1:50:28
  Speaker 2: enable them to detect any symptoms of an attempt to
• 1:50:32
  Speaker 2: use this force upon them in everyday life. When a
• 1:50:37
  Speaker 2: person becomes acquainted with the true inwardness of a thing,
• 1:50:40
  Speaker 2: so that he recognizes it whenever he sees it, there
• 1:50:44
  Speaker 2: is little danger of his falling into error regarding it.
• 1:50:49
  Speaker 2: The knowing of a thing is half the battle of
• 1:50:52
  Speaker 2: repulsing it. And with this understanding, and with this explanation,
• 1:50:59
  Speaker 2: I shall now proceed to describe the work in experimental
• 1:51:02
  Speaker 2: fascination now being performed by scientific investigators in the colleges
• 1:51:08
  Speaker 2: and other places in this country and in Europe favorable environments.
• 1:51:16
  Speaker 2: The investigator of experimental fascination soon learns that certain environmental
• 1:51:21
  Speaker 2: conditions have a marked effect on the degree of success
• 1:51:26
  Speaker 2: attending his experiments, and accordingly he endeavors to surround his
• 1:51:31
  Speaker 2: experiments with the best conditions possible, as indicated by his experience.
• 1:51:39
  Speaker 2: A knowledge of these conditions is an important thing for
• 1:51:42
  Speaker 2: an uninvestigator and experimenter. Along these lines desirable conditions, the
• 1:51:50
  Speaker 2: investigator finds that he can obtain much better results when
• 1:51:55
  Speaker 2: his experiments are conducted in a quiet place, the atmosphere
• 1:51:59
  Speaker 2: of which is conducive to calm, undisturbed, peaceful mental states.
• 1:52:06
  Speaker 2: This atmosphere affects both operator and subjects, allowing the former
• 1:52:11
  Speaker 2: to concentrate his mind and the latter to give his
• 1:52:14
  Speaker 2: full attention and to rest in the passive mental state.
• 1:52:19
  Speaker 2: It is well if the experiments be conducted in a
• 1:52:22
  Speaker 2: room remote from the street and as far as possible
• 1:52:26
  Speaker 2: apart from the rest of the house, so that noises
• 1:52:29
  Speaker 2: of either cannot well penetrate. The experimenter should also take
• 1:52:35
  Speaker 2: measures to prevent interruption, for the latter will interfere with
• 1:52:40
  Speaker 2: its concentration and the subject's attention sense impressions. The best
• 1:52:49
  Speaker 2: experimenters see that their experimenting room is furnished plainly, having
• 1:52:54
  Speaker 2: no pictures or decorations, et cetera, calculated to attract the
• 1:52:59
  Speaker 2: subjects attention. A soft carpet which will deaden the sound
• 1:53:05
  Speaker 2: of footsteps is advisable. I have seen some experimenters go
• 1:53:10
  Speaker 2: even so far as to place rubber tips or cushions
• 1:53:15
  Speaker 2: on the feet of the chairs, tables, et cetera. In
• 1:53:18
  Speaker 2: the experimenting room. In order to obviate such noises, the
• 1:53:24
  Speaker 2: room should be kept at a comfortable temperature, neither too
• 1:53:28
  Speaker 2: warm nor too cold, as either extreme will make the
• 1:53:32
  Speaker 2: subject uncomfortable and less able to give his full attention
• 1:53:37
  Speaker 2: to the experimenter. I have heard of cold rooms, drafts,
• 1:53:42
  Speaker 2: et cetera interfering with the best conducted experiments, and every
• 1:53:48
  Speaker 2: experimenter is aware of the fact that a close sultry
• 1:53:53
  Speaker 2: day will interfere seriously with his experiments. Care should be
• 1:53:58
  Speaker 2: taken to avoid the glare of light in the room.
• 1:54:02
  Speaker 2: Shades of soft greens or blues are advised, and these
• 1:54:06
  Speaker 2: same colors should be used in the decoration of the
• 1:54:09
  Speaker 2: rooms by the experimenter who wishes to obtain the best results.
• 1:54:15
  Speaker 2: Remember the expression a dim religious light, and you will
• 1:54:21
  Speaker 2: get the right idea psychological effects. Some experimenters burn a
• 1:54:29
  Speaker 2: little incense in the room before the experiment is performed,
• 1:54:33
  Speaker 2: the same having a tendency to quiet the nerves and
• 1:54:37
  Speaker 2: impart a feeling of restfulness to those in the room.
• 1:54:42
  Speaker 2: You will notice that the conditions that tend to produce
• 1:54:45
  Speaker 2: the most successful results in these experiments are the same
• 1:54:49
  Speaker 2: that the ceremonial churches of all races have adopted in
• 1:54:53
  Speaker 2: their services, et cetera. This fact needs but bear mention
• 1:54:58
  Speaker 2: to the thinker. It is well known that soft, quiet
• 1:55:03
  Speaker 2: religious music will produce a psychological condition in which persons
• 1:55:08
  Speaker 2: become quite impressionable, and some of the French psychologists have
• 1:55:12
  Speaker 2: taken advantage of this fact. The whole theory rests upon
• 1:55:18
  Speaker 2: the production of the feeling of ease in the subject. Consequently,
• 1:55:23
  Speaker 2: it is scarcely necessary to add that the cheers should
• 1:55:27
  Speaker 2: be very comfortable and easy. The room of a leading suggestionist.
• 1:55:36
  Speaker 2: I may conclude these remarks upon desirable conditions by quoting
• 1:55:40
  Speaker 2: from an article for a magazine written by myself about
• 1:55:45
  Speaker 2: seven years ago under a pseudonym. The article described the
• 1:55:50
  Speaker 2: experimenting room of a leading American suggestionist and a series
• 1:55:54
  Speaker 2: of experiments conducted before a class of investigators and students
• 1:55:59
  Speaker 2: at which I had been present. I think that the
• 1:56:03
  Speaker 2: description will convey to your minds the ideal conditions for
• 1:56:08
  Speaker 2: experiments along these lines. I said in the article. The
• 1:56:14
  Speaker 2: room is well ventilated and lighted, although there is an
• 1:56:18
  Speaker 2: absence of glare. It is remarkably quiet and free from
• 1:56:23
  Speaker 2: disturbing sounds and sights, the air of seclusion and remoteness
• 1:56:29
  Speaker 2: from the scenes. Without being very marked, the impression grows
• 1:56:34
  Speaker 2: upon one and reminds him of the interior of some quiet,
• 1:56:37
  Speaker 2: old rural chapel on the summer afternoon, when all around
• 1:56:43
  Speaker 2: seems to indicate the lack of existence of an outside world,
• 1:56:47
  Speaker 2: save the occasional breeze faintly fanning the cheek, and some
• 1:56:52
  Speaker 2: muffled sound seeming to come from some far distant point,
• 1:56:57
  Speaker 2: and perhaps the droning of some gray bumblebee that had
• 1:57:01
  Speaker 2: chanced to float in the open door. The semi religious
• 1:57:06
  Speaker 2: air is heightened by the dim religious light and by
• 1:57:11
  Speaker 2: the voice of the experimenter as he gives the repeated
• 1:57:14
  Speaker 2: suggestion to the patient in the same monotonous tone, encouraging
• 1:57:20
  Speaker 2: and hopeful, and at times reminding one of an earnest prayer.
• 1:57:28
  Speaker 2: The surroundings, the stillness, the tone of the operator, the
• 1:57:33
  Speaker 2: reclining position of the patient all give the strongest suggestion
• 1:57:38
  Speaker 2: of quiet, calm, peace, ease and rest, freed them from
• 1:57:43
  Speaker 2: care and worry, relief from pain and trouble, Nirvana the
• 1:57:50
  Speaker 2: influence of these suggestive surroundings is distinctly felt by the visitor,
• 1:57:56
  Speaker 2: and he also unconsciously assumes the role of the attendant
• 1:58:00
  Speaker 2: at the chapel. The writer was told by some of
• 1:58:05
  Speaker 2: the patients that they soon become totally oblivious of the
• 1:58:08
  Speaker 2: presence of the class and are to all intents and
• 1:58:12
  Speaker 2: purposes known with the operator, with no other thoughts than
• 1:58:18
  Speaker 2: the suggestions being made to them. I might add that
• 1:58:22
  Speaker 2: the suggestions given to the patients at the beginning of
• 1:58:26
  Speaker 2: the treatment were calculated to increase the desired mental state
• 1:58:30
  Speaker 2: of rest, calm, and quiet. How to determine impressionability. The
• 1:58:39
  Speaker 2: first thing that the experimenter does is to determine the
• 1:58:43
  Speaker 2: degree of impressionability of the impressionable. There are a number
• 1:58:49
  Speaker 2: of ways to determine this. One of the methods that
• 1:58:53
  Speaker 2: have been found the most effective is to have the
• 1:58:56
  Speaker 2: impressionable partially extend his left hand and arms until an
• 1:59:01
  Speaker 2: easy position is obtained. Then have him hold the hand
• 1:59:06
  Speaker 2: with palm downward, and then raise or elevate the third
• 1:59:11
  Speaker 2: finger of that hand, generally known as the ring finger,
• 1:59:17
  Speaker 2: holding the other fingers steady and down on a level
• 1:59:21
  Speaker 2: with the palm. Then tell him that you will proceed
• 1:59:26
  Speaker 2: to will that he shall feel a tingling sensation in
• 1:59:30
  Speaker 2: the finger, which feeling will increase gradually and will then
• 1:59:35
  Speaker 2: begin to extend up the hand and wrist, and then
• 1:59:39
  Speaker 2: up the arm to the shoulder. Tell him that the
• 1:59:43
  Speaker 2: feeling will be faint at first, but that it will
• 1:59:47
  Speaker 2: begin to tingle more and more in a few moments,
• 1:59:51
  Speaker 2: and then it will extend in the manner stated. Then
• 1:59:56
  Speaker 2: concentrate your own mind on the feeling you desire to
• 2:00:00
  Speaker 2: produce in him, and will strongly that it be produced.
• 2:00:06
  Speaker 2: After a moment, ask him whether he does not feel
• 2:00:09
  Speaker 2: the faint tingling sensation, But note this, ask him in
• 2:00:15
  Speaker 2: such a way as to give him the positive suggestion
• 2:00:18
  Speaker 2: that he does this way, For instance, you feel the
• 2:00:24
  Speaker 2: tingling already, don't you. This form of question is really
• 2:00:30
  Speaker 2: a suggestion for you state the thing before asking the question.
• 2:00:36
  Speaker 2: When you say don't, you emphasize the don't sharply and positively.
• 2:00:43
  Speaker 2: You will find that the sensation is perceived in a
• 2:00:46
  Speaker 2: moment or two. In a large percentage of cases, and
• 2:00:51
  Speaker 2: in many cases, the more pronounced results are obtained the
• 2:00:57
  Speaker 2: degree of sensation produced. The determines the degree of impressionability
• 2:01:02
  Speaker 2: of the person tested. When you conclude the test, in
• 2:01:07
  Speaker 2: each case, be sure to take the subject's hand, grasping
• 2:01:12
  Speaker 2: it firmly and shaking it gently, saying your hand is
• 2:01:17
  Speaker 2: all right, now, all right, emphasizing the words all right,
• 2:01:24
  Speaker 2: and saying them firmly and positively. Always say these things
• 2:01:30
  Speaker 2: with an air of conviction and assurance, for there is
• 2:01:34
  Speaker 2: a great suggestive quality in such tones testing a roomful
• 2:01:40
  Speaker 2: of people. If you are testing a number of people
• 2:01:46
  Speaker 2: a roomful, for instance, you should pass rapidly over the
• 2:01:50
  Speaker 2: number to be tested until you have finished. You may
• 2:01:54
  Speaker 2: test the whole roomful at one time, as above, if
• 2:01:58
  Speaker 2: you desire. Do not act as if you were attaching
• 2:02:03
  Speaker 2: much importance to the test, telling them that you are
• 2:02:07
  Speaker 2: merely testing them for impressionability, et cetera. But when you
• 2:02:13
  Speaker 2: have finished, you will know just the degree of impressionability
• 2:02:17
  Speaker 2: of each person in the room, and you will thereby
• 2:02:21
  Speaker 2: be enabled to select the most impressionable for the next test,
• 2:02:27
  Speaker 2: impressing the subject. Having selected the desired number of impressionables,
• 2:02:35
  Speaker 2: pick out one of them and ask him to stand
• 2:02:38
  Speaker 2: up before you, looking you straight in the eye. See
• 2:02:43
  Speaker 2: direction for acquiring the magnetic asee in the later chapter,
• 2:02:48
  Speaker 2: saying to him in a quiet but firm, positive tone,
• 2:02:53
  Speaker 2: words to this effect. Now give me your entire attention.
• 2:03:00
  Speaker 2: I wish you to fix your attention firmly upon me
• 2:03:04
  Speaker 2: and what I am saying. For in this way only
• 2:03:08
  Speaker 2: can the best results be obtained. You must forget everything
• 2:03:14
  Speaker 2: and everybody else in the room, and must hear only
• 2:03:18
  Speaker 2: my voice and feel my thoughts. Make yourself perfectly receptive
• 2:03:24
  Speaker 2: and passive to my thoughts and words. There must seem
• 2:03:29
  Speaker 2: to be no one else here but you and I.
• 2:03:34
  Speaker 2: You must see no one else, must hear no other voice,
• 2:03:39
  Speaker 2: must think no other thoughts but mine. Give me your
• 2:03:44
  Speaker 2: full attention now, and open yourself to the inflow of
• 2:03:48
  Speaker 2: my thoughts. Talk to him a few moments in this strain,
• 2:03:54
  Speaker 2: and then say, that's right.
• 2:03:58
  Speaker 7: Now.
• 2:03:59
  Speaker 2: You are giving me your full attention. You are now
• 2:04:02
  Speaker 2: feeling my thought. All is going well, et cetera, et cetera,
• 2:04:10
  Speaker 2: in an encouraging tone, in the same spirit as you
• 2:04:14
  Speaker 2: would to a child who is trying to perform some
• 2:04:17
  Speaker 2: task under your direction, inducing relaxation, instruct him to relax
• 2:04:26
  Speaker 2: all his muscles to take the attension off of them.
• 2:04:31
  Speaker 2: Tell him that in so doing, he will draw his
• 2:04:34
  Speaker 2: will away from his muscles, which is just about what
• 2:04:38
  Speaker 2: really happens. If he seems to be slow at grasping
• 2:04:42
  Speaker 2: the idea, give him a practical illustration of relaxation by
• 2:04:47
  Speaker 2: lifting one of his hands and then letting it drop.
• 2:04:52
  Speaker 2: If it does not drop freely, then he has not relaxed.
• 2:04:57
  Speaker 2: Try him until he learns just what relaxation means. This
• 2:05:03
  Speaker 2: practice will bring about a state of passivity which will
• 2:05:07
  Speaker 2: tend toward success in your experiments exercises in relaxation. It
• 2:05:15
  Speaker 2: is of the greatest importance that the subject of the
• 2:05:19
  Speaker 2: experiments be brought into a passive condition of mind, and
• 2:05:24
  Speaker 2: the best way to induce this desired condition is to
• 2:05:28
  Speaker 2: bring about a passive condition of body, for the latter
• 2:05:32
  Speaker 2: will have a reflex action on the mind. According to
• 2:05:36
  Speaker 2: well established laws, the following exercises will aid you to
• 2:05:42
  Speaker 2: bring about the condition preparatory to your psychological experiments. Exercises
• 2:05:52
  Speaker 2: instruct the subject to withdraw his will from his right hand,
• 2:05:56
  Speaker 2: making it perfectly limber, so that he may it loosely
• 2:06:00
  Speaker 2: from his wrist. Then have him so swing it backward
• 2:06:05
  Speaker 2: and forward. Repeat with the left hand. Then have him
• 2:06:11
  Speaker 2: impart to the hands a twisting motion to and fro
• 2:06:15
  Speaker 2: from the wrist, of course, letting them twist about limply.
• 2:06:22
  Speaker 2: Then have him withdraw the will from his arms, and
• 2:06:25
  Speaker 2: then shake and twist them about the shoulder like a
• 2:06:29
  Speaker 2: pair of empty coat sleeves. Then lift his arms up
• 2:06:34
  Speaker 2: above his head and allow them to fall like a
• 2:06:38
  Speaker 2: dead weight to his sides. The following must be occasioned
• 2:06:42
  Speaker 2: by the weight of the arm, and not aided by
• 2:06:45
  Speaker 2: his will. His will must be withdrawn entirely. The above
• 2:06:51
  Speaker 2: exercises may be varied and amplified as found desirable. Putting
• 2:06:58
  Speaker 2: subjects at ease. Some of the best experimenters take considerable
• 2:07:05
  Speaker 2: time in putting at ease the persons who offer themselves
• 2:07:10
  Speaker 2: as subjects for psychological experiments, and at the same time
• 2:07:15
  Speaker 2: they bring about the desired state of relaxation. They realize
• 2:07:20
  Speaker 2: the distaste and fear that anything like hypnotism inspires in
• 2:07:25
  Speaker 2: the minds of people owing to the public performances thereof,
• 2:07:30
  Speaker 2: and they avoid any suggestion of similar conditions. They generally
• 2:07:36
  Speaker 2: begin by talking of the value of relaxation and how
• 2:07:40
  Speaker 2: few people are able to relax their muscles. Then they
• 2:07:46
  Speaker 2: illustrate the matter by showing the subjects, how few of
• 2:07:49
  Speaker 2: them are able to relax easily. This leads to the
• 2:07:54
  Speaker 2: trying of the above mentioned relaxation exercise or similar ones, which,
• 2:08:00
  Speaker 2: as you will see in a moment, leads directly to
• 2:08:04
  Speaker 2: the first real test of mental induction and suggestion, which
• 2:08:09
  Speaker 2: is known as the falling forward test, which is one
• 2:08:12
  Speaker 2: of the simplest tests known to the psychological laboratory. From
• 2:08:18
  Speaker 2: that test to others is merely a matter of successive steps,
• 2:08:24
  Speaker 2: So the experimenter really begins his work with the process
• 2:08:28
  Speaker 2: of putting the subject at ease and training him in relaxation.
• 2:08:35
  Speaker 2: In this connection, I would say that very few people
• 2:08:38
  Speaker 2: know how to relax, and some teaching is necessary. In
• 2:08:43
  Speaker 2: the majority of cases, the above exercises should be sufficient
• 2:08:50
  Speaker 2: the primary test. After instructing the subject in relaxation, say
• 2:08:57
  Speaker 2: to him, now look me straight in the eyes, and
• 2:09:02
  Speaker 2: let my thought act through you. You are feeling an
• 2:09:06
  Speaker 2: inclination to fall forward, fall forward, fall forward toward me.
• 2:09:14
  Speaker 2: Do not fight it, but yield to it. Yield to it.
• 2:09:18
  Speaker 2: I say, I will catch you as you fall. Now,
• 2:09:23
  Speaker 2: fall forward toward me slowly. That's it. You are leaning
• 2:09:28
  Speaker 2: a little. Now, come on, come on, come on now,
• 2:09:34
  Speaker 2: this way this way. Now, extend your two hands, one
• 2:09:41
  Speaker 2: on each side of his head, but a little in
• 2:09:44
  Speaker 2: front of him, so that he can see the palms
• 2:09:47
  Speaker 2: of your hands, which should face each other. Then, as
• 2:09:51
  Speaker 2: you repeat the suggestions mentioned above, draw your hands slowly
• 2:09:55
  Speaker 2: away from him, as if you are drawing him by
• 2:09:59
  Speaker 2: some physical power. This is a strong suggestion which will
• 2:10:05
  Speaker 2: render him more susceptible to your will. The more reality
• 2:10:10
  Speaker 2: you throw into the acting out this drawing, the more
• 2:10:14
  Speaker 2: strength you will put into your willing, and the more
• 2:10:18
  Speaker 2: readily will he obey. Using the will. While saying these words,
• 2:10:25
  Speaker 2: look contently into his eyes and will that he fall forward.
• 2:10:32
  Speaker 2: In a moment, he will begin to sway forward a little,
• 2:10:35
  Speaker 2: And if you keep up the concentrated will and suggestions,
• 2:10:40
  Speaker 2: he will fall forward toward you. Be ready for him,
• 2:10:44
  Speaker 2: and catch him with your hands. This test is far
• 2:10:49
  Speaker 2: more simple than it would seem from reading the description
• 2:10:52
  Speaker 2: of it, and is capable of being produced in a
• 2:10:57
  Speaker 2: large percentage of cases. The persons will allow their minds
• 2:11:02
  Speaker 2: to become passive to yours. Where there seems to be
• 2:11:06
  Speaker 2: a resistance, tell the person to hold the thought that
• 2:11:10
  Speaker 2: he is inclining forward towards you. Some find it easier
• 2:11:15
  Speaker 2: to feel the falling forward sensation with their eyes closed
• 2:11:19
  Speaker 2: than with them open. With others, the reverse is true
• 2:11:25
  Speaker 2: reversing the test. After you have succeeded in this experiment,
• 2:11:31
  Speaker 2: stand behind the person about one yard and concentrate your
• 2:11:35
  Speaker 2: case upon a point at the base of the skull,
• 2:11:39
  Speaker 2: that is where the neck joins the head. Then tell
• 2:11:44
  Speaker 2: him that he will experience a falling backward sensation, just
• 2:11:48
  Speaker 2: as he did before in the falling forward test. Be
• 2:11:53
  Speaker 2: sure to tell him that you will catch him when
• 2:11:55
  Speaker 2: he falls, et cetera. In order to reassure him. Use
• 2:12:01
  Speaker 2: the same tones, et cetera as in the falling forward test,
• 2:12:06
  Speaker 2: except that you will substitute the word backward for forward.
• 2:12:11
  Speaker 2: In a few moments, you will obtain the same result
• 2:12:14
  Speaker 2: as in the falling forward. Both of the above experiments
• 2:12:19
  Speaker 2: are among the easiest tests known to experimenters, but they
• 2:12:23
  Speaker 2: are important inasmuch as they serve to inspire confidence in
• 2:12:28
  Speaker 2: himself in the mind of the experimenter, and a passive
• 2:12:33
  Speaker 2: confidence in the mind of the impressionable. Then it is
• 2:12:37
  Speaker 2: always well to begin by some easy tests and then
• 2:12:41
  Speaker 2: work up by degrees to the more difficult ones. Even
• 2:12:46
  Speaker 2: upon subsequent occasions. The fastened palm test. The next test
• 2:12:53
  Speaker 2: may be as follows. Tell the impressionable to place the
• 2:12:59
  Speaker 2: palm of his hand upon your own, allowing it to
• 2:13:02
  Speaker 2: rest there a few moments, withdrawing all of his will
• 2:13:06
  Speaker 2: from his hand and leaving it perfectly relaxed and like
• 2:13:11
  Speaker 2: a dead weight. Then tell him that you are going
• 2:13:15
  Speaker 2: to fasten his hand to yours by thought. Then, looking
• 2:13:21
  Speaker 2: him straight in the eyes, say in a strong, firm,
• 2:13:25
  Speaker 2: positive tone, now you can't take your hand away. You can't,
• 2:13:32
  Speaker 2: I say, Try, but you can't. Try, Try, Try, you can't.
• 2:13:39
  Speaker 2: You can't, you can't, I say, et cetera. Always accent
• 2:13:46
  Speaker 2: the word can't in these experiments, for that is the
• 2:13:49
  Speaker 2: word you wish to emphasize and drive home in his mind.
• 2:13:54
  Speaker 2: And you must, of course accompany your words by the
• 2:13:58
  Speaker 2: thought you can't. You must will that he cannot remove
• 2:14:04
  Speaker 2: the impression by saying all right, now, all right. The
• 2:14:10
  Speaker 2: locked fingers test. Your next test is that of fastening
• 2:14:15
  Speaker 2: his own hands together. This is accomplished by getting him
• 2:14:20
  Speaker 2: to lock the fingers of his two hands together, holding
• 2:14:24
  Speaker 2: them as tight together as he is able to do,
• 2:14:28
  Speaker 2: using his will actively in so doing, Then say to him, now,
• 2:14:35
  Speaker 2: do not resist me, but remain as you are.
• 2:14:39
  Speaker 3: Now.
• 2:14:40
  Speaker 2: You can't unloose your hands. You can't, I say, you can't.
• 2:14:46
  Speaker 2: Try but you can't, et cetera, et cetera. At the
• 2:14:51
  Speaker 2: same time, concentrating your gaze and will upon his hands,
• 2:14:56
  Speaker 2: thus holding them together. It may help you in the
• 2:15:00
  Speaker 2: beginning to hold his hands together with your own at
• 2:15:05
  Speaker 2: the first, and then gradually loosen your own until they
• 2:15:11
  Speaker 2: are entirely away from his hands, repeating your suggestions. Meanwhile,
• 2:15:17
  Speaker 2: remove the impression as previously instructed. The clenched fist test.
• 2:15:26
  Speaker 2: Your next test may be that of preventing him from
• 2:15:29
  Speaker 2: unclenching his fist. Proceed as in the last test, telling
• 2:15:35
  Speaker 2: him to clench his fist together as tight as he can,
• 2:15:39
  Speaker 2: and then you must say to him, now you can't
• 2:15:43
  Speaker 2: unclench it. You can't, I say, et cetera. It will
• 2:15:49
  Speaker 2: be some time before he can get his fist unclenched.
• 2:15:53
  Speaker 2: Remove the impression. Rotating hands test. The next test may
• 2:16:01
  Speaker 2: be that of making him rotate his hands. Proceed by
• 2:16:06
  Speaker 2: telling him to relax his hands somewhat, but begin to
• 2:16:10
  Speaker 2: rotate them around each other in an outward direction. Then
• 2:16:15
  Speaker 2: say to him faster, faster, faster, faster, as fast as
• 2:16:23
  Speaker 2: you can. Then, when his hands are rotating rapidly, say
• 2:16:29
  Speaker 2: to him, now you can't stop them. You can't, I say, try,
• 2:16:37
  Speaker 2: but you can't, you can't, et cetera. And it will
• 2:16:43
  Speaker 2: be some time before he will be able to stop.
• 2:16:48
  Speaker 2: Remove the impression by the suggestion all right, all right.
• 2:16:55
  Speaker 2: The drawing test. Your next test may be that of
• 2:16:59
  Speaker 2: drawing him forward or backward toward you. This is accomplished
• 2:17:04
  Speaker 2: by standing before or behind him, as the case may be,
• 2:17:09
  Speaker 2: and telling him that he will walk toward you, backward
• 2:17:14
  Speaker 2: or forward as you wish. The command must be accompanied
• 2:17:19
  Speaker 2: by the will remove the impression akin to the last
• 2:17:25
  Speaker 2: two tests as follows, one preventing him from stepping out
• 2:17:31
  Speaker 2: at all, and two preventing him from stepping outside of
• 2:17:36
  Speaker 2: an imaginary circle that you have drawn on the floor.
• 2:17:42
  Speaker 2: These tests are of course accompanied by the appropriate suggestions
• 2:17:46
  Speaker 2: and use of the will remove the impression. The chair
• 2:17:52
  Speaker 2: tests Similar tests, such as preventing him from sitting down
• 2:17:58
  Speaker 2: in a chair or causing him to remain seated in
• 2:18:01
  Speaker 2: a chair unable to rise, may be made in the
• 2:18:05
  Speaker 2: same way remove the impression other tests. Another common test
• 2:18:15
  Speaker 2: is that of giving the impressionable a cane, telling him
• 2:18:19
  Speaker 2: to hold it fast, and then telling him sharply that
• 2:18:23
  Speaker 2: he cannot throw it down, for it is sticking to
• 2:18:26
  Speaker 2: your hands, et cetera. Remove the impression. A similar test
• 2:18:34
  Speaker 2: is preventing him from lifting a light weight, a box,
• 2:18:38
  Speaker 2: or a chair by your suggestions of you can't, accompanied
• 2:18:43
  Speaker 2: by the use of your will remove the impression. The
• 2:18:50
  Speaker 2: name test. Some experimenters try the test of preventing the
• 2:18:55
  Speaker 2: impressionable from speaking his name by their Kent suggestions. A
• 2:19:01
  Speaker 2: variation of this is making him say his name is
• 2:19:04
  Speaker 2: Tom Jones or some other fictitious name by the mere
• 2:19:09
  Speaker 2: strong suggestion of Tom Jones. It's Tom Jones, I say,
• 2:19:14
  Speaker 2: following upon the sharp question what's your name? Strange as
• 2:19:20
  Speaker 2: it may appear, this test is successful in many instances.
• 2:19:25
  Speaker 2: Remove the impression. The eyelid test. The test of fastening
• 2:19:33
  Speaker 2: the eyelids is accomplished by having the impressionable fasten his
• 2:19:37
  Speaker 2: eyelids tied together, keeping them in that position for a
• 2:19:41
  Speaker 2: few moments, when the experimenter says, now you can't open them.
• 2:19:48
  Speaker 2: You can't try, but you can't, et cetera, et cetera.
• 2:19:54
  Speaker 2: As above described release the impression. Stiffening the arm or
• 2:20:01
  Speaker 2: leg is accomplished along the same general lines using the
• 2:20:05
  Speaker 2: appropriate suggestions, and will remove the impression. The catalepsy test,
• 2:20:16
  Speaker 2: the catalepsy feet of the professional hypnotists, is but an
• 2:20:20
  Speaker 2: enlargement of the above muscular tests, and consists of producing
• 2:20:25
  Speaker 2: a condition of rigidity all over the body of the subject.
• 2:20:32
  Speaker 2: I do not advise conducting this test, for accidents have
• 2:20:36
  Speaker 2: occurred in some cases, and there are other reasons why
• 2:20:41
  Speaker 2: it is not advisable. I mention it here merely as
• 2:20:46
  Speaker 2: a matter of scientific interest. Notwithstanding the claims of the
• 2:20:51
  Speaker 2: hypnotists that this test is capable of being produced only
• 2:20:56
  Speaker 2: when the subject is in the deep stage of hypnosis
• 2:21:00
  Speaker 2: known as a cataleptic stage, all psychologists know that it
• 2:21:04
  Speaker 2: may be produced in the wide awake condition, and is
• 2:21:08
  Speaker 2: merely a muscular test, having nothing whatever to do with
• 2:21:12
  Speaker 2: the sleep condition. One underlying principle. You will see that
• 2:21:21
  Speaker 2: one law governs all of these tests and thousands of
• 2:21:25
  Speaker 2: others of a similar nature, which may occur to the experimenter.
• 2:21:30
  Speaker 2: It is all a matter of the use of the
• 2:21:33
  Speaker 2: will and the suggestion of the experimenter, accompanied by the
• 2:21:37
  Speaker 2: relaxation of the will of the other person. The law
• 2:21:42
  Speaker 2: of mentative induction is the real cause behind the phenomena.
• 2:21:48
  Speaker 2: The suggestions render doubly efficient the will power of the
• 2:21:52
  Speaker 2: experimenter by giving the mind of the impressionable a mental image,
• 2:21:58
  Speaker 2: around which is mental polls materialize on action muscular tests
• 2:22:05
  Speaker 2: and beyond the above tests are what are known as
• 2:22:10
  Speaker 2: muscular tests, all depending upon the control of the muscles
• 2:22:14
  Speaker 2: of the impressionable by the will of the experimenter. Many
• 2:22:20
  Speaker 2: of these tests are believed by the hypnotists and mesmerists
• 2:22:25
  Speaker 2: to be possible of production only when their subjects are
• 2:22:28
  Speaker 2: in the sleep condition, or at least only after they
• 2:22:32
  Speaker 2: have been put to sleep and then aroused. As a
• 2:22:37
  Speaker 2: matter of fact, sleep conditions have nothing whatever to do
• 2:22:42
  Speaker 2: with this phenomena, as may be proven by the fact
• 2:22:46
  Speaker 2: that all of the above tests may be performed without
• 2:22:49
  Speaker 2: any suggestion of sleep or similar condition. There is a
• 2:22:55
  Speaker 2: more remarkable class of phenomena than the above mentioned, which
• 2:22:59
  Speaker 2: will be conceded hither in the next chapter, all of
• 2:23:02
  Speaker 2: which also may be produced without any attempt to induce sleep.
• 2:23:09
  Speaker 2: This sleep delusion has led people astray for many years,
• 2:23:13
  Speaker 2: but now it is known that the phenomena of sleep
• 2:23:16
  Speaker 2: itself is merely an effect of mental impression and suggestion,
• 2:23:22
  Speaker 2: instead of being the cause of the various phenomena known
• 2:23:26
  Speaker 2: as mesmerism and hypnotism. Removing the impression. Referring to my
• 2:23:34
  Speaker 2: repeated caution to remove the impression, I wish to call
• 2:23:38
  Speaker 2: your attention to the fact that the best experimenters lay
• 2:23:42
  Speaker 2: much stress upon the advisability, if not the absolute necessity,
• 2:23:47
  Speaker 2: of removing the induced condition from the mind of the
• 2:23:51
  Speaker 2: person experimented upon, Otherwise he might carry away with him
• 2:23:57
  Speaker 2: the induced condition or impression, which which is often far
• 2:24:01
  Speaker 2: deeper and stronger than is commonly believed to be the case.
• 2:24:07
  Speaker 2: I urge this upon you specially, do not neglect it.
• 2:24:12
  Speaker 2: The conditions may readily be removed by the suggestion of
• 2:24:17
  Speaker 2: now you are all right, all right, Now you understand
• 2:24:22
  Speaker 2: you are now all right, accompanying the suggestion by the
• 2:24:27
  Speaker 2: mental picture of their being relieved from the induced condition.
• 2:24:32
  Speaker 2: The gentle touch of the hand, as in patting the
• 2:24:35
  Speaker 2: part that has been controlled, will help to accentuate the
• 2:24:39
  Speaker 2: effects of suggestion of all right, removing undesirable conditions. In
• 2:24:48
  Speaker 2: this connection, it may be as well to mention that
• 2:24:52
  Speaker 2: If you ever happen to come across unimpressionable or the
• 2:24:56
  Speaker 2: tendency to manifest a drowsy condition, or the so called
• 2:25:01
  Speaker 2: sleep state of hypnotism, probably arising from previous suggestions, either
• 2:25:07
  Speaker 2: direct from a hypnotist or from having witnessed a hypnotic exhibition,
• 2:25:13
  Speaker 2: you may proceed to awaken him to the method just
• 2:25:17
  Speaker 2: given for removing the impression. In such cases, you may
• 2:25:22
  Speaker 2: make upward passes along the sides of his head, saying
• 2:25:26
  Speaker 2: to him, sharply and positively, wake up, Wake up now,
• 2:25:33
  Speaker 2: I say, wake up, wide awake. Now you're wide awake?
• 2:25:39
  Speaker 2: Why awake? All right? Now? All right? I say, all right,
• 2:25:46
  Speaker 2: all right, and whide awake? All right, all right. You
• 2:25:54
  Speaker 2: may heighten the effect by snapping your fingers close to
• 2:25:57
  Speaker 2: his face and slapping his shoulders sharply. Be sure to
• 2:26:02
  Speaker 2: speak positively, firmly, and sharply, just as a father would
• 2:26:08
  Speaker 2: in rousing up a sleepy boy in the morning, and
• 2:26:13
  Speaker 2: don't lose your head. You are not likely to have
• 2:26:18
  Speaker 2: need for this advice in ordinary experiments, but I give
• 2:26:22
  Speaker 2: it in case you happen to come across some impressionable
• 2:26:27
  Speaker 2: or hyper impressionable see lay their chapters, who may have
• 2:26:32
  Speaker 2: been previously hypnotized by some operator who believed in the
• 2:26:36
  Speaker 2: sleep condition and brought the same about by suggestion see
• 2:26:43
  Speaker 2: lay their chapters. Or else some subject of the same
• 2:26:47
  Speaker 2: class who has seemed hypnotic subjects go asleep and induce
• 2:26:53
  Speaker 2: the same state in himself by imitative self impression. In
• 2:26:58
  Speaker 2: such a case, I would advise that you afterwards give
• 2:27:01
  Speaker 2: the subject a good sound suggestive treatment to the effect
• 2:27:07
  Speaker 2: that he will never again go to sleep in this way,
• 2:27:11
  Speaker 2: that he is immune to abnotic sleep suggestions, and in
• 2:27:15
  Speaker 2: other ways build up in him a resistance to this
• 2:27:19
  Speaker 2: deplorable condition. These sleep condition hypnotists have much to answer for,
• 2:27:26
  Speaker 2: for which their plea of ignorance is not quite sufficient.
• 2:27:31
  Speaker 2: Chapter nine of Mental Fascination. This is a LibriVox recording.
• 2:27:38
  Speaker 2: All LibriVox recordings are in the public domain. For more
• 2:27:43
  Speaker 2: information or to volunteer, please visit LibriVox dot org. Mental
• 2:27:50
  Speaker 2: Fascination by William Walker Atkinson. Chapter nine Experiments in induced sensation.
• 2:28:02
  Speaker 2: In the last chapter we considered instances of tests of
• 2:28:06
  Speaker 2: experimental fascination along the lines of muscular control. In this chapter,
• 2:28:13
  Speaker 2: we will consider the phenomena a tendant upon induced sensation,
• 2:28:19
  Speaker 2: all of which follows the same law of cause and
• 2:28:22
  Speaker 2: is produced in the same manner and by the same
• 2:28:25
  Speaker 2: methods as the muscular phenomena. Let us begin our consideration
• 2:28:31
  Speaker 2: of sense control by the familiar test of the burning hand,
• 2:28:37
  Speaker 2: the burning hand test. This test is performed in the
• 2:28:42
  Speaker 2: following manner. You stand before the impressionable, the latter extending
• 2:28:48
  Speaker 2: his hand toward you, palm downward. You place the first
• 2:28:53
  Speaker 2: two fingers of your right hand upon the back of
• 2:28:55
  Speaker 2: his hand, holding them there for a moment, and concentrate
• 2:29:00
  Speaker 2: your gaze and will upon his hand. Then you say
• 2:29:04
  Speaker 2: to him sharply, rapidly, and positively, I am burning your hand.
• 2:29:11
  Speaker 2: I am burning your hand. It is hot, hot, hot,
• 2:29:17
  Speaker 2: It is burning, burning, burning you, burning you. I say,
• 2:29:22
  Speaker 2: take it away quick, I tell you, it is burning you,
• 2:29:26
  Speaker 2: et cetera, et cetera, always emphasizing the words hot and burning,
• 2:29:33
  Speaker 2: and at the same time willing that your fingers will
• 2:29:36
  Speaker 2: feel hot to him. It is surprising how many people
• 2:29:41
  Speaker 2: will experience the sensation of heat. If you perform the
• 2:29:44
  Speaker 2: test properly and are able to concentrate your will sufficiently
• 2:29:49
  Speaker 2: well and accompany the same with vivid suggestions A variation
• 2:29:55
  Speaker 2: of this test is to give the impressionable a silver coin,
• 2:30:00
  Speaker 2: telling him to hold it between his thumb and forefinger, then,
• 2:30:05
  Speaker 2: after a moment, give him the suggestions of it being hot, hot, hot,
• 2:30:10
  Speaker 2: it's burning you, burning you, et cetera. You may even
• 2:30:15
  Speaker 2: impress upon him the idea that while it is burning him,
• 2:30:19
  Speaker 2: he is unable to let go of it, et cetera.
• 2:30:25
  Speaker 2: Induced pain. Another test of the sense of feeling is
• 2:30:31
  Speaker 2: that shown by having the impressionable hold out his hand,
• 2:30:35
  Speaker 2: his arm being extended full length, then standing before him
• 2:30:41
  Speaker 2: with a pin between the finger and thumb of your
• 2:30:43
  Speaker 2: right hand, pretend to prick your own hand, jabbing the
• 2:30:48
  Speaker 2: pin into it, and grimacing as if with pain, at
• 2:30:53
  Speaker 2: the same time saying to him, you, see you feel
• 2:30:57
  Speaker 2: the pain of this pen is her? It hurts you,
• 2:31:01
  Speaker 2: I say, you feel the pain instead of my feeling it.
• 2:31:07
  Speaker 2: See you feel it now, making a feint of dabbing
• 2:31:12
  Speaker 2: the pin into your own hand. You feel it, I say,
• 2:31:17
  Speaker 2: et cetera. It is remarkable how many persons will take
• 2:31:23
  Speaker 2: on the pain you are supposed to be feeling. Of course,
• 2:31:27
  Speaker 2: your imagination should be exercised under the control of your will,
• 2:31:32
  Speaker 2: so that you will allow yourself to imagine that you
• 2:31:35
  Speaker 2: feel the pain. I have seen the above experiment tried
• 2:31:39
  Speaker 2: before a roomful of people, and many of the audience
• 2:31:43
  Speaker 2: shared the induced pain with the impressionable upon whom the
• 2:31:48
  Speaker 2: experiment was being tried. Do not forget what I said
• 2:31:53
  Speaker 2: in the last chapter about taking away the induced condition
• 2:31:57
  Speaker 2: after the test. In the above cases, rub your finger
• 2:32:01
  Speaker 2: over the burnt or hurt spot, saying it's all right now,
• 2:32:07
  Speaker 2: all right, the pain is all gone. If you do
• 2:32:12
  Speaker 2: not do so, the impressionable may carry away with him
• 2:32:16
  Speaker 2: a sensation that his hand had been subjected to heat
• 2:32:19
  Speaker 2: or pain. Remarkable phenomena. In this connection, it may be
• 2:32:26
  Speaker 2: proper to call your attention to the fact that the
• 2:32:29
  Speaker 2: history of the subject shows cases in which burns have
• 2:32:33
  Speaker 2: actually been produced on the bodies of persons by strong
• 2:32:36
  Speaker 2: suggestion coupled with physical aids. For instance, postage stamps have
• 2:32:43
  Speaker 2: been placed in portions of the body with the suggestion
• 2:32:46
  Speaker 2: that they were fly blisters, and the blister appeared. You
• 2:32:51
  Speaker 2: will see that it is all a matter of induced feeling.
• 2:32:56
  Speaker 2: The more marked results merely evidencing the power of the
• 2:32:59
  Speaker 2: mind of the individual over the mind. In the portions
• 2:33:02
  Speaker 2: of his body, as I have shown in the chapter
• 2:33:06
  Speaker 2: entitled mental Therapeutics in my work on mental magic. Many
• 2:33:14
  Speaker 2: other experiments along the line of sense control might be mentioned,
• 2:33:20
  Speaker 2: but they are all but different forms of the same thing.
• 2:33:24
  Speaker 2: The ingenuity of the experimenter will indicate manifold variations if
• 2:33:30
  Speaker 2: he sees fit to follow up the subject induced sense
• 2:33:36
  Speaker 2: of smell. The sense of smell may be induced by
• 2:33:40
  Speaker 2: the experimenter suggesting to the impressionable that a bottle contains
• 2:33:45
  Speaker 2: a liquid smelling like certain perfumes, etc. This may be
• 2:33:50
  Speaker 2: varied by changing the suggestion so that all the well
• 2:33:53
  Speaker 2: known perfumes may be sensed, like the legend of the
• 2:33:58
  Speaker 2: magic perfume Bottle of the Wizard, which probably was nothing
• 2:34:02
  Speaker 2: more than a case of clever induction of the sense
• 2:34:05
  Speaker 2: of smell by the method mentioned Herein personal experiences, I
• 2:34:13
  Speaker 2: have seen a number of cases of this kind in
• 2:34:16
  Speaker 2: my personal experience in which large numbers of people were
• 2:34:20
  Speaker 2: impressed in this way. In one case, I was attending
• 2:34:25
  Speaker 2: a play, the scene of which was laid in the south,
• 2:34:29
  Speaker 2: and in which one of the characters remarked, Oh, smell
• 2:34:34
  Speaker 2: the magnolia, How strong is their odor? In this heavy,
• 2:34:38
  Speaker 2: warm night? Air, and in a moment the audience noticed
• 2:34:44
  Speaker 2: a plain odor of magnolias floating over the house. So
• 2:34:49
  Speaker 2: strong was the impression that many insisted that the management
• 2:34:53
  Speaker 2: had actually introduced the olor in order to heighten the effect,
• 2:34:58
  Speaker 2: But inquiry showed this to be erroneous, for no odor
• 2:35:02
  Speaker 2: was actually used. More recently, I attended a play The
• 2:35:09
  Speaker 2: Girl with the Green Eyes, in which one of the
• 2:35:12
  Speaker 2: characters was supposed to have committed suicide by turning on
• 2:35:16
  Speaker 2: the gas in full sight of the audience. The room
• 2:35:21
  Speaker 2: was large, and jet after jet of the many chandeliers,
• 2:35:25
  Speaker 2: bracket lights, et cetera. Were turned on by the woman.
• 2:35:31
  Speaker 2: In a short time, people and the audience began to
• 2:35:34
  Speaker 2: sniff and say smell the gas, until everyone thought they
• 2:35:40
  Speaker 2: smelt it, and some women felt faint. Of course, the
• 2:35:45
  Speaker 2: original impression was given by the physical suggestion, but as
• 2:35:50
  Speaker 2: soon as people took on the impression, it spread like
• 2:35:53
  Speaker 2: a contagion by the law of mental induction, until all
• 2:35:58
  Speaker 2: felt it more or less the Professor's experiments, There are
• 2:36:06
  Speaker 2: cases recorded of the effect being deliberately produced. For instance,
• 2:36:11
  Speaker 2: the tale of the old German professor, who, after telling
• 2:36:14
  Speaker 2: his class that he would uncork a bottle containing a
• 2:36:18
  Speaker 2: chemical compound noted for its foul odor, uncorked a bottle
• 2:36:23
  Speaker 2: of the stilled waller, possessing no odor at all. The
• 2:36:27
  Speaker 2: class soon perceived the supposed odor, and row after row
• 2:36:32
  Speaker 2: of students showed their disgust. The waves of the supposed
• 2:36:36
  Speaker 2: vapor floated over the room, just as would have been
• 2:36:41
  Speaker 2: the case if the genuine liquid had been uncorked. Those
• 2:36:45
  Speaker 2: nearest the platform perceiving it first, and then the next row,
• 2:36:49
  Speaker 2: and so on, until the whole room was filled with it.
• 2:36:53
  Speaker 2: Even after the professor explained the nature of the experiments,
• 2:36:57
  Speaker 2: the class still sniffed away, and many refused to believe
• 2:37:01
  Speaker 2: the explanation, so strong was the impression these cases were
• 2:37:07
  Speaker 2: nothing else than instances of induced sensation of smell. Along
• 2:37:11
  Speaker 2: the lines of mental impression induced sight, A sense of
• 2:37:19
  Speaker 2: sight may be induced in the same way. A common
• 2:37:23
  Speaker 2: experiment with a very impressionable person is as follows. Tell
• 2:37:27
  Speaker 2: him to extend his hand palm down, then mark a
• 2:37:32
  Speaker 2: cross on the back of his hand with their forefinger
• 2:37:35
  Speaker 2: pressing well into the skin, at the same time saying, see,
• 2:37:41
  Speaker 2: I have marked a black cross on your hand. On
• 2:37:44
  Speaker 2: your hand, a black cross. See it there you see
• 2:37:49
  Speaker 2: it there now, black black, a black cross. You see
• 2:37:56
  Speaker 2: it there, don't you, et cetera. And if he be
• 2:38:00
  Speaker 2: sufficiently impressionable, he will see it. The more that you
• 2:38:04
  Speaker 2: can imagine the black cross there, the stronger will be
• 2:38:08
  Speaker 2: his impression of it. If you will call the attention
• 2:38:11
  Speaker 2: of people to the extraordinary blueness of the sky, they
• 2:38:15
  Speaker 2: will be very apt to acquiesce, some of them going
• 2:38:19
  Speaker 2: into raptures over it, although the sky is no bluer
• 2:38:23
  Speaker 2: than at any other time. It is astonishing how many
• 2:38:28
  Speaker 2: of these impressions are given and taken in every day life.
• 2:38:33
  Speaker 2: Someone thinks the room is very close, and immediately many
• 2:38:38
  Speaker 2: people begin to feel suffocated and to wish the windows raised.
• 2:38:43
  Speaker 2: Someone suggests a draft, and people begin to shiver. Someone
• 2:38:48
  Speaker 2: remarks how extremely warm the day is, and people begin
• 2:38:52
  Speaker 2: to mop their foreheads, and so on, all being bits
• 2:38:57
  Speaker 2: from the same piece induced hearing. The sense of hearing
• 2:39:04
  Speaker 2: may be induced in the same way. Tell your impressionable
• 2:39:09
  Speaker 2: that he hears the song of a bird or the
• 2:39:11
  Speaker 2: whistle of a locomotive at the same time, using your
• 2:39:15
  Speaker 2: own imagination vigorously and giving the suggestions sufficiently vividly, and
• 2:39:22
  Speaker 2: he will hear the sounds mentioned. You may try this
• 2:39:26
  Speaker 2: on several people in a room on an ordinary occasion
• 2:39:30
  Speaker 2: by pretending to hear the humming of a bee, or
• 2:39:33
  Speaker 2: a distant whistle, or some other faint sound such as
• 2:39:37
  Speaker 2: the distant will of a child, and a certain percentage
• 2:39:40
  Speaker 2: of those present, after a moment or two of intent listening,
• 2:39:45
  Speaker 2: will affirm that they heard the sound. Induced taste, the
• 2:39:52
  Speaker 2: sense of taste is easily induced. The well known experiment
• 2:39:56
  Speaker 2: of suggesting the taste of lemons with the accompany flow
• 2:40:00
  Speaker 2: of saliva and taste of acid is a good example.
• 2:40:05
  Speaker 2: With a good impressionable you may induce a sense of
• 2:40:09
  Speaker 2: changing tastes from extreme sweetness to extreme acidity in a
• 2:40:14
  Speaker 2: simple tasteless glass of water. It all depends upon the
• 2:40:19
  Speaker 2: degree of impressionability of the person's tested and the strength
• 2:40:23
  Speaker 2: of your own imagination and suggestion. It is all a
• 2:40:28
  Speaker 2: question of induced sensation. The professional hypnotist turns this to
• 2:40:34
  Speaker 2: good account in his entertainment personal experiments. In this connection,
• 2:40:42
  Speaker 2: I would say that several years ago, when I was
• 2:40:44
  Speaker 2: devoting much time to experimental work, I cured many cases
• 2:40:48
  Speaker 2: of tobacco chewing, cigarette habit, et cetera. By a course
• 2:40:52
  Speaker 2: of vivid suggestion accompanied by visualization manifesting as mental induction.
• 2:41:00
  Speaker 2: I would create a mental image of the tobacco or
• 2:41:03
  Speaker 2: cigarettes as having a disgusting taste, a taste that produced
• 2:41:08
  Speaker 2: a feeling akin to nausea, and then would concentrate my
• 2:41:12
  Speaker 2: mind and feeling upon the other person, giving him, at
• 2:41:16
  Speaker 2: the same time the most vivid suggestions of disgusting, nauseating,
• 2:41:22
  Speaker 2: sickening taste, et cetera, et cetera, et cetera, until he
• 2:41:28
  Speaker 2: would be unable to chew the tobacco or smoke the cigarette.
• 2:41:34
  Speaker 2: Then by following up the matter by giving him the
• 2:41:37
  Speaker 2: strongest future impression that he would always remember the sensation
• 2:41:42
  Speaker 2: of disgusting taste whenever he attempted to chew or smoke,
• 2:41:46
  Speaker 2: and that the tobacco or cigarette would always induce those
• 2:41:50
  Speaker 2: feelings in him. A cure of the habit would be
• 2:41:53
  Speaker 2: affected sleep condition not necessary. Some practitioners of suggestive therapeutics
• 2:42:03
  Speaker 2: have met with much success and the treatment of undesirable
• 2:42:07
  Speaker 2: habits in this way. It is true that many of
• 2:42:11
  Speaker 2: these practitioners have believed that it was necessary to produce
• 2:42:15
  Speaker 2: the hypnotic sleep in order to get the results, but
• 2:42:20
  Speaker 2: this is simply because they themselves are self hypnotized with
• 2:42:23
  Speaker 2: the sleep delusion. And if they would but throw off
• 2:42:27
  Speaker 2: their spell and begin to experiments along the other lines,
• 2:42:33
  Speaker 2: they would see that the same results could be obtained
• 2:42:36
  Speaker 2: without the slightest attempt to produce sleep senses inhibited. Just
• 2:42:43
  Speaker 2: as the senses may be rendered by induction, so may
• 2:42:46
  Speaker 2: they be inhibited in the same way. Any of the
• 2:42:50
  Speaker 2: above experiments with the senses may be reversed. At will,
• 2:42:56
  Speaker 2: tell your impersonable that he cannot hear a certain sound,
• 2:43:00
  Speaker 2: smell a certain odor, taste a certain taste, feel a
• 2:43:06
  Speaker 2: certain sensation, see a certain thing, And if you be
• 2:43:10
  Speaker 2: sufficiently positive, and tea sufficiently impressionable, and if you use
• 2:43:16
  Speaker 2: your imagination and suggestion sufficiently well, the senses will be
• 2:43:21
  Speaker 2: inhibited in his mind for the time being. Remarkable instances
• 2:43:30
  Speaker 2: in the matter of inhibition of the sense of feeling,
• 2:43:33
  Speaker 2: some most remarkable results may be obtained. In fact, all
• 2:43:38
  Speaker 2: of the results along this line secured by the hypnotists
• 2:43:42
  Speaker 2: with the aid of the deep sleep may be obtained
• 2:43:45
  Speaker 2: without attempt at sleep. I have seen minor operations performed
• 2:43:51
  Speaker 2: under the influence of induced inhibition of the sense of
• 2:43:54
  Speaker 2: feeling I have seen teeth extracted with little or no pain.
• 2:43:59
  Speaker 2: In this way, I have seen nervous patients unusually sensitive
• 2:44:05
  Speaker 2: to pain, able to stand dental work with practically no
• 2:44:09
  Speaker 2: discomfort by means of such inhibition of the sense of feeling.
• 2:44:15
  Speaker 2: Even the brutal experiments of many of the stage hypnotists
• 2:44:19
  Speaker 2: who run needles through hypnotized patient's cheeks without causing pain,
• 2:44:25
  Speaker 2: even these can be duplicated without sleep being induced. Although
• 2:44:31
  Speaker 2: I consider such exhibitions deplorable and disgusting and worthy of
• 2:44:36
  Speaker 2: the severe condemnation, I merely mention these last to show
• 2:44:42
  Speaker 2: the power of induced feeling or inhibition of the same
• 2:44:46
  Speaker 2: by induction. The secret of inhibition, the secret of the
• 2:44:54
  Speaker 2: inhibition of the senses, is that the will is directed
• 2:44:58
  Speaker 2: to shutting off the attention to the part or organ.
• 2:45:03
  Speaker 2: If the attention can be removed or shut off, no
• 2:45:07
  Speaker 2: pain will be felt. Many persons have practiced on themselves
• 2:45:12
  Speaker 2: until they can inhibit pain in portance of their body,
• 2:45:17
  Speaker 2: and in inducing the effect in another person. The same
• 2:45:21
  Speaker 2: methods are used accompanied by suggestion mental anesthesia. It may
• 2:45:29
  Speaker 2: be of interest to many students to have me make
• 2:45:32
  Speaker 2: a little more detailed reference to this subject. Of anesthesia
• 2:45:36
  Speaker 2: by mental induction. Anesthesia, you know, is on entire or
• 2:45:43
  Speaker 2: partial laws or absence of feeling or sensation. We generally
• 2:45:49
  Speaker 2: think of this condition as being brought about only by
• 2:45:53
  Speaker 2: something like ether, gas, et cetera. But anything that will
• 2:45:58
  Speaker 2: tend to inhibit sensation is an anesthetic. The word inhibit,
• 2:46:04
  Speaker 2: you know, means to check, to hold back, to restrain,
• 2:46:09
  Speaker 2: et cetera. And pain and sensation may be inhibited by
• 2:46:14
  Speaker 2: pure mental impression Historical instances History is full of instances
• 2:46:23
  Speaker 2: of inhibition of pain by strong mental feeling, emotion, ecstasy,
• 2:46:29
  Speaker 2: et cetera. Religious fanatics have mutilated themselves barbarously without the
• 2:46:35
  Speaker 2: feeling of pain. The American Indians in their wild dances
• 2:46:40
  Speaker 2: wound themselves without feeling the pain. In India, the fanatical
• 2:46:46
  Speaker 2: deviltees torture themselves in horrible ways as a religious right
• 2:46:52
  Speaker 2: and seem entirely callous to pain. People have been burned
• 2:46:57
  Speaker 2: at the stake chanting joyful songs, and martyrs have been
• 2:47:01
  Speaker 2: crunched in the jaws of the wild beasts with laughter
• 2:47:04
  Speaker 2: and joy fully manifest. All of these instances, and many
• 2:47:10
  Speaker 2: others of the same kind, show that it is possible
• 2:47:14
  Speaker 2: for the mind of a person to inhibit pain in himself,
• 2:47:18
  Speaker 2: and the inhibition of pain in a person by another
• 2:47:22
  Speaker 2: person is merely a calling into play of the same
• 2:47:26
  Speaker 2: power by means of induction and suggestion. It is not
• 2:47:32
  Speaker 2: a creation of the power in the person, but merely
• 2:47:36
  Speaker 2: a calling forth that which is already there how to
• 2:47:41
  Speaker 2: inhibit pain in another. The following, simple but very effective
• 2:47:46
  Speaker 2: method is that used in the best psychological laboratories. The
• 2:47:52
  Speaker 2: impressionable is comfortably seated or placed in a reclining position
• 2:47:57
  Speaker 2: before the experimenter. Let us suppose that it is wished
• 2:48:02
  Speaker 2: to inhibit sensation in his arm. In that case, the
• 2:48:08
  Speaker 2: experimenter will begin to stroke the arm upward from finger
• 2:48:12
  Speaker 2: tips to shoulder. The effect of this stroking is to
• 2:48:16
  Speaker 2: restrain the circulation, which latter responds readily to such suggestion,
• 2:48:23
  Speaker 2: As we shall see a little later on, The experimenter says,
• 2:48:28
  Speaker 2: now I am taking the circulation away from your arm
• 2:48:32
  Speaker 2: and putting the nerves to rest. You will begin to
• 2:48:36
  Speaker 2: feel a sensation of coolness and numbness coming over your
• 2:48:40
  Speaker 2: arm from finger tips to shoulder. Now you feel it.
• 2:48:47
  Speaker 2: Your arm is getting numb. Numb, I say, quite numb,
• 2:48:53
  Speaker 2: getting numb, getting numb, getting numb, numb, numb, numb. It
• 2:49:00
  Speaker 2: is now quite numb. You cannot feel pain in it. See,
• 2:49:06
  Speaker 2: I will prick it with this needle, but you will
• 2:49:09
  Speaker 2: not feel pain. You can feel the touch, but cannot
• 2:49:14
  Speaker 2: feel any pain, and so on until complete inhibition is affected.
• 2:49:21
  Speaker 2: When you first prick with the point of the needle,
• 2:49:24
  Speaker 2: do so but gently, although appearing to do it with force.
• 2:49:30
  Speaker 2: This will reassure the patient and will make him relax.
• 2:49:34
  Speaker 2: His resisting will the more result of repetition. The above process,
• 2:49:42
  Speaker 2: continued in the right person and in the proper manner,
• 2:49:46
  Speaker 2: will produce wonderful results. In fact, in this way is
• 2:49:51
  Speaker 2: the inhibition of sensation produced in order that minor operations
• 2:49:56
  Speaker 2: may be performed without the use of either et cetera.
• 2:50:01
  Speaker 2: A little practice for several days renders the effect more
• 2:50:05
  Speaker 2: marked each time, until the desired degree is obtained. The
• 2:50:11
  Speaker 2: above method is the most simple and yet the most
• 2:50:14
  Speaker 2: effective known to experimental psychologists, and if persisted in and
• 2:50:20
  Speaker 2: performed intelligently, is capable of wonderful development. It should be
• 2:50:28
  Speaker 2: unnecessary for me to add that the experimenter should keep
• 2:50:32
  Speaker 2: before his own mind vividly the condition he wishes to
• 2:50:36
  Speaker 2: produce in the patient. He should endeavor to actually see
• 2:50:41
  Speaker 2: him insensible to pain, and should throw his whole belief
• 2:50:46
  Speaker 2: and earnestness into the suggestions. More than lip service is necessary.
• 2:50:54
  Speaker 2: Directing the circulation in connection with the above experiments following
• 2:51:00
  Speaker 2: is interesting. You may take an impressionable person and increase
• 2:51:05
  Speaker 2: the circulation in any part of the body or else
• 2:51:10
  Speaker 2: inhibit a partially just as you wish. You may prove
• 2:51:15
  Speaker 2: this by ordering the circulation back in one arm and
• 2:51:19
  Speaker 2: increasing it in another, the result being that one hand
• 2:51:23
  Speaker 2: will be a ghastly white and the other a deep
• 2:51:27
  Speaker 2: red color. Blood may be drawn away from the head
• 2:51:31
  Speaker 2: in this manner, and headaches thereby relieved. But I must
• 2:51:37
  Speaker 2: stop this, for I am encroaching upon the subject of
• 2:51:41
  Speaker 2: mental therapeutics. In this direction of the circulation upward or downward,
• 2:51:47
  Speaker 2: as the case may be, passes of the hands will
• 2:51:51
  Speaker 2: prove of great assistance, for this motion is followed by
• 2:51:55
  Speaker 2: the attention, And an axiom and suggestive therapeutic is that
• 2:52:01
  Speaker 2: the circulation follows the attention. Downward passes increase the circulation
• 2:52:07
  Speaker 2: to the limbs. Upward ones inhibit it. I have spoken
• 2:52:14
  Speaker 2: of the above effects being produced upon the impressionables. I
• 2:52:19
  Speaker 2: mean by this that such people are the more readily affected.
• 2:52:25
  Speaker 2: But remember this that even the strongest willed man or
• 2:52:29
  Speaker 2: woman may be affected in this manner if he or she,
• 2:52:33
  Speaker 2: by directing this, will actually co operate in the matter.
• 2:52:38
  Speaker 2: For instance, the very strength of a man's will may
• 2:52:42
  Speaker 2: aid in the inhibition of pain by suggestion, because he
• 2:52:46
  Speaker 2: will be cooperating with the suggest All the effect comes
• 2:52:51
  Speaker 2: from the power within in any case, and all the experimenter,
• 2:52:56
  Speaker 2: a suggester does is to call that power into effect.
• 2:53:01
  Speaker 2: It is akin to driving a team of strong horses,
• 2:53:05
  Speaker 2: or the running of a one thousand horse power engine.
• 2:53:09
  Speaker 2: The power is not in the driver or engineer, but
• 2:53:13
  Speaker 2: they make the thing go. Nevertheless, in closing this chapter,
• 2:53:20
  Speaker 2: let me again impress upon the experimenter the importance of
• 2:53:23
  Speaker 2: always removing the impression after the experiment. Remember the important
• 2:53:29
  Speaker 2: final Now you're all right, all right, now, all right,
• 2:53:36
  Speaker 2: the phenomena of induced imagination. I will now lead you
• 2:53:42
  Speaker 2: to a consideration of a class of experiments more marked
• 2:53:46
  Speaker 2: and sensational features than those related in the previous two chapters.
• 2:53:52
  Speaker 2: These experiments are the ones usually alluded to as the
• 2:53:56
  Speaker 2: higher hypnotic phenomena, although they are as distinct from the
• 2:54:01
  Speaker 2: hypnotic or sleep condition as the ones already considered. Any
• 2:54:08
  Speaker 2: and all forms of the hypnotic phenomena may be produced
• 2:54:12
  Speaker 2: without resorting to the methods of the hypnotists. So far
• 2:54:15
  Speaker 2: as producing the sleep condition is concerned. I call this
• 2:54:20
  Speaker 2: class of phenomena induced imagination. What imagination is? The term imagination,
• 2:54:31
  Speaker 2: you know, means the power of the mind to create
• 2:54:35
  Speaker 2: mental images of objects of sense, the power to reconstruct
• 2:54:40
  Speaker 2: or recombine the materials furnished by experience, memory, or fancy,
• 2:54:46
  Speaker 2: a mental image formed by the faculty of imagination, et cetera,
• 2:54:51
  Speaker 2: et cetera. The word is derived from the English word image,
• 2:54:57
  Speaker 2: which in turn has for its root the Latin word immatari,
• 2:55:02
  Speaker 2: meaning to imitate, imagination and fancy. The imagination is creative
• 2:55:11
  Speaker 2: in its nature and works with the plastic material of
• 2:55:15
  Speaker 2: the mind. The writers usually make a distinction between what
• 2:55:19
  Speaker 2: is called imagination proper on the one hand, and what
• 2:55:24
  Speaker 2: is called fancy on the other. By imagination proper is
• 2:55:29
  Speaker 2: meant the higher forms of activity of the image creating faculty,
• 2:55:34
  Speaker 2: such as is manifested in the creation of literature, art, music,
• 2:55:40
  Speaker 2: philosophical theory, scientific hypothesis, et cetera. By fancy is meant
• 2:55:47
  Speaker 2: the lither forms of the manifestation of the image creating faculty,
• 2:55:52
  Speaker 2: such as the ideal fancies and day dreams of people,
• 2:55:56
  Speaker 2: the arbortruary and capricious imaginings fantasy, et cetera. Imagination proper
• 2:56:04
  Speaker 2: may be considered as a positive phase and fancy as
• 2:56:08
  Speaker 2: the negative phase of the image creating faculty. Positive imagination imagination,
• 2:56:18
  Speaker 2: in its positive phase is a most important faculty of
• 2:56:21
  Speaker 2: the human being. It lies at the basis of active
• 2:56:26
  Speaker 2: mental manifestation. One must form a mental image of a
• 2:56:30
  Speaker 2: thing before he can manifest it in objective form. It
• 2:56:36
  Speaker 2: is distinctly creative in its nature and really forms the
• 2:56:40
  Speaker 2: mold in which deeds and actions are cast. It forms
• 2:56:45
  Speaker 2: the architect's plan which we use to build our life
• 2:56:49
  Speaker 2: of actions and deeds and mind you this it is
• 2:56:55
  Speaker 2: the faculty used in the occult practice known as visualization,
• 2:57:00
  Speaker 2: which is spoken of in my work on mental magic.
• 2:57:05
  Speaker 2: Positive imagination is very far from being the fanciful, capricious, light,
• 2:57:11
  Speaker 2: whimsical thing that many suppose it to be. It is
• 2:57:16
  Speaker 2: one of the most positive manifestations of the mind, not
• 2:57:21
  Speaker 2: only does it proceed and is necessary to the performance
• 2:57:26
  Speaker 2: of objective acts and the producing of material things. But
• 2:57:31
  Speaker 2: it is also the faculty by which we impress our
• 2:57:34
  Speaker 2: mental images upon the minds of others, by menative induction
• 2:57:40
  Speaker 2: and by the use of desire and will. Positive imagination
• 2:57:44
  Speaker 2: is the mother of ideas, and idea is but an
• 2:57:50
  Speaker 2: image formed in the mind Webster, and the imagination is
• 2:57:56
  Speaker 2: the faculty in which the image or I do idea
• 2:58:00
  Speaker 2: is formed. And in proportion to the activity of the imagination,
• 2:58:06
  Speaker 2: so is the strength of the image or idea. And
• 2:58:11
  Speaker 2: as is the strength of the image or idea, so
• 2:58:14
  Speaker 2: is the degree of its power to impress itself upon
• 2:58:18
  Speaker 2: the minds of others. So you see, imagination in its
• 2:58:23
  Speaker 2: positive phase is a strong real thing. But it is
• 2:58:28
  Speaker 2: largely with its negative phase that we shall have to
• 2:58:32
  Speaker 2: do with here the nature of mesmeric control. All of
• 2:58:39
  Speaker 2: you who have witnessed an exhibition of mesmerism or hypnotism,
• 2:58:45
  Speaker 2: or else read descriptions of the same, have doubtless marveled
• 2:58:50
  Speaker 2: at the phenomenon of the subject performing all sorts of
• 2:58:54
  Speaker 2: ridiculous and peculiar actions under the direction of the hypnotist.
• 2:59:01
  Speaker 2: There have been many theories advanced to account for this phenomenon,
• 2:59:06
  Speaker 2: some of them very complicated and labored. But I have
• 2:59:11
  Speaker 2: discarded theory after theory of this kind, finding them inadequate
• 2:59:16
  Speaker 2: to explain the mental processes involved, much less the underlying principle.
• 2:59:23
  Speaker 2: I have come to a conclusion, arising from my own
• 2:59:26
  Speaker 2: investigation and experiments, which I shall give you here. This theory,
• 2:59:33
  Speaker 2: or explanation for it is scarcely a theory, does not
• 2:59:38
  Speaker 2: attempt to go into the what is mind? Question, nor
• 2:59:44
  Speaker 2: does it attempt to divide or subdivide the mind. It
• 2:59:48
  Speaker 2: merely explains the workings of the mind in this class
• 2:59:52
  Speaker 2: of phenomena. An explanation the explanation just mentioned is as follows.
• 3:00:02
  Speaker 2: I hold that the action of the hypnotic subject may
• 3:00:06
  Speaker 2: be explained upon the hypothesis that his negative imagination or fancy,
• 3:00:11
  Speaker 2: if you prefer to call it such, is acted upon
• 3:00:15
  Speaker 2: by the suggestions and menative currents of the operator, and
• 3:00:20
  Speaker 2: an induced state of negative imagination is set up. That
• 3:00:26
  Speaker 2: is to say that, in hypnotic phenomena, instead of the
• 3:00:30
  Speaker 2: subject's negative imagination being aroused by his own desire or will,
• 3:00:36
  Speaker 2: or other planes of his mentality, such condition is aroused
• 3:00:41
  Speaker 2: by menative induction caused by the menative currents of the operator,
• 3:00:47
  Speaker 2: and aided by suggestion. Let us see whether this is
• 3:00:52
  Speaker 2: reasonable induced imagination. All of you know that your negative
• 3:01:00
  Speaker 2: imagination may be aroused by outward persons or things. You
• 3:01:06
  Speaker 2: hear a piece of music, and before you know it,
• 3:01:09
  Speaker 2: your fancy is running along paintings, all the sorts of
• 3:01:12
  Speaker 2: pictures in your mind, and inducing all sorts of feelings.
• 3:01:18
  Speaker 2: A picture may affect you in the same way A
• 3:01:21
  Speaker 2: piece of poetry or poem may lift you out of
• 3:01:24
  Speaker 2: yourself on the wings of fancy. A book may carry
• 3:01:29
  Speaker 2: you along in a world of fantasy and unreality until
• 3:01:34
  Speaker 2: you forget the actual world around you. Have you not
• 3:01:38
  Speaker 2: had this experience? And more marked than any of the
• 3:01:44
  Speaker 2: above mentioned cases, is the effect of a perfect stage performance,
• 3:01:49
  Speaker 2: in which the world and characters of the play take
• 3:01:52
  Speaker 2: such a hold upon you as the same reality itself,
• 3:01:56
  Speaker 2: and you laugh and cry with the characters in the play.
• 3:02:01
  Speaker 2: You scowl let the villain and tremble at the danger
• 3:02:05
  Speaker 2: of the heroine, You glory in the hero's success and
• 3:02:10
  Speaker 2: shed tears at the sorrows and trials of the suffering characters.
• 3:02:16
  Speaker 2: And you feel these things in proportion that your negative
• 3:02:19
  Speaker 2: imagination or fancy is caused into activity by induction. But
• 3:02:26
  Speaker 2: remember this, The actor's poets, writer, composer, or artist created
• 3:02:34
  Speaker 2: his effect by the exercise of his or her positive imagination,
• 3:02:40
  Speaker 2: while the effect upon you is induced in your negative imagination.
• 3:02:47
  Speaker 2: The first is an act of positive creation, while the
• 3:02:50
  Speaker 2: second is merely a reflection impressed upon your mind by
• 3:02:55
  Speaker 2: either the suggestion or the manative energy of the actor.
• 3:03:01
  Speaker 2: In your consideration of the above, remember what I have
• 3:03:05
  Speaker 2: said about suggestion in an earlier chapter. Suggestion is merely
• 3:03:11
  Speaker 2: the presentation of the outward symbol of the inner feeling.
• 3:03:17
  Speaker 2: The mistake of the suggestionists, the radical school of suggestionists
• 3:03:23
  Speaker 2: pooh pooh at the idea of menative energy having anything
• 3:03:28
  Speaker 2: to do with the phenomena which we are now considering.
• 3:03:33
  Speaker 2: They claim that suggestion is sufficient to account for it all.
• 3:03:39
  Speaker 2: Without going deeply into a discussion of this matter, I
• 3:03:42
  Speaker 2: would ask these gentlemen, why is it that the same
• 3:03:47
  Speaker 2: words uttered in the same tone by two different suggestors
• 3:03:53
  Speaker 2: produce widely different degrees of effect. Also, what is that
• 3:03:59
  Speaker 2: peculiar person force that we feel when certain persons suggest
• 3:04:04
  Speaker 2: that is absent? In the suggestions of others. My answer
• 3:04:10
  Speaker 2: is that the difference lies in the degree of feeling
• 3:04:13
  Speaker 2: called into activity in the mind of the suggest the
• 3:04:17
  Speaker 2: degree of mandative energy released by him. And I think
• 3:04:22
  Speaker 2: that any careful investigator will agree with me in this
• 3:04:27
  Speaker 2: if he will open his mind to all the impressions
• 3:04:30
  Speaker 2: received during his investigations instead of tying himself to a
• 3:04:35
  Speaker 2: previously conceived theory highly impressionable subject. Now Here is an
• 3:04:44
  Speaker 2: important feature of this manner of the phenomena which we
• 3:04:47
  Speaker 2: are considering. The investigator will find that while the conditions
• 3:04:53
  Speaker 2: mentioned in the two last chapters, the muscular and sense
• 3:04:57
  Speaker 2: induction respectively, may be produced in a large percentage of
• 3:05:02
  Speaker 2: the impressionables, still there are comparatively few of them in
• 3:05:06
  Speaker 2: which the more startling faces may be induced. Why is this.
• 3:05:13
  Speaker 2: The answer is that there are a certain number of
• 3:05:16
  Speaker 2: persons who combine within themselves the negative qualities of the impressionables,
• 3:05:22
  Speaker 2: combined with a highly developed faculty or fancy or negative imagination.
• 3:05:30
  Speaker 2: This combination causes the person possessing it to be an
• 3:05:34
  Speaker 2: ideal subject for these strange experiments. Referred to such a
• 3:05:39
  Speaker 2: person is what the French hypnotists call a somnambule or
• 3:05:44
  Speaker 2: hyper sensitive, by which terms I discard because of the
• 3:05:49
  Speaker 2: hypnotic association, and I substitute the term hyper impressionables. I
• 3:05:57
  Speaker 2: have explained the sense in which I use the term impressionable.
• 3:06:03
  Speaker 2: The word hyper is a prefect meaning over above, excessive
• 3:06:09
  Speaker 2: or abnormally great, etcetera. The term hyper impressionables, as I
• 3:06:15
  Speaker 2: shall use it, means an abnormally impressionable person. This excessive
• 3:06:23
  Speaker 2: or abnormally great impressionability, as I have said, arises from
• 3:06:28
  Speaker 2: the combination of a negative will with an excessive faculty
• 3:06:32
  Speaker 2: of fancy, the latter being a form of negative imagination. Remember,
• 3:06:39
  Speaker 2: so you see that the taint of negativity is all
• 3:06:43
  Speaker 2: over these persons, a psychological combination. In order to show
• 3:06:51
  Speaker 2: that I am correct in this classification, I will call
• 3:06:55
  Speaker 2: your attention to the fact that an ordinary impressionable, even
• 3:07:00
  Speaker 2: though his will power be the weakest, cannot be induced
• 3:07:04
  Speaker 2: to perform the tests of the hyper impressionable if his
• 3:07:08
  Speaker 2: faculty of fancy be not excessive. And on the other hand,
• 3:07:14
  Speaker 2: one may take a person of highly developed positive imagination.
• 3:07:19
  Speaker 2: And our great people in all lines are such, and
• 3:07:23
  Speaker 2: today are most difficult to influence in this way. In fact,
• 3:07:29
  Speaker 2: they are constantly affecting and influencing others. The strongest influencers
• 3:07:36
  Speaker 2: of men belong to this last mentioned class. So you see,
• 3:07:42
  Speaker 2: the ideal hyper impressionable may have the combination of negativity
• 3:07:47
  Speaker 2: and fancy. He is in the class all by himself.
• 3:07:53
  Speaker 2: Let us examine him the hyper impressionable. In the first place,
• 3:08:01
  Speaker 2: he is most credulous, superstitious, fanciful, bigoted, and unstable. He
• 3:08:08
  Speaker 2: is of the class whose fancy is easily aroused and induced,
• 3:08:13
  Speaker 2: and whose general tendency is toward giving airy nothings a
• 3:08:17
  Speaker 2: local habitation and a name, and to whom, when shown
• 3:08:22
  Speaker 2: an egg the next minute, the air is full of feathers.
• 3:08:28
  Speaker 2: He is also prone to imitation, and is inclined to
• 3:08:32
  Speaker 2: follow my leader rather than to strike out a new
• 3:08:36
  Speaker 2: path for himself. He has but little originality and initiative,
• 3:08:42
  Speaker 2: which are highly developed in the man of strong positive imagination.
• 3:08:48
  Speaker 2: He resembles the sheep and goose rather than the eagle
• 3:08:52
  Speaker 2: or lion. He is always dependent upon others for ideas, information, advice,
• 3:08:59
  Speaker 2: and often material support. His imagination is negative, that is,
• 3:09:06
  Speaker 2: has little or no original action, and acts only and
• 3:09:11
  Speaker 2: easily when induced or excited. By another's mentality or suggestion.
• 3:09:18
  Speaker 2: He has no executive ability and feels easier when he
• 3:09:23
  Speaker 2: has someone to order him around and tell him what
• 3:09:26
  Speaker 2: to do. He is a good copier, mimic and imitator,
• 3:09:32
  Speaker 2: and is often quite surfaceable in positions where the work
• 3:09:36
  Speaker 2: is mechanical and a good copier is needed. The mysterious
• 3:09:42
  Speaker 2: and unusual has a fascination for him, akin to the
• 3:09:46
  Speaker 2: fascination exerted over some birds by a waving pit of
• 3:09:50
  Speaker 2: colored cloth. He is governed by his emotions rather than
• 3:09:55
  Speaker 2: his reason. He is excessively fanciful and imagine that as
• 3:10:01
  Speaker 2: the term is generally used, and has a decided hysterical
• 3:10:05
  Speaker 2: tendency and a disposition to see things and to feel strangely.
• 3:10:12
  Speaker 2: He has many strange experiences. He has bought a minimum
• 3:10:17
  Speaker 2: of self control and is apt to fly off readily.
• 3:10:24
  Speaker 2: He lacks voluntary attention and application, and his mind is
• 3:10:29
  Speaker 2: apt to go a wandering. The only time that he
• 3:10:33
  Speaker 2: can be kept study is when some positive individual controls
• 3:10:37
  Speaker 2: and superintends him. The excitable, emotional colored man who gets
• 3:10:44
  Speaker 2: religion at every camp meeting, only to backslide next week
• 3:10:49
  Speaker 2: is an illustration of one class of this type. He
• 3:10:54
  Speaker 2: takes on the mental states of those around him readily
• 3:10:58
  Speaker 2: and accepts readily a strong positive suggestion. These are some
• 3:11:05
  Speaker 2: of his characteristics, the earmarks. There are many of these
• 3:11:11
  Speaker 2: people in the world in high and low life, but
• 3:11:16
  Speaker 2: high or low there is a strong family resemblance in
• 3:11:19
  Speaker 2: their mental make up. The two great characteristics by which
• 3:11:24
  Speaker 2: they may be distinguished are, as stated, one a negative will,
• 3:11:31
  Speaker 2: and two an excessive faculty of fancy. These two combine
• 3:11:37
  Speaker 2: to manifest a highly marked example of negative imagination the
• 3:11:44
  Speaker 2: prize subjects of the hypnotists. Now, the reason that I
• 3:11:50
  Speaker 2: have gone into the matter of the nature and character
• 3:11:54
  Speaker 2: of the hyper impressionable people is this. It is from
• 3:11:59
  Speaker 2: the ranks of of these people that the subjects of
• 3:12:02
  Speaker 2: the hypnotists are recruited. If you understand the nature of
• 3:12:07
  Speaker 2: these people, you will understand how the phenomena are produced.
• 3:12:13
  Speaker 2: Of course, the majority of professional hypnotists deny this, and
• 3:12:18
  Speaker 2: make great claims that their subjects belong to a class
• 3:12:22
  Speaker 2: of people having peculiar qualities owing to ability to concentrate,
• 3:12:27
  Speaker 2: et cetera. But every one of them knows in his
• 3:12:32
  Speaker 2: heart that my above statement is true. Those who have
• 3:12:37
  Speaker 2: had the opportunity of personal acquaintance with these subjects. Know
• 3:12:42
  Speaker 2: that they all come under the above classification, with the
• 3:12:46
  Speaker 2: exception of those persons known as horses, the name which
• 3:12:51
  Speaker 2: the professional hypnotists give to people who travel around as
• 3:12:55
  Speaker 2: professional subjects and to play their parts just as any
• 3:12:59
  Speaker 2: other actor does. These horses are trained to go through
• 3:13:05
  Speaker 2: their parts and also to serve as bellwethers or leaders
• 3:13:10
  Speaker 2: of the flock of harper impressionables who are taken from
• 3:13:14
  Speaker 2: the audience. I know just what I am talking about
• 3:13:19
  Speaker 2: when I make this statement, notwithstanding the commonly accepted opinion
• 3:13:25
  Speaker 2: of the uninformed public to the effect that the prize
• 3:13:28
  Speaker 2: subjects are just the average run of folks. Now, let
• 3:13:34
  Speaker 2: us attend an imaginary public hypnomic performance in order to
• 3:13:40
  Speaker 2: form a clear understanding of the matter, an inquiry into
• 3:13:45
  Speaker 2: certain phenomena, and now for our public hypnotic performance. Take
• 3:13:53
  Speaker 2: your seats please the hypnotic performance, the audience is seated
• 3:14:02
  Speaker 2: and the hypnotist appears. He makes a nice little introductory
• 3:14:07
  Speaker 2: speech in which he gives the history of hypnotism and mesmerism.
• 3:14:13
  Speaker 2: He avoids the scientific side of the subject, except such
• 3:14:17
  Speaker 2: parts of it as served to arouse the interest of
• 3:14:21
  Speaker 2: the audience. He points out to the audience that the
• 3:14:26
  Speaker 2: commonly accepted opinion of the subjects being weak, willed, et cetera,
• 3:14:32
  Speaker 2: is erroneous, and that so far from this being the
• 3:14:36
  Speaker 2: fact no one accepts persons having will power and the
• 3:14:40
  Speaker 2: ability to concentrate may be hypnotized. He mentions the time
• 3:14:46
  Speaker 2: worn tale that idiots and insane people and very young
• 3:14:51
  Speaker 2: children are not amenable to hypnotic influence, and from these
• 3:14:57
  Speaker 2: things he draws the moral that the abel to be
• 3:15:00
  Speaker 2: hypnotized is an honor and a proof of one's strong mentality,
• 3:15:06
  Speaker 2: rather than otherwise. This, of course flatters the hyper impressionables,
• 3:15:13
  Speaker 2: who always flock to a public hypnotic performance, being drawn
• 3:15:19
  Speaker 2: there by their love of the curious and the fascination
• 3:15:23
  Speaker 2: that such exhibitions seem to have for these people. The
• 3:15:28
  Speaker 2: call for subjects, the hypnotist then calls for volunteer subjects.
• 3:15:36
  Speaker 2: The audience does not seem to be in a hurry
• 3:15:38
  Speaker 2: to respond, although some are found to be fidgeting in
• 3:15:42
  Speaker 2: their chairs, and a few almost rise from their seats
• 3:15:47
  Speaker 2: as if to go forward. The hypnotist encourages and commands,
• 3:15:53
  Speaker 2: come on, come on, now, write up this way come
• 3:15:57
  Speaker 2: right up, et cetera, and the inclination to come forward
• 3:16:02
  Speaker 2: grows stronger. Then a young man starts forward with a rush,
• 3:16:09
  Speaker 2: and then another from the other side of the house.
• 3:16:12
  Speaker 2: Then maybe a third or a fourth, and then comes
• 3:16:16
  Speaker 2: the grand rush. These first people to move forward are
• 3:16:20
  Speaker 2: usually the paid performers who travel with the hypnotists, and
• 3:16:25
  Speaker 2: their coming to the front starts up the impressionables and
• 3:16:28
  Speaker 2: hyper impressionables among the audience, and perhaps a few curiosity seekers.
• 3:16:37
  Speaker 2: These paid performers act as bellweathers for the flock of
• 3:16:40
  Speaker 2: human sheep, testing and selecting subjects. The volunteer subjects, including
• 3:16:50
  Speaker 2: the paid ones, are now grouped around the back of
• 3:16:53
  Speaker 2: the stage in a large semicircle, and then the hypnotist
• 3:16:58
  Speaker 2: proceeds to test them. He usually starts off by bidding
• 3:17:04
  Speaker 2: the semicircle gaze at their hands or upon some bright
• 3:17:07
  Speaker 2: object placed in their fingers. After they have quieted down
• 3:17:13
  Speaker 2: and have been rendered passive and attentive, he calls them
• 3:17:17
  Speaker 2: one by one to the front and gives them a
• 3:17:20
  Speaker 2: test for impressionability. He usually begins with the paid subjects,
• 3:17:26
  Speaker 2: for he knows just what they will do and to
• 3:17:30
  Speaker 2: their actions have a powerful impression on the others. Along
• 3:17:34
  Speaker 2: the lines of imitative suggestion. He usually tries the falling
• 3:17:40
  Speaker 2: backward and forward test, and perhaps the fastening of the
• 3:17:45
  Speaker 2: hands or some other simple muscular test. Those who respond
• 3:17:51
  Speaker 2: readily to these tests are accepted and instructed to sit
• 3:17:55
  Speaker 2: down again, while those who fail to respond are told
• 3:18:00
  Speaker 2: that they are not needed and resumed their places in
• 3:18:03
  Speaker 2: the audience. The hypnotist must have reasonably sure things to
• 3:18:09
  Speaker 2: work upon for his success upon producing a quick result,
• 3:18:14
  Speaker 2: and he cannot afford to devote the time to developing
• 3:18:18
  Speaker 2: subjects that the experimenter in the laboratory does. Finally, he
• 3:18:24
  Speaker 2: has weeded the goats from the sheep, the former being
• 3:18:28
  Speaker 2: retired to the audience, and the latter exalted to places
• 3:18:32
  Speaker 2: of honor on the stage, having successfully passed their initiation
• 3:18:37
  Speaker 2: and now being accepted subjects. The story of the paid
• 3:18:44
  Speaker 2: subjects now just a moment here About the paid subjects.
• 3:18:51
  Speaker 2: Some of them are genuine hyper impressionables who are fascinated
• 3:18:56
  Speaker 2: by the mysterious nature of the business and fathers by
• 3:19:00
  Speaker 2: the position of prominence given them in the performance, and
• 3:19:04
  Speaker 2: to travel around with the hypnotist on a small salary
• 3:19:08
  Speaker 2: and board paid the horses are different kinds of people.
• 3:19:14
  Speaker 2: They are out for the money alone and are generally
• 3:19:19
  Speaker 2: fakirs all the way through. They have trained themselves to
• 3:19:24
  Speaker 2: stand pain and to allow needles to be thrust through
• 3:19:27
  Speaker 2: their cheeks and similar rough treatment to be accorded them.
• 3:19:33
  Speaker 2: They learn to act out their parts with a surprising
• 3:19:36
  Speaker 2: degree of ability in some cases, and many of them
• 3:19:40
  Speaker 2: in time graduate into the cheaper grade of variety actors,
• 3:19:45
  Speaker 2: and a few mount even higher up and develop genuine
• 3:19:49
  Speaker 2: talent as actors. The majority of them, however, belonged to
• 3:19:56
  Speaker 2: the cigarette type of youth who is out for a
• 3:20:00
  Speaker 2: good time and who is glad to play his part
• 3:20:03
  Speaker 2: in the performance for his board traveling expenses, cigarette money,
• 3:20:09
  Speaker 2: a little loose change, and the cheap notoriety of public performance.
• 3:20:16
  Speaker 2: Some of the more expert of them demand and receive
• 3:20:19
  Speaker 2: larger salaries as they advance in the scale, and a
• 3:20:23
  Speaker 2: few star performers in the business receive quite good salaries
• 3:20:28
  Speaker 2: and to earn it too. These horses often display considerable
• 3:20:34
  Speaker 2: ability in the line of suggestion and really lead the
• 3:20:38
  Speaker 2: volunteer subjects through their acts, the latter obeying the line
• 3:20:43
  Speaker 2: of least resistance along the general lines of imitative suggestion.
• 3:20:50
  Speaker 2: These star performers among the horses are often just as
• 3:20:55
  Speaker 2: expert hypnotists as their employers, and consequently much of the
• 3:21:00
  Speaker 2: success of the entertainment is due to their efforts producing sleep.
• 3:21:10
  Speaker 2: The next stage of the performance is to induce sleep
• 3:21:13
  Speaker 2: in the subjects. This is done by first inducing fixation
• 3:21:19
  Speaker 2: of the eyelids along the lines of muscular control of
• 3:21:24
  Speaker 2: which I have spoken. Then suggestions of sleep are given
• 3:21:29
  Speaker 2: by the hypnotists, such as, you are getting drowsy, drowsy, drowsy,
• 3:21:37
  Speaker 2: your eyelids are heavy, heavy, heavy as lead, you are
• 3:21:43
  Speaker 2: falling asleep, falling asleep, et cetera. And soon the heads
• 3:21:49
  Speaker 2: of the horses and the hyper impressionables are nodding. The
• 3:21:55
  Speaker 2: impressionables who are not affected by the sleep suggestions are
• 3:22:00
  Speaker 2: sorted out and sent back to the audience, until there
• 3:22:04
  Speaker 2: is left only the horses and hyper impressionables, including the
• 3:22:09
  Speaker 2: paid performers among the latter, as well as those who
• 3:22:14
  Speaker 2: have volunteered. Then the hypnotist has obtained that what he
• 3:22:20
  Speaker 2: has tried for, he has a circle of hyper impressionables
• 3:22:25
  Speaker 2: and horses who will accept every suggestion that he may
• 3:22:28
  Speaker 2: give them, and be responsive to every demand upon their
• 3:22:33
  Speaker 2: negative imagination that he may induce in them the day
• 3:22:39
  Speaker 2: dream condition. But are they not really asleep, you may ask, No,
• 3:22:47
  Speaker 2: they are not asleep. Their condition is one of a
• 3:22:51
  Speaker 2: drowsy day dreamy state, such as many of us have
• 3:22:55
  Speaker 2: felt when lost in revere or absent mindedness. They have
• 3:23:01
  Speaker 2: had the feeling of drowsiness induced in them by the
• 3:23:05
  Speaker 2: suggestions and influence of the hypnotist, and have had their
• 3:23:10
  Speaker 2: negative imagination acted upon by him until they are in
• 3:23:14
  Speaker 2: a state of day's day dream. They know what is
• 3:23:19
  Speaker 2: going on about them and to realize the illusion which
• 3:23:22
  Speaker 2: they are acting out, but are so passive that their
• 3:23:26
  Speaker 2: imagination is partially beyond their own control and is induced
• 3:23:30
  Speaker 2: and managed by the hypnotist through his positive imagination and
• 3:23:35
  Speaker 2: his suggestions. It is a queer state. I have talked
• 3:23:40
  Speaker 2: with many of these people, and I think I have
• 3:23:43
  Speaker 2: measured the mental state existing in them. They are living
• 3:23:48
  Speaker 2: in two worlds. Their wills are passive, and the negative
• 3:23:53
  Speaker 2: imagination or fancy is most active and under the control
• 3:23:58
  Speaker 2: of the hypnotist. The playing bear explanation, an illustration that
• 3:24:07
  Speaker 2: I have used in some of my lectures on this subject,
• 3:24:10
  Speaker 2: may give you a clearer idea of the matter. It
• 3:24:15
  Speaker 2: is as follows. A party of children are playing bear.
• 3:24:20
  Speaker 2: One of them is the bear and goes growling, wagging
• 3:24:24
  Speaker 2: his head and showing his teeth in a ferocious manner.
• 3:24:29
  Speaker 2: The other children pretend to be frightened, but after a
• 3:24:32
  Speaker 2: bit they induced in themselves a feeling of real terror.
• 3:24:37
  Speaker 2: The assumed becomes almost real to them. Children have very
• 3:24:43
  Speaker 2: vivid negative imaginations and often suffer great torture by foolish
• 3:24:48
  Speaker 2: suggestions of Boogeyman, big bear, catch you, something will grab
• 3:24:54
  Speaker 2: you when you go upstairs, et cetera. An understanding of
• 3:25:00
  Speaker 2: suggestion which show the folly and criminality of such things.
• 3:25:06
  Speaker 2: The terror among the children grows more acute, and tears
• 3:25:10
  Speaker 2: mingle with laughter as they run from the bear. At last,
• 3:25:16
  Speaker 2: one of the youngest runs with a shriek to its
• 3:25:18
  Speaker 2: mother and buries its little face in her lap, crying out,
• 3:25:23
  Speaker 2: make him go away. Why that isn't a bear, Mary,
• 3:25:29
  Speaker 2: that's only Johnny dressed up like one, says the mother,
• 3:25:33
  Speaker 2: endeavoring to quite the little one. Yes, I know it is,
• 3:25:39
  Speaker 2: sobs little Mary, venturing a frightened glance behind her, But
• 3:25:44
  Speaker 2: I'm scared anyhow, Well, that is the condition of the
• 3:25:50
  Speaker 2: hyper impressionable, who is hypnotized. He knows it's only Johnny,
• 3:25:57
  Speaker 2: but he is scared anyhow. It is not all a
• 3:26:02
  Speaker 2: make believe, as some radical iconoclastic investigators have affirmed. It's
• 3:26:08
  Speaker 2: half real and half unreal. The hypnotized taper impressionable is
• 3:26:14
  Speaker 2: not a fakir or a willful deceiver. He is a
• 3:26:18
  Speaker 2: make believe whose illusion seems half real, or even more so,
• 3:26:24
  Speaker 2: although less than half in some cases, the degree of
• 3:26:27
  Speaker 2: reality varying with the degree of impressionability on the one hand,
• 3:26:33
  Speaker 2: and the vividness of the negative imagination on the other,
• 3:26:38
  Speaker 2: opposing views reconciled. I have gone into this matter of
• 3:26:44
  Speaker 2: the mental state of the genuine hypnotic subject rather fully
• 3:26:48
  Speaker 2: for the reason that the statements of the two schools
• 3:26:51
  Speaker 2: of investigators are diametrically opposed to each other on the subject.
• 3:26:57
  Speaker 2: The old school of mesmerists and hypnotists insists that the
• 3:27:02
  Speaker 2: subjects are in a true sleep condition and are absolutely
• 3:27:05
  Speaker 2: oblivious to all that goes around them outside of their
• 3:27:10
  Speaker 2: allusions that they are acting out dreams suggested to them.
• 3:27:16
  Speaker 2: The new school of suggestion, on the other hand, claims
• 3:27:20
  Speaker 2: that the subjects are wide awake as usual and merely
• 3:27:23
  Speaker 2: acquiesce in the suggestions made them, just as they would
• 3:27:28
  Speaker 2: in any other and are fully conscious of what they
• 3:27:32
  Speaker 2: are doing and are make believe all the way through,
• 3:27:36
  Speaker 2: from beginning to end. I think that my theory or
• 3:27:41
  Speaker 2: explanation will supply the reconciliation or missing link between these
• 3:27:47
  Speaker 2: two opposing views, and I believe that it will meet
• 3:27:51
  Speaker 2: with the approval of many, who, like myself, have had
• 3:27:55
  Speaker 2: the opportunity of examining these people and getting close to
• 3:27:59
  Speaker 2: the heart part of the matter. It is true that
• 3:28:03
  Speaker 2: many of these subjects will tell you that they were
• 3:28:06
  Speaker 2: totally unconscious of what they were doing, but that is
• 3:28:10
  Speaker 2: because in so doing they are carrying out the suggestions
• 3:28:14
  Speaker 2: expressed or implied of the hypnotist, who tells them that
• 3:28:19
  Speaker 2: they are hypnotized and know nothing else. A funny thing
• 3:28:25
  Speaker 2: about these subjects is that each one of them thinks
• 3:28:28
  Speaker 2: that he is the only one who was half awake,
• 3:28:32
  Speaker 2: and that all of his companions were completely under the influence.
• 3:28:38
  Speaker 2: Remember now, I am now talking of transconditions, which belong
• 3:28:43
  Speaker 2: to another phase on the subject. Nor am I talking
• 3:28:47
  Speaker 2: about the horses on the stage who are fakirs all
• 3:28:51
  Speaker 2: the way through, although contributing much to the interest and
• 3:28:55
  Speaker 2: action of the show, my description of the men of
• 3:29:00
  Speaker 2: the subject applies only to the genuine cases of hyper
• 3:29:04
  Speaker 2: impressionability in the day dream state the hypnotic show. I
• 3:29:12
  Speaker 2: shall not take up your time and space by describing
• 3:29:15
  Speaker 2: the many features of the public hypnotic performance, the barbershop scene,
• 3:29:20
  Speaker 2: the balloon trip, the baseball game, the hive of bees,
• 3:29:24
  Speaker 2: the school session, as the thousands of variations shown by
• 3:29:28
  Speaker 2: the many hypnotic exhibitors and performers, some of whom are
• 3:29:33
  Speaker 2: artists in their line and show a wonderful ability in
• 3:29:38
  Speaker 2: the direction of making their performances interesting and akin to
• 3:29:43
  Speaker 2: a vaudeville show. Nearly everyone who reads these lines has
• 3:29:49
  Speaker 2: seen a performance of this sort and will know to
• 3:29:52
  Speaker 2: what I refer. Their principle is the same in all
• 3:29:56
  Speaker 2: of these acts or performances. The horses and the hyper impressionables,
• 3:30:03
  Speaker 2: except the suggestions and the latter, are also impressed by
• 3:30:08
  Speaker 2: the hypnotist's positive imagination acting upon their negative imagination through
• 3:30:14
  Speaker 2: mental currents by induction. But even the most startling and
• 3:30:20
  Speaker 2: complicated experiments are but combinations of the experiments in induced
• 3:30:25
  Speaker 2: sensation mentioned in chapter nine of this book raised to
• 3:30:30
  Speaker 2: a superlative degree by means of induced imagination. The experiments
• 3:30:37
  Speaker 2: I have given you, and others of the same kind,
• 3:30:41
  Speaker 2: are the building blocks by which the mismatic structures are built.
• 3:30:46
  Speaker 2: The style, variety, decoration, and stability depending upon the art
• 3:30:51
  Speaker 2: of the operator or manager. There are many books on
• 3:30:56
  Speaker 2: stage hypnotism that instruct the performer in constructing effective scenes.
• 3:31:02
  Speaker 2: It is a matter of stage art rather than of
• 3:31:06
  Speaker 2: scientific knowledge. The successful hypnotist must be a man of
• 3:31:12
  Speaker 2: strong suggestive ability when able to focus his force in
• 3:31:17
  Speaker 2: his tones, and also of strong active, positive imagination, and
• 3:31:24
  Speaker 2: thus able to form a clear, vivid mental picture of
• 3:31:27
  Speaker 2: the scene he wishes to be enacted on the stage
• 3:31:30
  Speaker 2: before him. By forming this mental picture, and by using
• 3:31:35
  Speaker 2: his will to project and focus his menative energy upon
• 3:31:39
  Speaker 2: the subjects, he is able to induce in them the
• 3:31:43
  Speaker 2: feelings and daydreams desired. His success as an entertainer, of course,
• 3:31:50
  Speaker 2: requires ability as an originator of scenes et cetera, which
• 3:31:55
  Speaker 2: have nothing whatever to do with his ability as a hypnotist.
• 3:32:01
  Speaker 2: When both qualities are combined, the man comes to the
• 3:32:04
  Speaker 2: front as a financial success. While the above has dealt
• 3:32:10
  Speaker 2: solely with public performances of hypnotism. Still, the principles called
• 3:32:15
  Speaker 2: into play in the private psychological experimental work are the same.
• 3:32:22
  Speaker 2: In the latter, there is no audience to be entertained,
• 3:32:26
  Speaker 2: and much more time may be devoted to developing a
• 3:32:29
  Speaker 2: subject and producing interesting phenomena, and the horses are eliminated.
• 3:32:36
  Speaker 5: The dangers of psychism. In the preceding chapters, I have
• 3:32:41
  Speaker 5: gone into the subject of the rationale of mesmerism for
• 3:32:45
  Speaker 5: the purpose of pointing out to you that the phenomena
• 3:32:48
  Speaker 5: of mesmerism and hypnotism is not dependent upon sleep conditions,
• 3:32:54
  Speaker 5: but may be readily produced by mental fascination, pure and simple,
• 3:32:59
  Speaker 5: without any attempt to bring about the sleep which is
• 3:33:03
  Speaker 5: publicly associated with the phenomena. I have not only pointed
• 3:33:07
  Speaker 5: out the general principles underlying this subject, but have given
• 3:33:11
  Speaker 5: in detail the technique and methods whereby the phenomena may
• 3:33:14
  Speaker 5: be produced by any experimenter. The methods given therein are
• 3:33:19
  Speaker 5: the ones in constant use in the leading psychological experimental
• 3:33:23
  Speaker 5: laboratories of this and other countries, and the results mentioned
• 3:33:28
  Speaker 5: may be duplicated by any person who will put into
• 3:33:31
  Speaker 5: operation the principles mentioned why the information is imparted. But
• 3:33:37
  Speaker 5: I wish to state that my primary object in imparting
• 3:33:40
  Speaker 5: the said information was not that the students of the
• 3:33:44
  Speaker 5: book must necessarily undertake a series of psychological experiments, but
• 3:33:49
  Speaker 5: principally that they might understand the power and force of
• 3:33:54
  Speaker 5: the mental principle known as mental fascination, and see its
• 3:33:58
  Speaker 5: practical operation in all of its varied phases. I wish
• 3:34:03
  Speaker 5: them to know the experiments in the psychological laboratory, the
• 3:34:07
  Speaker 5: performance of the public mesmerist or hypnotist, and the use
• 3:34:11
  Speaker 5: of mental influence in business and every day life that
• 3:34:14
  Speaker 5: we see in operation around us on all sides and
• 3:34:18
  Speaker 5: at all times, or all phases of the same underlying principle.
• 3:34:22
  Speaker 5: I wish to show them the oneness in essence of
• 3:34:25
  Speaker 5: all these varying phases of operation of this great mental
• 3:34:29
  Speaker 5: principle certain phases mentioned. There is one phase of mesmeric
• 3:34:34
  Speaker 5: or hypnotic phenomena, however, that I have omitted.
• 3:34:39
  Speaker 6: I shall call your.
• 3:34:39
  Speaker 5: Attention to this briefly, that you may know that I
• 3:34:42
  Speaker 5: have not overlooked the same, and also that you may
• 3:34:45
  Speaker 5: recognize my reasons for not going into detail regarding this
• 3:34:50
  Speaker 5: class of phenomena.
• 3:34:51
  Speaker 6: I allude to the so called higher phases.
• 3:34:54
  Speaker 5: Of mesmeric or hypnotic phenomena, the various forms of the
• 3:34:57
  Speaker 5: trance condition. The abnormal conditions this trance phenomena, whether produced
• 3:35:05
  Speaker 5: by mesmeric processes or by other means, are abnormal, unhealthy,
• 3:35:10
  Speaker 5: and undesirable phases of mental condition. I cannot speak too
• 3:35:14
  Speaker 5: strongly against the encouragement of an instruction in the development.
• 3:35:19
  Speaker 5: I had almost said the devil openment of these abnormal states,
• 3:35:23
  Speaker 5: either by self practice or by means of hypnotic or
• 3:35:27
  Speaker 5: mesmeric practices. It is high time that someone should call
• 3:35:31
  Speaker 5: the attention of the public to the dangers of this.
• 3:35:33
  Speaker 6: So called psychism.
• 3:35:35
  Speaker 5: I know positively that this psychism is not the desirable
• 3:35:39
  Speaker 5: thing that it is supposed to be. I know also
• 3:35:42
  Speaker 5: that it is very far from true occult development. This psychism,
• 3:35:47
  Speaker 5: when compared with true occultism, is but as the baleful
• 3:35:51
  Speaker 5: glare of the moon, as contrasted with the bright, warm,
• 3:35:55
  Speaker 5: life giving.
• 3:35:56
  Speaker 6: Rays of the sun.
• 3:35:57
  Speaker 5: This false occultism, which is not of ocultism at all,
• 3:36:01
  Speaker 5: but as merely psychism, has deluded many into its fold
• 3:36:05
  Speaker 5: and has led its followers onto planes which are akin
• 3:36:09
  Speaker 5: to mental quagmires and swamps. Following the ignis fatuus or
• 3:36:13
  Speaker 5: will of the wisp of psychism, the antiquity of the practices.
• 3:36:20
  Speaker 5: Nearly all races of men have discovered that there are
• 3:36:22
  Speaker 5: means possible to people whereby they may produce in themselves
• 3:36:27
  Speaker 5: abnormal conditions known as the trance, and men from the
• 3:36:31
  Speaker 5: dim past to the present time have seen fit to
• 3:36:34
  Speaker 5: indulge in these deplorable practices. The means by which these
• 3:36:39
  Speaker 5: states are obtained are various, the favorite methods being the
• 3:36:43
  Speaker 5: gazing at a bright object, of fixing the gaze at
• 3:36:46
  Speaker 5: the root of the nose, staring at the umbilichis, staring
• 3:36:51
  Speaker 5: at a drop of ink, inhaling vapors, listening to weird music,
• 3:36:55
  Speaker 5: et cetera, et cetera. Much back occultism, which is really psychism,
• 3:37:01
  Speaker 5: depends upon these methods for its results, manifestations, and phenomena.
• 3:37:06
  Speaker 5: The Hindu Fakirs and the Arab dervishes indulge freely in
• 3:37:11
  Speaker 5: these methods and produce results which, while highly esteemed by themselves,
• 3:37:16
  Speaker 5: are viewed with discussed horror and repulsion by true occultis
• 3:37:21
  Speaker 5: of all lands, including of course, the real Hindu yogis,
• 3:37:25
  Speaker 5: the Persian sufis, both of which last mentioned bodies of
• 3:37:28
  Speaker 5: Oriental occultists regard these practices as harmful and the phenomena
• 3:37:33
  Speaker 5: resulting therefrom as bogus and misleading Western fallacies, and much
• 3:37:40
  Speaker 5: of the latter day Western psychism is also based upon
• 3:37:43
  Speaker 5: the same practices and brings about like results. In this connection,
• 3:37:48
  Speaker 5: I would say that some of the practices adopted by
• 3:37:50
  Speaker 5: some of the New thought people belong to this class.
• 3:37:55
  Speaker 5: I have seen methods advised for going into the silence,
• 3:37:59
  Speaker 5: in which the student is advised to focus his gaze
• 3:38:01
  Speaker 5: on the root of his nose, etc. Which is the
• 3:38:04
  Speaker 5: identical method used by Braid to produce hypnotic conditions, and
• 3:38:09
  Speaker 5: which is also used by the Hindu fakirs to produce
• 3:38:13
  Speaker 5: trance conditions. Is it not time that the truth regarding
• 3:38:17
  Speaker 5: these things should be known low states, not high conditions.
• 3:38:23
  Speaker 5: These self induced abnormal conditions may also be produced by
• 3:38:26
  Speaker 5: hypnotic methods by leading the subject into the deeper stages,
• 3:38:31
  Speaker 5: which some authority speak of as if they were highly spiritual,
• 3:38:35
  Speaker 5: but which are nothing more than the miserable, abnormal, deplorable
• 3:38:40
  Speaker 5: transconditions just referred to. These conditions may be produced by
• 3:38:44
  Speaker 5: hypnotic methods simply because any mental state may be so produced,
• 3:38:49
  Speaker 5: and not because of any mystic process or knowledge or connection.
• 3:38:55
  Speaker 5: Let us take another hasty glance at the so called
• 3:38:58
  Speaker 5: sleep conditions of hypnotism that we may get a clear
• 3:39:01
  Speaker 5: idea of the subject the sleep delusion. In the first place,
• 3:39:07
  Speaker 5: there is no real sleep condition.
• 3:39:10
  Speaker 6: Let us say why this is well.
• 3:39:13
  Speaker 5: To start from a beginning, much of the sleep does
• 3:39:16
  Speaker 5: not exist at all. In some cases, the subject merely
• 3:39:19
  Speaker 5: acquiesces in the suggestion that he is asleep, and then
• 3:39:23
  Speaker 5: he acts out the suggestion, just as he would act
• 3:39:26
  Speaker 5: out any suggestion. He plays out his part.
• 3:39:30
  Speaker 6: That's all.
• 3:39:31
  Speaker 5: This phase is far more common than the majority of
• 3:39:33
  Speaker 5: students of hypnotism.
• 3:39:35
  Speaker 6: Are aware of.
• 3:39:36
  Speaker 5: They hear the subject say that he was asleep and
• 3:39:39
  Speaker 5: did not remember a thing that was said to him
• 3:39:42
  Speaker 5: or what he did.
• 3:39:43
  Speaker 6: But all of this is merely.
• 3:39:45
  Speaker 5: In the line of acquiescence and playing the part, which
• 3:39:48
  Speaker 5: fact has been positively proven by advanced experimenters. But there
• 3:39:53
  Speaker 5: are other stages of sleep. The next in order is
• 3:39:56
  Speaker 5: the daydream stage, which I have described as the playing phase.
• 3:40:01
  Speaker 5: Even this is not true sleep, but a condition resembling
• 3:40:05
  Speaker 5: a day dream. It is in this stage that the
• 3:40:08
  Speaker 5: majority of instances of hypnotic phenomena are produced. Sometimes the
• 3:40:13
  Speaker 5: day dream becomes very deep, and the transcondition is almost reached,
• 3:40:18
  Speaker 5: but still it is not sleep.
• 3:40:20
  Speaker 6: As the word is generally used.
• 3:40:24
  Speaker 5: Hypnotic trances deplored. Next in order come the several stages
• 3:40:29
  Speaker 5: of the condition which hypnotists speak of as deep sleep conditions,
• 3:40:34
  Speaker 5: but which I state positively are nothing more or less
• 3:40:37
  Speaker 5: than the well known transconditions into which people of all
• 3:40:40
  Speaker 5: nations and times have plunged themselves by the methods before mentioned.
• 3:40:45
  Speaker 5: The only difference is that the operator induces the condition
• 3:40:49
  Speaker 5: by mental influence and suggestion, just as he would induce
• 3:40:52
  Speaker 5: any other mental state, instead of the subject inducing it
• 3:40:56
  Speaker 5: in himself. It is the same old, abnormal, harmful practice
• 3:41:01
  Speaker 5: in another guise, and anything that is said against the
• 3:41:04
  Speaker 5: self induced condition is equally applicable to the operator induced one.
• 3:41:10
  Speaker 5: They are the same thing, well meaning practices. I shall
• 3:41:17
  Speaker 5: not describe the conditions at further length, nor shall I
• 3:41:20
  Speaker 5: give any instruction in the production of them. I consider
• 3:41:24
  Speaker 5: them essentially harmful, and my object in speaking of them
• 3:41:27
  Speaker 5: here is to warn off and caution anyone from allowing
• 3:41:31
  Speaker 5: themselves to be placed in this condition by experimenters. The
• 3:41:36
  Speaker 5: practice is weakening to the will for the reason that
• 3:41:39
  Speaker 5: it depends upon tiring out the will by straining the
• 3:41:43
  Speaker 5: eyes or other organs of sense. Practitioners of mental influence
• 3:41:47
  Speaker 5: in all ages have recognized this fact and have employed
• 3:41:50
  Speaker 5: objects calculated to tire out the will. Bright objects to
• 3:41:54
  Speaker 5: stare at and thus tire out the sense of sight
• 3:41:57
  Speaker 5: have been employed. Monotonous sounds ending in.
• 3:42:02
  Speaker 6: Are used in.
• 3:42:03
  Speaker 5: The Orientals to tire out the sense of hearing by
• 3:42:07
  Speaker 5: its monotonous and soothing sound. Vapors and perfumes and incense
• 3:42:12
  Speaker 5: are used to overcome the sense of smell, all tending
• 3:42:16
  Speaker 5: to tire out the will and to reduce it to
• 3:42:19
  Speaker 5: a passive, non resisting stage. Then, when the will has
• 3:42:23
  Speaker 5: been rendered passive or tired, the mind becomes receptive and impressionable,
• 3:42:29
  Speaker 5: and in extreme cases becomes as wax in the hands
• 3:42:32
  Speaker 5: of the operator. Remember these things, students, and you will
• 3:42:36
  Speaker 5: see this principle called into operation many times in unexpected places.
• 3:42:42
  Speaker 5: Beware of the methods that tend to drug the will.
• 3:42:47
  Speaker 5: Psychism like a poisonous cobra. Let me urge upon you.
• 3:42:52
  Speaker 6: To avoid psychism. Put it away.
• 3:42:55
  Speaker 5: From you as you would a poisonous cobra, for it
• 3:42:58
  Speaker 5: seeks to strike at the heart of your will, and
• 3:43:00
  Speaker 5: would thus paralyze your mentality. Beware of all that tends
• 3:43:05
  Speaker 5: to make you weak. Beware of the claims of soul
• 3:43:08
  Speaker 5: development or spiritual unfoldment that are accompanied.
• 3:43:12
  Speaker 6: By these methods, for they are.
• 3:43:13
  Speaker 5: But psychism masquerading as occultism or spiritual philosophy. Remember my test,
• 3:43:20
  Speaker 5: does this make me strong? Apply the touchstone, and then
• 3:43:25
  Speaker 5: govern yourself accordingly. This is a word to the wise, Heed.
• 3:43:29
  Speaker 6: It the proof.
• 3:43:33
  Speaker 5: Concluding this part of the subject, I would say that
• 3:43:35
  Speaker 5: if any of.
• 3:43:36
  Speaker 6: You are disposed to question the.
• 3:43:38
  Speaker 5: Correctness of my above statement, then you have but to
• 3:43:41
  Speaker 5: examine the types of psychic seen.
• 3:43:43
  Speaker 6: On all sides.
• 3:43:45
  Speaker 5: Are they not all hyper impressionable, excessively sensitive, neurotic, hysterical,
• 3:43:51
  Speaker 5: passive negative people. Do they not become as mere psychic
• 3:43:56
  Speaker 5: harps upon which the passing mental reasons play produces weird sounds?
• 3:44:02
  Speaker 5: Remember now I am speaking of genuine psychics, not.
• 3:44:05
  Speaker 6: The bogus psychics who are out.
• 3:44:07
  Speaker 5: For the money and who are a shrewd, cunning lot,
• 3:44:11
  Speaker 5: far from being impressionable, and in reality using their mesmeric
• 3:44:15
  Speaker 5: power to impress and influence the credulous persons coming under
• 3:44:19
  Speaker 5: their influence. I am not alluding to these people, but
• 3:44:23
  Speaker 5: to the poor, frail willed negative sensitives, who are as
• 3:44:27
  Speaker 5: impressionable as the photographer's negative, and to whom also the
• 3:44:32
  Speaker 5: development means but the bringing out of impressions from outside.
• 3:44:37
  Speaker 5: I pray you be a human positive, not a human negative.
• 3:44:43
  Speaker 8: Oriental fascination. At this point, I wish to call your
• 3:44:48
  Speaker 8: attention to a feature of the subject that has received
• 3:44:51
  Speaker 8: but scant attention at the hands of Western writers. I
• 3:44:55
  Speaker 8: allude to the wonderful manifestations of mental fascination displayed by
• 3:44:59
  Speaker 8: some one of the magicians of the Orient, particularly of
• 3:45:03
  Speaker 8: India and Persia. These feats are being performed today in
• 3:45:07
  Speaker 8: those lands and are equal to any of the wonderful
• 3:45:10
  Speaker 8: instances related of the ancient Persian and Egyptian magicians mental
• 3:45:16
  Speaker 8: fascination in the East. Without going in to an extended
• 3:45:21
  Speaker 8: consideration of the subject in question, I will mention a
• 3:45:24
  Speaker 8: few of the recorded instances of mental fascination among the
• 3:45:28
  Speaker 8: Oriental people, in order to give you an idea of
• 3:45:31
  Speaker 8: the degree of power possible to an adept in the
• 3:45:34
  Speaker 8: practice of mental influence. One writer describes an exhibition of
• 3:45:39
  Speaker 8: this kind in India, witnessed by himself. The writer was
• 3:45:43
  Speaker 8: a profound skeptic who believed that it was all hanky
• 3:45:47
  Speaker 8: panky along the lines of sleight of hand or similar methods.
• 3:45:52
  Speaker 8: That is, he so believed until he actually witnessed the demonstration.
• 3:45:56
  Speaker 8: He goes on to relate that the magician was a
• 3:45:59
  Speaker 8: native Hindu of dignified and imposing appearance, surrounded by a
• 3:46:04
  Speaker 8: number of assistants of his own race, the serpent feet.
• 3:46:10
  Speaker 8: The magician seated himself on the ground with several jars, boxes, implements,
• 3:46:15
  Speaker 8: and other paraphernalia before him. He opened the seance by
• 3:46:19
  Speaker 8: the production of a number of tiny snakes, which he
• 3:46:22
  Speaker 8: lifted from one of the boxes and placed on the
• 3:46:25
  Speaker 8: ground before him in full sight of the audience. After
• 3:46:28
  Speaker 8: allowing the latter to examine the serpents and thereby satisfy
• 3:46:32
  Speaker 8: themselves regarding their reality, an English naturalist present identified the
• 3:46:38
  Speaker 8: snakes as belonging to a well known native variety. The
• 3:46:42
  Speaker 8: magician then began a slow, mournful, droning, monotonous song, the
• 3:46:47
  Speaker 8: predominant sound of which was um like the droning of
• 3:46:55
  Speaker 8: a bumblebee or a distant sawmill. The snakes reared themselves
• 3:46:59
  Speaker 8: up and move their heads from side to side at
• 3:47:02
  Speaker 8: the sound of the chant, the magician touching them softly
• 3:47:05
  Speaker 8: with his wand from time to time to the eyes
• 3:47:08
  Speaker 8: of the audience, the snakes seemed to gradually grow from
• 3:47:12
  Speaker 8: their original tiny proportions, until finally they appeared as immense
• 3:47:17
  Speaker 8: boa constrictors, which caused great alarm among the audience, both
• 3:47:21
  Speaker 8: Englishmen and native The magician bade the audience remain quiet
• 3:47:27
  Speaker 8: and assure them that there was no danger. Then he
• 3:47:30
  Speaker 8: reversed the process, and the snakes were seen to gradually
• 3:47:34
  Speaker 8: decrease in size until they vanished from sight altogether, the
• 3:47:39
  Speaker 8: vanishing Hindu. The next act was equally as wonderful. The
• 3:47:45
  Speaker 8: magician placed one of his assistants in the center of
• 3:47:47
  Speaker 8: a circle described on the sand, and with appropriate gestures
• 3:47:52
  Speaker 8: and ceremony, went through some magical incantation. The boy was
• 3:47:56
  Speaker 8: then seen to spin around faster and faster like a
• 3:47:59
  Speaker 8: large type, and then began to gradually ascend in the air,
• 3:48:03
  Speaker 8: still spinning around until he vanished from sight. Then the
• 3:48:08
  Speaker 8: magician reversed the process and brought him down from the
• 3:48:11
  Speaker 8: aerial heights, the boy appearing like a small speck at first,
• 3:48:15
  Speaker 8: gradually growing larger as he neared the earth, until he
• 3:48:18
  Speaker 8: stood before the audience, bowing and smiling. The mango feet.
• 3:48:25
  Speaker 8: The next act was the placing of some mango seeds
• 3:48:27
  Speaker 8: in the sand, building a tiny hillock around them. The
• 3:48:31
  Speaker 8: magician then began his chant and waved his hands over
• 3:48:34
  Speaker 8: the hillock. In a moment, a tiny shoot was seen
• 3:48:37
  Speaker 8: to appear, and then a little bush, which gradually grew
• 3:48:41
  Speaker 8: up until a mature mango tree was seen bearing leaves.
• 3:48:45
  Speaker 8: The blossoms were seen, and the ripe fruit appeared, which
• 3:48:50
  Speaker 8: was passed among the audience. Then reversing the process, the
• 3:48:54
  Speaker 8: tree disappeared gradually, and at the end, the magician dug
• 3:48:58
  Speaker 8: up the original seeds and showed them to his audience,
• 3:49:01
  Speaker 8: and wonderful to relate. The fruit that had been distributed
• 3:49:05
  Speaker 8: among the people also disappeared. The rope feet. The concluding
• 3:49:11
  Speaker 8: act was as startling as those preceding it. The magician
• 3:49:15
  Speaker 8: produced a coil of real rope, which was passed around
• 3:49:19
  Speaker 8: for examination. Then he knotted one end of it and
• 3:49:23
  Speaker 8: then tossed the knot into the air. The rope rapidly
• 3:49:26
  Speaker 8: uncoiled itself, and the knot was seen away up in
• 3:49:29
  Speaker 8: the air and still ascending. When the rope was completely
• 3:49:34
  Speaker 8: uncoiled and the end left dangling on the ground as
• 3:49:38
  Speaker 8: if supported by some hook holding the knotted in hundreds
• 3:49:41
  Speaker 8: of feet in the air, one of the assistants approached
• 3:49:44
  Speaker 8: the rope and took hold of it. At a shout
• 3:49:47
  Speaker 8: from the magician, he began climbing rapidly up the rope
• 3:49:51
  Speaker 8: and in a short time disappeared from view after appearing
• 3:49:54
  Speaker 8: as a tiny speck in the air. Then at another
• 3:49:58
  Speaker 8: word from the magician, the rope itself flew up in
• 3:50:01
  Speaker 8: the air and vanished from sight the test and explanation
• 3:50:07
  Speaker 8: this concluded the performance, but here is a remarkable sequel.
• 3:50:12
  Speaker 8: An Englishman present took a snapshot with a pocket camera
• 3:50:16
  Speaker 8: just as the boy began to climb the rope. When
• 3:50:18
  Speaker 8: the negative was developed, there was no trace of rope
• 3:50:21
  Speaker 8: boy or anything else appertaining to the manifestation. Even the
• 3:50:27
  Speaker 8: magician was absent from the center of the scene and
• 3:50:30
  Speaker 8: was shown on the plate as sitting down on one
• 3:50:33
  Speaker 8: side with an amused smile on his face. This fact
• 3:50:38
  Speaker 8: demonstrated that which similar tests have also proven i e.
• 3:50:43
  Speaker 8: That the facts were not really performed at all, but
• 3:50:46
  Speaker 8: were simply illusions produced by impressions upon the minds of
• 3:50:50
  Speaker 8: the audience. In fact, they were examples of mental magic
• 3:50:55
  Speaker 8: along the phase of mental fascination and arising from concentrated
• 3:50:59
  Speaker 8: will and visualization of mental images transmitted by mentative currents
• 3:51:05
  Speaker 8: and acting by mentative induction. I shall give you another
• 3:51:10
  Speaker 8: proof of this in a moment or two, after I
• 3:51:12
  Speaker 8: have related a few more instances of this wonderful manifestation
• 3:51:16
  Speaker 8: of mental influence. A wonderful man. Another writer, a correspondent
• 3:51:23
  Speaker 8: of an American paper, relates that he was once on
• 3:51:26
  Speaker 8: a steamer plying up one of the rivers in India,
• 3:51:29
  Speaker 8: when at a stopping place there scrambled up the side
• 3:51:33
  Speaker 8: as nimbly as a monkey, a native Hindu, clad only
• 3:51:37
  Speaker 8: in a loin cloth and having a tight rolled red
• 3:51:40
  Speaker 8: bundle fastened at the back of his neck to keep
• 3:51:42
  Speaker 8: it safe from the water while swimming from shore. There
• 3:51:46
  Speaker 8: was nothing about the man to distinguish him from the
• 3:51:49
  Speaker 8: ordinary fakirs, but he soon showed his quality his startling feats.
• 3:51:55
  Speaker 8: Passing along the deck, he picked up a ball of
• 3:51:57
  Speaker 8: thin rope which was lying there and unwinding an end,
• 3:52:01
  Speaker 8: He nootted it and tossed the knot up in the air,
• 3:52:04
  Speaker 8: where it ascended rapidly, unwinding the ball, until the whole
• 3:52:08
  Speaker 8: of the rope disappeared in the air, just as in
• 3:52:11
  Speaker 8: the instance previously related. Then, passing a sailor who was
• 3:52:15
  Speaker 8: holding in his hand a broken cocoanut shell containing the
• 3:52:18
  Speaker 8: liquid or water of the nut, he lifted the shell
• 3:52:21
  Speaker 8: from his hand, and holding it high up over a
• 3:52:24
  Speaker 8: ship's bucket standing near by, he emptied the liquid until
• 3:52:28
  Speaker 8: it filled the bucket, and repeated the process upon another bucket,
• 3:52:32
  Speaker 8: and so on, until twelve buckets had been filled from
• 3:52:35
  Speaker 8: the half cocoanut shell. Then he picked up one of
• 3:52:38
  Speaker 8: the buckets filled with the liquid, and holding it in
• 3:52:41
  Speaker 8: his hand, he caused it to gradually shrink until it
• 3:52:44
  Speaker 8: completely disappeared. Then a moment later he exhibited a tiny
• 3:52:49
  Speaker 8: speck in his hand, which gradually grew until it was
• 3:52:52
  Speaker 8: again the bucket of water filled to the brim with
• 3:52:55
  Speaker 8: the liquid, which he then poured out on the deck.
• 3:52:59
  Speaker 8: A strain occurrence. Witnessing the strange performance was a young
• 3:53:04
  Speaker 8: mother with her babe beside her, and a young nurse
• 3:53:07
  Speaker 8: girl several feet away. To her horror, the mother then
• 3:53:10
  Speaker 8: beheld the nurse girl rising a few feet in the
• 3:53:13
  Speaker 8: air and moving rapidly toward the babe, reaching down for
• 3:53:17
  Speaker 8: the infant as she glided over it, and then rising
• 3:53:20
  Speaker 8: high into the air with the child clasped in her arms,
• 3:53:23
  Speaker 8: until both were lost in the clouds. The mother burst
• 3:53:27
  Speaker 8: into frantic cries and shrieks and gazed upward, and as
• 3:53:31
  Speaker 8: she gazed, she saw a fleecy cloud appear, which gradually
• 3:53:34
  Speaker 8: took the shape of the nurse girl, who grew larger
• 3:53:37
  Speaker 8: and larger as she descended, until she finally reached the
• 3:53:40
  Speaker 8: deck again and handed the babe to the rejoiced mother.
• 3:53:44
  Speaker 8: The mother, after clasping her babe close to her bosom,
• 3:53:48
  Speaker 8: cried out, how dare you take my child away? When,
• 3:53:51
  Speaker 8: to her surprise, the girl answered, why, ma'am. The baby
• 3:53:56
  Speaker 8: has been asleep all the time and I have not
• 3:53:58
  Speaker 8: touched him. And then the Fakir smiled and said, mem
• 3:54:02
  Speaker 8: Saib has been dreaming strange things. It was merely an
• 3:54:07
  Speaker 8: instance of mental impression of a remarkable degree of power
• 3:54:11
  Speaker 8: produced by the will and mental imagery of the Fakir
• 3:54:15
  Speaker 8: and his previous feats were also so performed wonders upon wonders,
• 3:54:21
  Speaker 8: But this was only the beginning. The fakir then untied
• 3:54:24
  Speaker 8: his red bundle, and extracting therefrom a cocoanut, he exhibited
• 3:54:29
  Speaker 8: it to the passengers, passing it around for inspection. Then
• 3:54:33
  Speaker 8: placing the nut on the end of a bamboo stick
• 3:54:36
  Speaker 8: and balancing it there, he commanded it in Hindi to
• 3:54:40
  Speaker 8: spout as a fountain, and immediately a great jet of
• 3:54:43
  Speaker 8: water sprang from it, falling over the deck in great showers.
• 3:54:49
  Speaker 8: He then caused it to stop flowing, and it obeyed.
• 3:54:52
  Speaker 8: Then he restarted it. This he repeated several times. Then
• 3:54:57
  Speaker 8: he materialized a cobra from the air and caused it
• 3:55:00
  Speaker 8: to disappear at his command, after he had terrified the
• 3:55:04
  Speaker 8: passengers with it. Then he materialized several human forms in
• 3:55:09
  Speaker 8: broad sunlight in full view of the passengers, and afterwards
• 3:55:13
  Speaker 8: caused them to melt away gradually until they disappeared like
• 3:55:16
  Speaker 8: a cloud of steam. Then, taking up a collection which
• 3:55:20
  Speaker 8: was quite liberal, he jumped over the side and swam
• 3:55:23
  Speaker 8: rapidly to shore. The real secret. The natives among the
• 3:55:28
  Speaker 8: ship's passengers smiled at the wonder of the Europeans present
• 3:55:32
  Speaker 8: and laughed at the latter's talk of jugglery or magic power,
• 3:55:37
  Speaker 8: informing them that it was merely an instance of Hindoo
• 3:55:40
  Speaker 8: mesmerism or mental influence, and that those among them who
• 3:55:45
  Speaker 8: resisted the spell saw nothing of the phenomena except the
• 3:55:48
  Speaker 8: Fakir with glistening eyes and every evidence of a powerful
• 3:55:52
  Speaker 8: and concentrated exercise of his will. These feats are quite
• 3:55:57
  Speaker 8: common in some parts of India, but they are known
• 3:55:59
  Speaker 8: to be but mental illusions, for all attempts to catch
• 3:56:03
  Speaker 8: the exhibition on photographic plates have failed, the plate showing
• 3:56:07
  Speaker 8: nothing but the magician in a state of mental concentration.
• 3:56:11
  Speaker 8: These magicians have developed the power of causing many persons
• 3:56:15
  Speaker 8: at the same time to have the illusion of seeing, hearing, tasting,
• 3:56:19
  Speaker 8: and smelling things that have no material existence. It is
• 3:56:23
  Speaker 8: induced mental imagery in a developed degree, but differs only
• 3:56:27
  Speaker 8: in degree from the phenomena more familiar to the Western world.
• 3:56:32
  Speaker 8: Testimony of a Hindu sage. In this connection, I would
• 3:56:37
  Speaker 8: like to add the testimony and explanation given to me
• 3:56:40
  Speaker 8: personally by a greatly esteemed friend of mine, a Hindu
• 3:56:44
  Speaker 8: sage traveling in this country, who, in addition to his
• 3:56:48
  Speaker 8: oriental learning, has received the highest English education, and who
• 3:56:52
  Speaker 8: is a highly educated man in both the Eastern and
• 3:56:56
  Speaker 8: Western meanings of the terms. This gentleman told me that
• 3:57:00
  Speaker 8: when a youth, he had witnessed exhibitions of the kind
• 3:57:03
  Speaker 8: just related in his native land. At first he was
• 3:57:07
  Speaker 8: puzzled and mystified by them, but his naturally scientific turn
• 3:57:11
  Speaker 8: of mind caused him to seek for the solution. He
• 3:57:15
  Speaker 8: began experimenting, and soon at least was able to classify
• 3:57:19
  Speaker 8: the phenomena as pure mental illusion. He found that the
• 3:57:24
  Speaker 8: crowd would gather close around the magician in order to
• 3:57:27
  Speaker 8: see what was going on, Although all were required to
• 3:57:31
  Speaker 8: keep a certain number of yards away from the wonder
• 3:57:33
  Speaker 8: worker by the latter's instructions and requirements. My friend found
• 3:57:39
  Speaker 8: that if he retreated a few yards beyond the outer
• 3:57:42
  Speaker 8: edge of the crowd, he could see nothing but the magician,
• 3:57:46
  Speaker 8: all the material doings disappearing. When he would join the crowd,
• 3:57:51
  Speaker 8: the mystic appearances were again plainly seen. He tried the
• 3:57:55
  Speaker 8: experiment in several ways with the same result. Then he
• 3:57:59
  Speaker 8: tried to riskuee and pushed nearer to the magician than
• 3:58:02
  Speaker 8: was allowable, and with the same result. In short, the
• 3:58:07
  Speaker 8: influence was confined to a certain area, and the mental
• 3:58:11
  Speaker 8: influence was doubtless increased by the contagion of the different
• 3:58:15
  Speaker 8: minds in the crowd. My friend tested the well known
• 3:58:19
  Speaker 8: mango feet and the rope disappearing feat as related in
• 3:58:23
  Speaker 8: these pages in this way, and was determined that they
• 3:58:27
  Speaker 8: came well under the rule of mental illusion, instead of
• 3:58:31
  Speaker 8: being an occurrence defying the established laws of nature. The
• 3:58:36
  Speaker 8: testimony of this gentleman corroborated the opinion that I had
• 3:58:39
  Speaker 8: already formed to that effect, which opinion agrees with that
• 3:58:43
  Speaker 8: of the best authorities. An erroneous Western idea. In closing
• 3:58:50
  Speaker 8: this chapter, I wished to point out to the students
• 3:58:52
  Speaker 8: of the work an erroneous idea that has crept into
• 3:58:56
  Speaker 8: some of the Western works along the lines of hypnotism,
• 3:58:59
  Speaker 8: its das, et cetera, and which I shall now mention
• 3:59:02
  Speaker 8: and explain. The Hindu magicians or mesmerists frequently sit in
• 3:59:08
  Speaker 8: a squatting position during their enchantments, droning a monotonous soothing
• 3:59:13
  Speaker 8: chant as has been described, and at the same time
• 3:59:17
  Speaker 8: moving the body from the waist upward in a circling
• 3:59:20
  Speaker 8: twisting motion from the hips at the same time fixing
• 3:59:24
  Speaker 8: their gaze firmly upon their audience. This motion in twisting
• 3:59:29
  Speaker 8: is merely an accompaniment to the droning chant, akin to
• 3:59:33
  Speaker 8: the motions of the Oriental dancers, who twist their bodies
• 3:59:37
  Speaker 8: in a similar manner in rhythm to the music. The
• 3:59:41
  Speaker 8: motion is merely a custom among these people and has
• 3:59:45
  Speaker 8: nothing to do with the production of the phenomena, as
• 3:59:48
  Speaker 8: all Hindu occultists know and will tell you. In fact,
• 3:59:52
  Speaker 8: the higher magicians among the Hindus do nothing of the sort,
• 3:59:56
  Speaker 8: but maintain a dignified, calm standing position, or the firm
• 4:00:02
  Speaker 8: yogi seat, in which the body is evenly and firmly
• 4:00:05
  Speaker 8: poised in a position of dignified rest, the hands resting
• 4:00:09
  Speaker 8: on the lap, the back of one hand in the
• 4:00:12
  Speaker 8: palm of the other. A foolish idea. All native Hindus
• 4:00:18
  Speaker 8: understand the above matter, but Western visitors jump at the
• 4:00:22
  Speaker 8: conclusion that this gyrating circling of the body from the
• 4:00:26
  Speaker 8: hips has something to do with the power manifested. And
• 4:00:30
  Speaker 8: as I have said, some of the Western works on
• 4:00:33
  Speaker 8: the subject have gone into considerable detail regarding this wonderful
• 4:00:37
  Speaker 8: Oriental hypnotism, which they assert is accomplished because of this
• 4:00:41
  Speaker 8: twisting of the body. They might just as well point
• 4:00:45
  Speaker 8: out some physical trick of motion of each leading Western
• 4:00:49
  Speaker 8: hypnotists and assert that the motion was the secret of
• 4:00:53
  Speaker 8: his power. I do not think that further common is
• 4:00:56
  Speaker 8: necessary in this case. The motions and attitudes, etc. Are
• 4:01:00
  Speaker 8: merely part of the setting of the piece, or possibly
• 4:01:03
  Speaker 8: bits of stage business designed to heighten the impression of mystery.
• 4:01:08
  Speaker 8: That's all Oriental methods of developing power. I've been informed
• 4:01:14
  Speaker 8: by an authority whose word is entitled to the greatest respect,
• 4:01:18
  Speaker 8: and who has spent many years in India and other
• 4:01:20
  Speaker 8: Oriental countries, that the following method is used by these
• 4:01:23
  Speaker 8: Oriental magicians in developing within themselves the power to create
• 4:01:28
  Speaker 8: these strong mental images in the minds of those witnessing
• 4:01:31
  Speaker 8: their performances. The magician starts when a youth and practices
• 4:01:37
  Speaker 8: mental imagery in his own mind. This process is akin
• 4:01:41
  Speaker 8: to visualization. As mentioned by me in my work on
• 4:01:44
  Speaker 8: mental magic. The magician at first uses his will in
• 4:01:48
  Speaker 8: an endeavor to form a clear and distinct mental image
• 4:01:52
  Speaker 8: of some familiar object arose, for instance. He practices until
• 4:01:57
  Speaker 8: he is able to actually see the thing before him.
• 4:02:00
  Speaker 8: In his mind's eye, just as certain eminent painters have
• 4:02:04
  Speaker 8: acquired the faculty of visualizing the faces of persons they meet,
• 4:02:09
  Speaker 8: so that they can reproduce them on canvas without further sittings.
• 4:02:14
  Speaker 8: Superlative sense induction attained, then the magician experiments upon larger objects,
• 4:02:22
  Speaker 8: and then upon groups of objects, and so on to
• 4:02:25
  Speaker 8: more complex pictures. After years of constant experimentation and practice,
• 4:02:32
  Speaker 8: a few of those undertaking the work find themselves able
• 4:02:35
  Speaker 8: to picture any of the scenes described in this chapter
• 4:02:38
  Speaker 8: as feats. That is, they are able to clearly picture
• 4:02:42
  Speaker 8: them in their own minds, And this being accomplished, the
• 4:02:46
  Speaker 8: magician is able, by his highly developed concentrated will, to
• 4:02:50
  Speaker 8: project the mental image into the mind of those around him.
• 4:02:54
  Speaker 8: It is the sense induction described by me in this work,
• 4:02:58
  Speaker 8: only raised to a much higher degree of manifestation. Oriental
• 4:03:03
  Speaker 8: versus occidental. The people of the West will not devote
• 4:03:08
  Speaker 8: the time and attention to the cultivation of such faculties,
• 4:03:11
  Speaker 8: while the Oriental will willingly give up half of his
• 4:03:14
  Speaker 8: life for the attainment. But on the other hand, the
• 4:03:17
  Speaker 8: Western man will devote his time to the acquirement of
• 4:03:20
  Speaker 8: will power and concentration in the direction of becoming a
• 4:03:24
  Speaker 8: ruler of men and a general of finance, each to
• 4:03:29
  Speaker 8: his taste in temperament, and neither would trade places or
• 4:03:32
  Speaker 8: power with the other. They are both dealing with the
• 4:03:35
  Speaker 8: same force, however, as little as they realize it. Future impression. Now,
• 4:03:42
  Speaker 8: I wish to call to your attention to what may
• 4:03:45
  Speaker 8: be called future impression, or as the hypnotists call it,
• 4:03:49
  Speaker 8: post hypnotism, et cetera. Future impressions are like seeds planted
• 4:03:54
  Speaker 8: in the mind, which grow, blossom, and bear fruit at
• 4:03:58
  Speaker 8: some future time. Hypnotists produce this phenomena by giving the subject,
• 4:04:03
  Speaker 8: while in the hypnotic sleep, the suggestion that at a
• 4:04:07
  Speaker 8: certain time, either in a few minutes or hours or days,
• 4:04:10
  Speaker 8: he will do certain things or feel certain things. But
• 4:04:14
  Speaker 8: the newer school of psychologists have discovered that these future
• 4:04:18
  Speaker 8: impressions may be made in the ordinary receptive state, just
• 4:04:22
  Speaker 8: as is the case with any of the other forms
• 4:04:24
  Speaker 8: of mental impressions, and the result will be the same
• 4:04:28
  Speaker 8: as that obtained by the hypnotists. In spite of their
• 4:04:30
  Speaker 8: theories and methods the general principles, I do not propose
• 4:04:36
  Speaker 8: going into detail regarding this class of phenomena, because all
• 4:04:39
  Speaker 8: that is necessary to be said can be comprised in
• 4:04:42
  Speaker 8: the following two statements. One that generally speaking, all the
• 4:04:47
  Speaker 8: phenomena of the ordinary immediate mental impression may be produced
• 4:04:52
  Speaker 8: as future impression, and two that all the phenomena of
• 4:04:57
  Speaker 8: future impression produced by the operation on the subject may
• 4:05:01
  Speaker 8: be likewise produced by auto impression of the subject, that is,
• 4:05:06
  Speaker 8: by the subject inducing impressions in himself. How future impressions
• 4:05:11
  Speaker 8: are given in the first of the above stated principles,
• 4:05:15
  Speaker 8: the subject is merely told that you will do so
• 4:05:18
  Speaker 8: and so at such and such a time, instead of
• 4:05:21
  Speaker 8: do so and so now. For instance, instead of telling
• 4:05:25
  Speaker 8: the impressionable that the chair is burning him now, you
• 4:05:28
  Speaker 8: may tell him that in two minutes he will feel
• 4:05:30
  Speaker 8: the chair burning him. The result will be similar in
• 4:05:34
  Speaker 8: both cases. Apply the same principle to any of the
• 4:05:37
  Speaker 8: mesmeric phenomena mentioned in previous chapters, and the result will
• 4:05:41
  Speaker 8: be similar. The force of the impression, the degree of impressionability, etc.
• 4:05:47
  Speaker 8: Will play the same part in both immediate impression and
• 4:05:50
  Speaker 8: future impression. This principle is called into operation by suggestionists
• 4:05:55
  Speaker 8: in treating for habits, the suggestions being given along the
• 4:05:59
  Speaker 8: lines of every time you pick up a cigar, you
• 4:06:01
  Speaker 8: will feel nauseated and will think of a disgusting bar
• 4:06:04
  Speaker 8: room spittoon, et cetera, et cetera. It is always a
• 4:06:08
  Speaker 8: case of you will in future impression instances from everyday life.
• 4:06:15
  Speaker 8: Many foolish suggestions are given in everyday life along the
• 4:06:19
  Speaker 8: lines of future impression, and alas many of them are
• 4:06:22
  Speaker 8: accepted carelessly, owing to a lack of knowledge of the principle.
• 4:06:27
  Speaker 8: How many times has it been said to an impressionable
• 4:06:30
  Speaker 8: young bride, never mind, you'll grow tired of him after
• 4:06:33
  Speaker 8: a while, et cetera. Or to a man, wait until
• 4:06:36
  Speaker 8: the novelty wears off, and you'll see how sick of
• 4:06:38
  Speaker 8: the job you'll get. Or you'll lose your interest and
• 4:06:42
  Speaker 8: enthusiasm by and by, or you'll find him out after
• 4:06:47
  Speaker 8: a while, and we'll see that he's not what he seems,
• 4:06:50
  Speaker 8: and so on. You may add to these instances from
• 4:06:53
  Speaker 8: your own experience. And too often these suggestions are recalled
• 4:06:58
  Speaker 8: and have a tendency to cause the person to make
• 4:07:00
  Speaker 8: them come true. Many fortune tellers prophecies have been made
• 4:07:05
  Speaker 8: come true in this way by impressionable and ignorant people.
• 4:07:09
  Speaker 8: I have given you a key to this principle. Now
• 4:07:12
  Speaker 8: heed the lesson. If you feel that an attempt at
• 4:07:15
  Speaker 8: future impression is being made on you headed off with
• 4:07:18
  Speaker 8: a mental no, I won't. That is the antidote for
• 4:07:22
  Speaker 8: the bane. Remember this, It may save you trouble some day.
• 4:07:28
  Speaker 8: The secret of future auto impressions the second principle in
• 4:07:32
  Speaker 8: the statement made several paragraphs further back. I e. That
• 4:07:36
  Speaker 8: all the phenomena of future impressions may be duplicated by
• 4:07:40
  Speaker 8: auto impression or impressions made by one's self is true
• 4:07:44
  Speaker 8: and worthy of consideration. You make up your mind that
• 4:07:48
  Speaker 8: you must awaken to catch a train at four tomorrow morning,
• 4:07:52
  Speaker 8: and you awaken in time. You have set your mental
• 4:07:55
  Speaker 8: alarm clock. If you have an engagement at three this afternoon,
• 4:07:59
  Speaker 8: you may set your alarm as follows. Talking to yourself.
• 4:08:02
  Speaker 8: Of course, now see here, Remember that you must see
• 4:08:06
  Speaker 8: Smith at three this afternoon. Three three I say. Remember
• 4:08:11
  Speaker 8: now three I say, And if you impress it sufficiently
• 4:08:15
  Speaker 8: strong upon your mind a little before three, you will
• 4:08:18
  Speaker 8: begin to feel uneasy. And then suddenly your Smith engagement
• 4:08:22
  Speaker 8: will pop into your mind from your subconscious region, and
• 4:08:26
  Speaker 8: you will reach out for your hat and overcoat mental
• 4:08:29
  Speaker 8: alarm clock. Remember that tells the whole tale. The mental
• 4:08:34
  Speaker 8: alarm clock. You see, the experimenter giving future impressions simply
• 4:08:39
  Speaker 8: sets the mental alarm clock going along impressionable lines. He
• 4:08:44
  Speaker 8: makes the mental impression and attaches it to the mental
• 4:08:47
  Speaker 8: alarm clock. When the alarm goes off, the impression emerges
• 4:08:51
  Speaker 8: into the field of consciousness and acts just as if
• 4:08:54
  Speaker 8: it had been freshly made. That's the whole story, in
• 4:08:57
  Speaker 8: plain homely terms self protection. But don't be frightened, you
• 4:09:03
  Speaker 8: timid people. Remember this that you will not accept a
• 4:09:07
  Speaker 8: future impression unless you would also accept a present impression.
• 4:09:11
  Speaker 8: The degree of impressionability is the same in both cases.
• 4:09:15
  Speaker 8: The only reason a future impression has the advantage over
• 4:09:19
  Speaker 8: a present one is that it is more subtle, and
• 4:09:22
  Speaker 8: people are not as much on guard about future things
• 4:09:25
  Speaker 8: as they are about things to be done right now.
• 4:09:29
  Speaker 8: You will resent an impression that you do this thing
• 4:09:32
  Speaker 8: right now, while you pay but little attention to the
• 4:09:35
  Speaker 8: earnest impression that in a year from now you will
• 4:09:39
  Speaker 8: feel so and so about this matter, and dismiss the
• 4:09:42
  Speaker 8: subject with a shrug of the shoulders instead of saying,
• 4:09:45
  Speaker 8: at least mentally, no, I won't the present impression is
• 4:09:49
  Speaker 8: apt to attract your attention, the more forcibly, because it
• 4:09:53
  Speaker 8: is more apparent, while the future impression is more insinuating.
• 4:09:58
  Speaker 8: But now that you know the facts of the you
• 4:10:00
  Speaker 8: may laugh at them both and take the sting out
• 4:10:02
  Speaker 8: of them by your little no, I won't how to
• 4:10:07
  Speaker 8: kill out old adverse impressions. And just one word more,
• 4:10:11
  Speaker 8: if you feel that you are harboring any future impressions
• 4:10:14
  Speaker 8: made on you in the past, but upon which the
• 4:10:17
  Speaker 8: alarm has not yet gone off, you may kill them
• 4:10:20
  Speaker 8: by direct self impression or auto suggestions. To the contrary,
• 4:10:25
  Speaker 8: That is, you may say, I will not act upon
• 4:10:29
  Speaker 8: any adverse impressions that may have been made to me.
• 4:10:33
  Speaker 8: I will them out of my mind. I kill them
• 4:10:36
  Speaker 8: this moment by the power of my will, and at
• 4:10:39
  Speaker 8: the same time make a mental picture of the impression
• 4:10:42
  Speaker 8: being obliterated by the action of your will, just as
• 4:10:46
  Speaker 8: the chalk mark is erased from the blackboard by the
• 4:10:48
  Speaker 8: passing over of it of the eraser. Try this plan
• 4:10:52
  Speaker 8: and be free. Some of you will thank me for
• 4:10:55
  Speaker 8: this mark my words establishing amnative sinner. We now approach
• 4:11:01
  Speaker 8: that part of this work in which each individual student
• 4:11:04
  Speaker 8: is called upon to decide for himself, whether or not
• 4:11:07
  Speaker 8: he wishes to take his place in the world as alive,
• 4:11:11
  Speaker 8: active center of mentative energy, or whether he wishes to
• 4:11:15
  Speaker 8: remain a negative, passive, half alive center. No matter which
• 4:11:20
  Speaker 8: plan you may choose, you cannot avoid being a center
• 4:11:23
  Speaker 8: of some kind. The question for you to decide is
• 4:11:28
  Speaker 8: what kind of a ciner do I wish to become?
• 4:11:32
  Speaker 8: Each individual a center. I have explained in my work
• 4:11:36
  Speaker 8: on mental magic, and again in the first chapter of
• 4:11:39
  Speaker 8: the present work, that each individual is a center of life, energy,
• 4:11:43
  Speaker 8: and force in the great ocean of universal mentative energy.
• 4:11:48
  Speaker 8: Each individual is a center around which revolves his own world,
• 4:11:52
  Speaker 8: be that world great or small. The principle is the
• 4:11:55
  Speaker 8: same in all cases, and each man's world is largely
• 4:11:59
  Speaker 8: what he makes in what he attracts to himself. From
• 4:12:02
  Speaker 8: the time that the child begins to assert the eye
• 4:12:06
  Speaker 8: in him, he begins to create for himself his world.
• 4:12:10
  Speaker 8: He draws this person and thing and repels that person
• 4:12:14
  Speaker 8: or thing in accordance with his mental nature, and he
• 4:12:18
  Speaker 8: is constantly changing his little world according to the growth
• 4:12:21
  Speaker 8: of his nature mental world building. In view of this
• 4:12:26
  Speaker 8: law of life, does it not become of importance to
• 4:12:29
  Speaker 8: us to begin to build our mental world with care
• 4:12:33
  Speaker 8: and with the best possible material. Should we not begin
• 4:12:36
  Speaker 8: to make ourselves active centers of energy that we may
• 4:12:40
  Speaker 8: have the necessary power to build strongly and well. Should
• 4:12:44
  Speaker 8: we not develop within us our powers of attraction, that
• 4:12:47
  Speaker 8: we may draw to us the things, persons, and circumstances
• 4:12:51
  Speaker 8: that are conducive to our well being and content. Should
• 4:12:55
  Speaker 8: we not develop the will power within us in order
• 4:12:58
  Speaker 8: to exert that force which is now necessary to push
• 4:13:01
  Speaker 8: our way through the tangled underbrush of life and make
• 4:13:04
  Speaker 8: a wide path for ourselves. Answer these questions as you will.
• 4:13:09
  Speaker 8: I have answered them for myself, and you must do
• 4:13:12
  Speaker 8: the same for yourselves. The important decision, and so I
• 4:13:16
  Speaker 8: shall proceed with this work with the understanding that you
• 4:13:20
  Speaker 8: have answered my questions in the affirmative and have decided
• 4:13:24
  Speaker 8: to create an active mentative ciner for yourself. If you
• 4:13:29
  Speaker 8: have decided in the negative, you might as well close
• 4:13:32
  Speaker 8: this book, for from now on the instruction will be
• 4:13:35
  Speaker 8: along the lines above indicated the dual force. Let us
• 4:13:41
  Speaker 8: pause for a moment and see what forces are combined
• 4:13:44
  Speaker 8: in this active mentative cinner. In the first place, we
• 4:13:47
  Speaker 8: see that the dual aspect of the mental energy manifests
• 4:13:51
  Speaker 8: itself always that which we have called the desire force,
• 4:13:55
  Speaker 8: and that which we have called the will power. Here
• 4:14:00
  Speaker 8: as the two mentative polls. You know this well, for
• 4:14:03
  Speaker 8: you have studied my main work on mental magic, wherein
• 4:14:07
  Speaker 8: this point is brought out and illustrated. But here is
• 4:14:12
  Speaker 8: an aspect of the matter that I did not take
• 4:14:14
  Speaker 8: the time to bring out at great length in the
• 4:14:16
  Speaker 8: said book. I allude to the resemblance of the two
• 4:14:19
  Speaker 8: phases of mentative energy, i e. Desire force and will
• 4:14:25
  Speaker 8: power to the physical phenomena of magnetism and electricity, respectively,
• 4:14:33
  Speaker 8: physical laws in the mental world. Desire force like magnetism,
• 4:14:38
  Speaker 8: manifests in a drawing, pulling, attracting power, while will power,
• 4:14:44
  Speaker 8: like electricity, manifest in a pushing, compelling, driving power. Desire
• 4:14:50
  Speaker 8: force like magnetism, tends to draw things inward and to itself,
• 4:14:55
  Speaker 8: while will power, like electricity, tends to drive things outward
• 4:15:00
  Speaker 8: and away from itself. This dual manifestation of energy is
• 4:15:05
  Speaker 8: seen all through nature in all of its manifold forms
• 4:15:08
  Speaker 8: and conditions. There is ever the drawing in to a center,
• 4:15:12
  Speaker 8: and there is ever the pushing outward from the center,
• 4:15:16
  Speaker 8: and This law manifests upon the mental plane as well
• 4:15:19
  Speaker 8: as upon the physical plane mental electromagnetism. We have heard
• 4:15:27
  Speaker 8: much of people being magnetic, that is, having the power
• 4:15:30
  Speaker 8: to attract persons to them, but that is merely one
• 4:15:33
  Speaker 8: phase of the operation of mentative energy. We do not
• 4:15:37
  Speaker 8: hear so much about people being electric, and yet the
• 4:15:41
  Speaker 8: term is just as proper and applicable as the term magnetic. Electric.
• 4:15:46
  Speaker 8: People are the people in whom will power is strongly
• 4:15:50
  Speaker 8: developed and manifest. These people get after others and make
• 4:15:55
  Speaker 8: them do things. They are the active, energetic, forceful men
• 4:15:59
  Speaker 8: and women who get behind things and push them along.
• 4:16:03
  Speaker 8: All great leaders possess this phase of energy to a
• 4:16:06
  Speaker 8: marked degree. The mere mention of the matter to you
• 4:16:10
  Speaker 8: will cause you to think of instances of people who
• 4:16:13
  Speaker 8: possess menative electricity. There are men who are able to
• 4:16:18
  Speaker 8: make the crowd around them do their bidding. They are
• 4:16:20
  Speaker 8: able to work their will upon the mass of people.
• 4:16:24
  Speaker 8: These men are seen to possess a strange power, but
• 4:16:27
  Speaker 8: very few understand it. It is entirely different from the fascinating, alluring, charming,
• 4:16:34
  Speaker 8: attractive personality of the magnetic man, for it forces and
• 4:16:38
  Speaker 8: compels by sheer forces of character and will instead of
• 4:16:43
  Speaker 8: drawing and attracting. You will see why I have spoken
• 4:16:46
  Speaker 8: of these two phases of masculine and feminine respectively when
• 4:16:51
  Speaker 8: you consider their different manner of manifestation the electromagnetic individual.
• 4:16:59
  Speaker 8: But while both of these forms of power, the magnetic
• 4:17:03
  Speaker 8: and the electric, have their strong points and advantages, I
• 4:17:07
  Speaker 8: hold that the highly developed individual must have both of
• 4:17:10
  Speaker 8: these phases developed highly. In short, instead of being merely
• 4:17:14
  Speaker 8: a very magnetic individual on the one hand, or a
• 4:17:18
  Speaker 8: very electric individual on the other hand, the ideal man
• 4:17:22
  Speaker 8: must be an electro magnetic individual. In other words, he
• 4:17:27
  Speaker 8: must have both sides of his mentative energy highly developed
• 4:17:31
  Speaker 8: and in full operation. In this way, he is able
• 4:17:35
  Speaker 8: to manifest a combined influence which will make him a
• 4:17:38
  Speaker 8: very giant of mentative energy. From theory to practice. Now
• 4:17:45
  Speaker 8: I have said enough about the theory of the thing.
• 4:17:48
  Speaker 8: I shall ask you to read over what I have
• 4:17:50
  Speaker 8: said above several times, in fact, reread it until you
• 4:17:54
  Speaker 8: thoroughly understand it, and then I shall take you on
• 4:17:58
  Speaker 8: to the practical work and exercise is calculated to develop
• 4:18:02
  Speaker 8: in you the qualities mentioned. Taking it for granted that
• 4:18:06
  Speaker 8: you have carefully considered what I have just said, I
• 4:18:09
  Speaker 8: shall ask you to perform the following exercises et cetera.
• 4:18:15
  Speaker 8: First exercise for realizing the center Exercise one. In order
• 4:18:20
  Speaker 8: to realize the reality of the statement that you are
• 4:18:23
  Speaker 8: a center of mentative power, you must first enter into
• 4:18:27
  Speaker 8: a realization of the existence of a great ocean of
• 4:18:31
  Speaker 8: mentative energy itself. Do not pass over this lightly, for
• 4:18:35
  Speaker 8: it is most important. You must begin to create a
• 4:18:39
  Speaker 8: mental picture of the universe as a great ocean of
• 4:18:42
  Speaker 8: living energy, vibrating with life and force and power. Endeavor
• 4:18:47
  Speaker 8: to make this mental picture so clear that you can
• 4:18:50
  Speaker 8: see it with your mind's eye, and until it becomes
• 4:18:53
  Speaker 8: a reality to you. Picture yourself as alone in the universe,
• 4:18:57
  Speaker 8: and surround it on all sides with a vibe, pulsating
• 4:19:01
  Speaker 8: sea of energy or power. See that all power is
• 4:19:05
  Speaker 8: locked up in that ocean, and that the ocean exists everywhere.
• 4:19:10
  Speaker 8: Cut out from your mental field all other persons, things,
• 4:19:13
  Speaker 8: or conditions. Imagine yourself as alone in the great ocean
• 4:19:18
  Speaker 8: of power. You must practice frequently upon this mental picture
• 4:19:23
  Speaker 8: until you are able to visualize it distinctly. This does
• 4:19:27
  Speaker 8: not mean that you have to actually see it. Just
• 4:19:30
  Speaker 8: as you do. This printed page, but that you should
• 4:19:33
  Speaker 8: be able to actually feel. You will begin to understand
• 4:19:37
  Speaker 8: just what I mean after you have practiced this a little.
• 4:19:41
  Speaker 8: This great ocean of universal power must become real to you,
• 4:19:46
  Speaker 8: and you must practice until it does. So become the
• 4:19:51
  Speaker 8: importance of the exercise. The importance of the above exercise
• 4:19:55
  Speaker 8: may be understood when I tell you that it will
• 4:19:58
  Speaker 8: be impossible for you to manifes more than a moderate
• 4:20:01
  Speaker 8: degree of power until you are able to realize yourself
• 4:20:04
  Speaker 8: as a real center. And it will be impossible for
• 4:20:08
  Speaker 8: you to realize yourself as such a center until you
• 4:20:11
  Speaker 8: realize the existence of the ocean of power itself. For
• 4:20:15
  Speaker 8: how can you think of yourself as a center of
• 4:20:17
  Speaker 8: power in an ocean of power until you realize the
• 4:20:20
  Speaker 8: existence of the ocean itself. The universal ocean of mentative
• 4:20:25
  Speaker 8: energy contains within itself all the power, force, and energy
• 4:20:30
  Speaker 8: that there is. It is the source from which all
• 4:20:33
  Speaker 8: forms of energy arise. It is filled with an infinite
• 4:20:37
  Speaker 8: number of tiny centers of energy, of which you are one.
• 4:20:41
  Speaker 8: And in the degree that you draw upon it for strength,
• 4:20:44
  Speaker 8: so will you receive strength. By all means. Endeavor to
• 4:20:49
  Speaker 8: clearly visualize the great mentative ocean, for it is the
• 4:20:53
  Speaker 8: source of all the force with which you are filled
• 4:20:56
  Speaker 8: and which you hope to acquire. Enter into the great realization, friends,
• 4:21:02
  Speaker 8: for it is the first step to power. Second exercise
• 4:21:06
  Speaker 8: for realizing the center Exercise two. The second exercise which
• 4:21:12
  Speaker 8: will tend to increase your vibration as a center of force,
• 4:21:15
  Speaker 8: is as follows. Picture yourself clearly as a center of
• 4:21:20
  Speaker 8: force and the mentat devotion. While seeing the ocean on
• 4:21:24
  Speaker 8: all sides of you, you must see yourself as the
• 4:21:26
  Speaker 8: center of it. Do not be frightened at this idea,
• 4:21:30
  Speaker 8: for it is based on the truth. The highest occult
• 4:21:35
  Speaker 8: teaching informs us that the great mentat devotion has its
• 4:21:39
  Speaker 8: center everywhere and its circumference nowhere. That is that, being
• 4:21:45
  Speaker 8: infinite in space, there is no finite spot that is
• 4:21:49
  Speaker 8: really its center. And yet on the other hand, every
• 4:21:53
  Speaker 8: point of activity may be called its center, being extended
• 4:21:57
  Speaker 8: in every direction infinitely, its circumference is non existence. Therefore,
• 4:22:03
  Speaker 8: you are entitled and justified in considering yourself as a
• 4:22:08
  Speaker 8: center of the ocean of power. Each individual is such
• 4:22:12
  Speaker 8: a center, and each has his world circling and revolving
• 4:22:16
  Speaker 8: around him. Some have a small world and some have
• 4:22:20
  Speaker 8: mighty ones. There are centers so mighty and exalted that
• 4:22:24
  Speaker 8: the human mind cannot grasp their importance. But even the
• 4:22:29
  Speaker 8: tiniest point of activity is his center in itself. So
• 4:22:33
  Speaker 8: hesitate not, but begin to form a mental picture of
• 4:22:37
  Speaker 8: yourself as a center of power, a focal point of force.
• 4:22:44
  Speaker 8: Practice this exercise until you can clearly feel yourself as
• 4:22:49
  Speaker 8: a center of power. You must learn to think of
• 4:22:52
  Speaker 8: yourself as a focal point of force in the great
• 4:22:55
  Speaker 8: mentative ocean. Just as the great body of electricity manifests
• 4:22:59
  Speaker 8: itself and tiny points of activity, so does the menative
• 4:23:03
  Speaker 8: energy so express itself in you, who are a point
• 4:23:07
  Speaker 8: of activity within itself. In urging you to perfect yourself
• 4:23:12
  Speaker 8: in this realization, I would impress upon you the fact
• 4:23:15
  Speaker 8: known to all advanced occultists, that in the measure of
• 4:23:19
  Speaker 8: your realization of this real nature of the ego will
• 4:23:22
  Speaker 8: be the measure of the power possessed by you. All
• 4:23:27
  Speaker 8: of the strong men of our times and of all
• 4:23:31
  Speaker 8: ages had this realization intuitively or instinctively. That is, although
• 4:23:36
  Speaker 8: they did not know the philosophy or science of the matter,
• 4:23:39
  Speaker 8: they still felt and feel this sense of the power
• 4:23:43
  Speaker 8: of the ego in themselves, which gives them the confidence
• 4:23:46
  Speaker 8: to do things and the will power and desire force
• 4:23:50
  Speaker 8: to carry out their undertakings. It is this feeling of
• 4:23:54
  Speaker 8: inherent strength that makes men strong and successful and positive.
• 4:23:59
  Speaker 8: And this feeling and realization may be developed and unfolded
• 4:24:03
  Speaker 8: within anyone, providing he wants it sufficiently hard By the
• 4:24:08
  Speaker 8: exercise of your desire and will, you may build up
• 4:24:11
  Speaker 8: this realization of power, and in the building up there
• 4:24:14
  Speaker 8: will come to you a constantly increasing stream of desire
• 4:24:18
  Speaker 8: and will. In the measure of your expression will be
• 4:24:22
  Speaker 8: the measure of your impression from the source of all
• 4:24:25
  Speaker 8: positive impression. Third exercise for realizing the center Exercise three.
• 4:24:33
  Speaker 8: The third exercise consists in the realization of the nature
• 4:24:37
  Speaker 8: of the force. This force, energy or power with which
• 4:24:41
  Speaker 8: you are being filled and which you are now attracting
• 4:24:44
  Speaker 8: toward your center, consists of the electrical manifestation of will
• 4:24:49
  Speaker 8: power and the magnetic manifestation of desire force. These two
• 4:24:54
  Speaker 8: constitute the dual phases of the one force, and therefore
• 4:24:58
  Speaker 8: you must begin to realize that the these qualities are
• 4:25:00
  Speaker 8: within you, in order that you may be able to
• 4:25:03
  Speaker 8: express the same and thus gain the addition and increased
• 4:25:07
  Speaker 8: force that comes to those who express the same. You
• 4:25:12
  Speaker 8: must begin to realize that you have a will which
• 4:25:15
  Speaker 8: is capable of impressing itself on the things, persons, and
• 4:25:19
  Speaker 8: circumstances of your world. And you must begin to realize
• 4:25:23
  Speaker 8: that you have a desire which attracts to you the things, people,
• 4:25:27
  Speaker 8: and circumstances of your world, and which in fact draws
• 4:25:31
  Speaker 8: to you the very material form which your world is made.
• 4:25:35
  Speaker 8: When you realize this dual force within you, it will
• 4:25:38
  Speaker 8: begin to express itself automatically.
• 4:25:41
  Speaker 4: The act of.
• 4:25:42
  Speaker 8: Realization causes the mental machinery to begin to work smoothly
• 4:25:46
  Speaker 8: and effectively. Therefore, picture to yourself this dual force within you.
• 4:25:53
  Speaker 8: See yourself as influencing and acting upon the world around you.
• 4:25:58
  Speaker 8: See yourself as a power in the land, and also
• 4:26:01
  Speaker 8: see yourself as an attracting force drawing to you that
• 4:26:05
  Speaker 8: which you need and want and require. Consciously and unconsciously,
• 4:26:10
  Speaker 8: picture yourself as an electromagnetic individual. You are an individual
• 4:26:17
  Speaker 8: because you are a center of power. You are electromagnetic
• 4:26:21
  Speaker 8: because you possess the electric will and the magnetic desire.
• 4:26:26
  Speaker 8: A strong statement, carry with you this thought constantly, and
• 4:26:30
  Speaker 8: repeat it often to yourself and you will find it
• 4:26:33
  Speaker 8: a source of strength. You will find the strength pouring
• 4:26:36
  Speaker 8: into you when you say or think it. When you
• 4:26:39
  Speaker 8: feel weak or when you feel the need of additional strength.
• 4:26:42
  Speaker 8: Use this statement of strength. I am a living electromagnet.
• 4:26:48
  Speaker 8: And when you say it or think it, you must
• 4:26:50
  Speaker 8: picture to yourself just what you mean by the statement.
• 4:26:53
  Speaker 8: Hence the importance of knowing just what is meant. Do
• 4:26:57
  Speaker 8: not pass over this statement of strength as unimportant, but
• 4:27:01
  Speaker 8: try it in actual practice, and you will soon see
• 4:27:04
  Speaker 8: what a battery of strength it will be for you
• 4:27:07
  Speaker 8: and those around you will soon become aware of a
• 4:27:09
  Speaker 8: new sense of power within you. Don't lean on others,
• 4:27:15
  Speaker 8: don't let others lean on you. Keep this statement to yourself.
• 4:27:19
  Speaker 8: Do not invite the ridicule of those around you by
• 4:27:22
  Speaker 8: telling them the source of your strength. Do not bother
• 4:27:25
  Speaker 8: about them. If they are individuals themselves, they will understand
• 4:27:28
  Speaker 8: without being told. And if they are not, why all
• 4:27:31
  Speaker 8: the telling in the world would not make it clear
• 4:27:33
  Speaker 8: to them. Hoe your own row and mind your own business,
• 4:27:37
  Speaker 8: and let them do the same. No one can build
• 4:27:40
  Speaker 8: up his individuality except from within, and each must work
• 4:27:44
  Speaker 8: out his own salvation and climb the ladder of attainment
• 4:27:48
  Speaker 8: for himself. And the sooner that people learn this, the
• 4:27:51
  Speaker 8: better will it be for all. Don't be a leaner
• 4:27:55
  Speaker 8: or a leaning post. Don't lean on any one else,
• 4:27:58
  Speaker 8: and don't let anyone lean on you. You live your
• 4:28:02
  Speaker 8: own life and let others live theirs. There's been too
• 4:28:05
  Speaker 8: much of this fool business about living other people's lives
• 4:28:08
  Speaker 8: for them, or letting other people live your life for you.
• 4:28:12
  Speaker 8: Each man or woman must grow into an individual by
• 4:28:15
  Speaker 8: his or her own work and life. There is no
• 4:28:18
  Speaker 8: such thing as vicarious individuality. Don't be afraid to assert
• 4:28:24
  Speaker 8: the eye to claim your rightful heritage and birthright to
• 4:28:27
  Speaker 8: be an individual and not a parasite. And don't be
• 4:28:31
  Speaker 8: afraid to shake off and trim off the parasitic persons
• 4:28:34
  Speaker 8: that have encumbered your own unfoldment toward individuality. Let the
• 4:28:40
  Speaker 8: parasites take root in the earth just as you have done.
• 4:28:43
  Speaker 8: Let them fasten their roots in the great body of
• 4:28:46
  Speaker 8: strength and power instead of in the mental body of
• 4:28:48
  Speaker 8: someone else. Let them stop their second hand nourishment and
• 4:28:52
  Speaker 8: learn to draw from the first source. This is the
• 4:28:55
  Speaker 8: only way, and the lack of the knowledge of it
• 4:28:58
  Speaker 8: is filling the world with weaklings instead of with individuals. Therefore,
• 4:29:03
  Speaker 8: think of these things, hold them well in mind when
• 4:29:06
  Speaker 8: you make your statement of strength. I am a living electromagnet.
• 4:29:11
  Speaker 8: Personal atmosphere the menative force emanating from each individual creates
• 4:29:18
  Speaker 8: a mental atmosphere around him which often extends a considerable
• 4:29:22
  Speaker 8: distance from his body, especially in the case of strong individuals,
• 4:29:27
  Speaker 8: whose mental atmosphere is felt when they enter a room
• 4:29:30
  Speaker 8: or public place. Persons whose personality is weaker have a
• 4:29:35
  Speaker 8: mental atmosphere extending only a few inches from their bodies,
• 4:29:39
  Speaker 8: and which is scarcely perceptible to those coming in contact
• 4:29:43
  Speaker 8: with them. The positive ara the man of positive individuality,
• 4:29:49
  Speaker 8: Our man who feels himself to be a living electromagnet
• 4:29:54
  Speaker 8: carries with him an aura of mental atmosphere of positive strength,
• 4:29:59
  Speaker 8: which is plainly felt by those coming in contact with him.
• 4:30:03
  Speaker 8: People say about such a man that he has something
• 4:30:06
  Speaker 8: about him which impresses them, but which they fail to understand.
• 4:30:11
  Speaker 8: It will be worth your while to study this mental
• 4:30:14
  Speaker 8: atmosphere of some strong men with whom you come in contact,
• 4:30:18
  Speaker 8: for now that you have the secret of the matter,
• 4:30:21
  Speaker 8: that you may take some valuable lessons from him. The
• 4:30:24
  Speaker 8: air about strong individuals as I have said in my
• 4:30:29
  Speaker 8: Mental Magic, I cannot very well describe this air to you,
• 4:30:34
  Speaker 8: for unless you have met a man of this kind,
• 4:30:36
  Speaker 8: you will not understand it. But it is a very
• 4:30:39
  Speaker 8: different thing from the pompous, self sufficient, self important, fussy
• 4:30:44
  Speaker 8: air and demeanor manifested by the cheap imitators of these
• 4:30:47
  Speaker 8: great men. The magnetic man does not tell you how
• 4:30:51
  Speaker 8: great or smart or important he is. He leaves that
• 4:30:55
  Speaker 8: for his cheap imitators. He makes you feel his strength
• 4:30:59
  Speaker 8: by his very men atmosphere, without saying a word. He
• 4:31:03
  Speaker 8: has that something about him that people notice and wonder at,
• 4:31:08
  Speaker 8: and that something comes from his conscious or unconscious relation
• 4:31:13
  Speaker 8: to the universal will individuality, not personality. In the above
• 4:31:19
  Speaker 8: paragraph I have pointed out to the student the kernel
• 4:31:23
  Speaker 8: of the matter. The little fellow who thinks he is
• 4:31:26
  Speaker 8: one of the big ones believes that his strength comes
• 4:31:29
  Speaker 8: from his personality, and sooner or later he trips himself
• 4:31:32
  Speaker 8: up because of this error. But the real big ones
• 4:31:36
  Speaker 8: of life no better. They may not understand it all,
• 4:31:39
  Speaker 8: but some way they feel that there is a something
• 4:31:43
  Speaker 8: back of them from which they are able to draw
• 4:31:46
  Speaker 8: strength and power, and believing this they are filled with courage,
• 4:31:50
  Speaker 8: and daring and radiate their strength on all sides. They
• 4:31:54
  Speaker 8: may talk of their lucky star or special providence, or
• 4:31:58
  Speaker 8: else believe themselves to be specially favored of God, as
• 4:32:03
  Speaker 8: is the case with at least one of the big
• 4:32:05
  Speaker 8: men of modern finance. But no matter what may be
• 4:32:09
  Speaker 8: their special interpretations of this something, they all recognize its
• 4:32:14
  Speaker 8: existence and trust to it. And this conviction and realization
• 4:32:19
  Speaker 8: gives to the strong individuals that air of calm, positive power,
• 4:32:23
  Speaker 8: and self confidence that impresses those with whom they come
• 4:32:26
  Speaker 8: in contact, and which forms their mental atmosphere. Back to
• 4:32:32
  Speaker 8: first principles, and in giving you instructions in the art
• 4:32:37
  Speaker 8: of building for yourselves a positive mental atmosphere, I can
• 4:32:41
  Speaker 8: do no better than to refer you back to the
• 4:32:43
  Speaker 8: first principles and again bid you to realize that you
• 4:32:47
  Speaker 8: are a dynamic focus, a center of force in the
• 4:32:50
  Speaker 8: great universal will, having the dual attribute of will power
• 4:32:55
  Speaker 8: and desire force. In short, that you are a living
• 4:32:59
  Speaker 8: a life electromagnet. Realization brings power if you will but
• 4:33:05
  Speaker 8: get this realization firmly fixed in your mind, you will
• 4:33:09
  Speaker 8: automatically create for yourself a most positive mental atmosphere that
• 4:33:13
  Speaker 8: will be felt by all with whom you come in contact.
• 4:33:17
  Speaker 8: So first, last, and all the time build up this realization.
• 4:33:22
  Speaker 8: Say to yourself, I am a living electromagnet. Think it out,
• 4:33:27
  Speaker 8: dream it out, act it out, and of course always
• 4:33:30
  Speaker 8: realize what all this means. You are the electromagnet through
• 4:33:34
  Speaker 8: which is pouring the universal will power. And in the
• 4:33:38
  Speaker 8: degree that you will allow the current to so flow
• 4:33:40
  Speaker 8: through you, so will be the power you are able
• 4:33:43
  Speaker 8: to manifest. How to use the realization When you wish
• 4:33:48
  Speaker 8: to manifest a special degree of power, just let this
• 4:33:52
  Speaker 8: statement flame out in vivid letters in your mind. When
• 4:33:57
  Speaker 8: you feel that you are being approached by some other
• 4:33:59
  Speaker 8: person of spe strong will whom you do not wish
• 4:34:02
  Speaker 8: to influence, you just bring this statement into effect, and
• 4:34:06
  Speaker 8: you will actually see the effect of it upon the
• 4:34:08
  Speaker 8: other person. He will feel your strong mental atmosphere and
• 4:34:12
  Speaker 8: will cease to try to affect you. And even when
• 4:34:15
  Speaker 8: there is no special need for making the statement of power,
• 4:34:18
  Speaker 8: it will be well for you to keep it burning
• 4:34:20
  Speaker 8: bright within you, for by so doing you strengthen your realization,
• 4:34:25
  Speaker 8: and your mental atmosphere reflects the inner mental state. Special
• 4:34:30
  Speaker 8: mental atmospheres so much for the general mental atmosphere. As
• 4:34:35
  Speaker 8: we proceed, we shall see that the electromagnetic individual creates
• 4:34:39
  Speaker 8: special mental atmospheres around him by his mental states, depending
• 4:34:44
  Speaker 8: upon his will or desire at the time. Not only
• 4:34:48
  Speaker 8: does his will and desire affect other persons directly by
• 4:34:51
  Speaker 8: means of mental currents, but menative induction is also set
• 4:34:55
  Speaker 8: up by the mental atmosphere without any special effort on
• 4:34:59
  Speaker 8: his part. Maintain your positivity in this place, I wish
• 4:35:03
  Speaker 8: to call your attention to the importance of always maintaining
• 4:35:07
  Speaker 8: your positivity as a means of mental training. Do not
• 4:35:10
  Speaker 8: allow yourself to become negative to others, even where there
• 4:35:14
  Speaker 8: is nothing lost by doing so, For by this neglect
• 4:35:17
  Speaker 8: you create a negative habit which will cause you trouble
• 4:35:20
  Speaker 8: to overcome later. If a person comes into your presence
• 4:35:24
  Speaker 8: whose personality seems likely to dominate or overpower yours by
• 4:35:29
  Speaker 8: all means, interpose a mental resistance right then and there.
• 4:35:33
  Speaker 8: It is not necessary for you to manifest the same
• 4:35:35
  Speaker 8: in words, for that would make you ridiculous in many cases.
• 4:35:39
  Speaker 8: Nor is it necessary for you to give any special
• 4:35:42
  Speaker 8: physical expression to your mental state. Simply look the person
• 4:35:45
  Speaker 8: in the eye carelessly and without any special effort. At
• 4:35:49
  Speaker 8: the same time making the mental statement I am a
• 4:35:52
  Speaker 8: living electromagnet, and you will find that your positivity will
• 4:35:56
  Speaker 8: rise until it is equal with his, and your feeling
• 4:35:59
  Speaker 8: of negativity will disappear. In exceptional cases, you may add mentally,
• 4:36:04
  Speaker 8: I am as positive as you how to create positive auras?
• 4:36:10
  Speaker 8: It will be well for you to practice the creation
• 4:36:12
  Speaker 8: of special mental atmospheres in order to establish the habit
• 4:36:16
  Speaker 8: and thus render it easier to avail yourself of the
• 4:36:19
  Speaker 8: same on special occasions. Opportunities of all kinds will present
• 4:36:23
  Speaker 8: themselves to you in everyday life. The gist of the
• 4:36:27
  Speaker 8: matter is to surround yourself with a mental aura of
• 4:36:30
  Speaker 8: such a nature that people will act toward you as
• 4:36:33
  Speaker 8: you wish them to do. A few examples may help
• 4:36:36
  Speaker 8: you to get a clearer idea of what I mean,
• 4:36:39
  Speaker 8: so I herewith give you the same. An interesting example,
• 4:36:44
  Speaker 8: I know a lady living in Chicago who was constantly
• 4:36:47
  Speaker 8: complaining that people were always running over her on State Street,
• 4:36:52
  Speaker 8: the crowded retail street of the great Western metropolis. She
• 4:36:55
  Speaker 8: said that they were always crowding her off the sidewalk
• 4:36:58
  Speaker 8: and pushing, bumping, in joing her in a most annoying manner.
• 4:37:02
  Speaker 8: She asked me for instructions as to what thought she
• 4:37:05
  Speaker 8: should use to prevent individuals from so acting. I answered
• 4:37:09
  Speaker 8: that I did not think it was necessary to consider
• 4:37:11
  Speaker 8: the separate individuals in the case, but that she should
• 4:37:15
  Speaker 8: treat the crowd as a whole by means of a
• 4:37:18
  Speaker 8: protective mental atmosphere. I then advised her to build up
• 4:37:22
  Speaker 8: a mental atmosphere around this statement, people respect my rights.
• 4:37:27
  Speaker 8: They will not unduly impose on me in the street.
• 4:37:30
  Speaker 8: I deny the power of the crowd to impose on me.
• 4:37:34
  Speaker 8: And she followed this advice and in a short time
• 4:37:37
  Speaker 8: had built up a protective mental atmosphere which acted almost
• 4:37:40
  Speaker 8: magically upon the crowd, who stepped aside and gave her
• 4:37:44
  Speaker 8: a full right of way on the pavement. She would
• 4:37:47
  Speaker 8: simply go on her way, calmly, serenely, and undisturbed, and
• 4:37:51
  Speaker 8: the crowd let her alone. I must add that I
• 4:37:54
  Speaker 8: think that the original trouble arose from a subconscious dislike
• 4:37:58
  Speaker 8: to the crowds and an extreme shrinking from people, the
• 4:38:02
  Speaker 8: result being that this dislike acted almost as does fear,
• 4:38:06
  Speaker 8: and really attracted to her the inference of people. The
• 4:38:10
  Speaker 8: new mental atmosphere dispelled the old one and gave her
• 4:38:13
  Speaker 8: an additional positivity beside fear as an attracting force. In
• 4:38:19
  Speaker 8: this connection, I would call your attention to that remarkable
• 4:38:22
  Speaker 8: psychological fact that fear acts as an attracting force in
• 4:38:26
  Speaker 8: a negative way. If you want a thing very much,
• 4:38:30
  Speaker 8: you attract it to you, and if you fear it
• 4:38:33
  Speaker 8: very much, you do likewise. This apparent contradiction has bothered
• 4:38:37
  Speaker 8: many students of the subject, but it seems very plain
• 4:38:40
  Speaker 8: to me. I think the explanation is that in both cases,
• 4:38:44
  Speaker 8: a vivid mental picture is held and the attraction results
• 4:38:48
  Speaker 8: along the line of visualization, which always tends to materialize
• 4:38:53
  Speaker 8: the mental image. Do you see what I mean? Think
• 4:38:57
  Speaker 8: over it a bit and you will see it plainly
• 4:39:00
  Speaker 8: the transformation of a human doormat. Another case, from actual experience,
• 4:39:06
  Speaker 8: another lady, also a resident of Chicago, complained that the
• 4:39:10
  Speaker 8: clerks in the Great department stores would not treat her courteously,
• 4:39:14
  Speaker 8: but would keep her waiting without paying her any attention,
• 4:39:17
  Speaker 8: and in other ways would treat her like a human doormat.
• 4:39:21
  Speaker 8: She said she would not have minded this so much
• 4:39:23
  Speaker 8: if other women were treated likewise, but that while she
• 4:39:27
  Speaker 8: was ignored, others would receive the greatest attention, the clerks
• 4:39:31
  Speaker 8: falling over themselves to wait upon them. I told her
• 4:39:34
  Speaker 8: that she had gradually built up around her a mental
• 4:39:37
  Speaker 8: atmosphere of expectancy, that she had fallen into the habit
• 4:39:41
  Speaker 8: of expecting such treatment, and consequently she got what she expected.
• 4:39:46
  Speaker 8: I think that in the beginning she had manifested a timid, humble,
• 4:39:50
  Speaker 8: meek worm of the dust state of mind when she
• 4:39:53
  Speaker 8: entered the big stores, which somewhat overawed her, and then
• 4:39:57
  Speaker 8: after this drew upon her the neglect of the clerk works,
• 4:40:00
  Speaker 8: who seem very ready to wipe their feet on human
• 4:40:02
  Speaker 8: door mats. She grew to regularly expect the shabby treatment.
• 4:40:07
  Speaker 8: It was not a matter of dress or anything of
• 4:40:09
  Speaker 8: that kind, for she dressed well, And for that matter,
• 4:40:13
  Speaker 8: I know women who dress poorly who never got any
• 4:40:15
  Speaker 8: such treatment, for they understand the underlying mental laws too well.
• 4:40:20
  Speaker 8: For that. It was simply a matter of a negative
• 4:40:23
  Speaker 8: mental atmosphere. As many of you will clearly see how
• 4:40:27
  Speaker 8: the change occurred. Well, I told her to brace up
• 4:40:31
  Speaker 8: and create a new mental atmosphere around this general statement.
• 4:40:35
  Speaker 8: The clerks like me. They liked to wait on me.
• 4:40:38
  Speaker 8: They give me every attention. They do this because they
• 4:40:42
  Speaker 8: like me, and also because I insist upon it as
• 4:40:45
  Speaker 8: my right. The charm worked in a short time, and
• 4:40:49
  Speaker 8: now the good lady reports that the clerks not only
• 4:40:52
  Speaker 8: treat her well, but even take the trouble to call
• 4:40:55
  Speaker 8: her attention to desirable selections, special bargains, and all the
• 4:40:59
  Speaker 8: rest of it. The cure was perfect. An analysis, I
• 4:41:04
  Speaker 8: call your attention to the above statement. Please note that
• 4:41:07
  Speaker 8: the first part of it operated along the lines of
• 4:41:10
  Speaker 8: desire force, and the latter part along the lines of
• 4:41:14
  Speaker 8: will power. The statement of the first mentioned lady, the
• 4:41:17
  Speaker 8: one who objected to street crowding, was altogether along the
• 4:41:21
  Speaker 8: lines of will power. I asked the students to study
• 4:41:25
  Speaker 8: and dissect each of these cases, because by doing so
• 4:41:28
  Speaker 8: they will be able to apply the principles in cases
• 4:41:31
  Speaker 8: coming under their own observation, and also in their own
• 4:41:34
  Speaker 8: cases direct personal influence. In the last chapter, I spoke
• 4:41:40
  Speaker 8: of the effect of mental atmospheres with which people may
• 4:41:43
  Speaker 8: indue surround themselves. You will notice that in my discussion
• 4:41:47
  Speaker 8: of that part of the subject, I spoke only of
• 4:41:49
  Speaker 8: the general influence exerted upon others, and not of the
• 4:41:53
  Speaker 8: direct personal influence exerted by one man upon another in
• 4:41:57
  Speaker 8: personal intercourse. The present chap in those following it shall
• 4:42:02
  Speaker 8: be devoted to the part of the subject just referred to,
• 4:42:05
  Speaker 8: the direct personal influence, the silent mental conflict. As I
• 4:42:10
  Speaker 8: have told you elsewhere, every time two people meet, there
• 4:42:13
  Speaker 8: ensues a silent mental conflict or struggle for supremacy, from
• 4:42:18
  Speaker 8: which one or the other emerges a victor, and which
• 4:42:21
  Speaker 8: victory is fully recognized by both of the parties to
• 4:42:24
  Speaker 8: the preceding. The mental struggle is usually the combat between
• 4:42:28
  Speaker 8: the general mental powers of the two, without regard to
• 4:42:31
  Speaker 8: special mental states induced at the time. But the man
• 4:42:35
  Speaker 8: who is skilled in the art of mental fascination goes
• 4:42:38
  Speaker 8: further than this, for he recognizes that he may concentrate
• 4:42:42
  Speaker 8: his menative energy into different shape and form, and focus
• 4:42:46
  Speaker 8: the force of his mental imagery direct upon the other
• 4:42:50
  Speaker 8: person with such force and power that the second person
• 4:42:53
  Speaker 8: will have a similar mental state induced in him along
• 4:42:57
  Speaker 8: the lines familiar to the students of this book, the
• 4:43:01
  Speaker 8: lines of operation. This direct personal influence operates along the
• 4:43:06
  Speaker 8: lines of both desire, force and will power. Of course,
• 4:43:10
  Speaker 8: I have explained elsewhere how the will power may be
• 4:43:12
  Speaker 8: used to awaken desire in another, and how it may
• 4:43:16
  Speaker 8: also capture the will of the second person. I have
• 4:43:19
  Speaker 8: also explained how desire force induces a similar desire in
• 4:43:23
  Speaker 8: the second person, and also how it is often used
• 4:43:27
  Speaker 8: to captivate the will of the other person. It is
• 4:43:30
  Speaker 8: not necessary for me to repeat these things. You are
• 4:43:33
  Speaker 8: supposed to be fully acquainted with them from your study
• 4:43:36
  Speaker 8: of this book and mental magic, and so I shall
• 4:43:38
  Speaker 8: proceed to a consideration of the instruments of expression of
• 4:43:42
  Speaker 8: personal influence and the methods usually employed by those using it,
• 4:43:47
  Speaker 8: the instruments of expression. These instruments of expression may be
• 4:43:52
  Speaker 8: classified as follows. One suggestive instruments, consisting of a the
• 4:43:59
  Speaker 8: suggestion of manner and be the suggestive tone, and c
• 4:44:04
  Speaker 8: the suggestive word. Two the instrument of the eye, three
• 4:44:10
  Speaker 8: the instrument of the touch. And all of these three
• 4:44:14
  Speaker 8: forms are, of course merely the instruments by which and
• 4:44:17
  Speaker 8: through which the mind expresses itself the channel through which
• 4:44:21
  Speaker 8: pours the manative energy. Let us consider them in the
• 4:44:25
  Speaker 8: above order suggestive instruments. I will ask you now to
• 4:44:30
  Speaker 8: turn to my chapter on mental suggestion in my work
• 4:44:33
  Speaker 8: on Mental Magic. You will see therein stated the active
• 4:44:37
  Speaker 8: principles of mental suggestion, with which you should thoroughly familiarize yourself,
• 4:44:42
  Speaker 8: for I shall not repeat the instructions in this book.
• 4:44:46
  Speaker 8: You will see there that suggestion is the outward symbol
• 4:44:49
  Speaker 8: of the inward mental state, and that it is the
• 4:44:52
  Speaker 8: inner state that gives vitality to the suggestion. Get this
• 4:44:56
  Speaker 8: idea fixed firmly in your mind, and always think of
• 4:44:59
  Speaker 8: the behind the suggestion. I have explained to you also
• 4:45:04
  Speaker 8: that when one receives a suggestion through a physical agent,
• 4:45:07
  Speaker 8: he has induced in himself the mental state corresponding to
• 4:45:11
  Speaker 8: the one originating that physical suggestion. For example, if you
• 4:45:15
  Speaker 8: feel yourself filled with confidence, energy and fearlessness, your outward
• 4:45:20
  Speaker 8: appearance will reflect that inner state, and the outer appearance
• 4:45:24
  Speaker 8: will become a suggestion to others. These others will instinctively
• 4:45:28
  Speaker 8: feel that your inner state is as I have stated,
• 4:45:32
  Speaker 8: and this being so, a physical suggestion made stronger than
• 4:45:35
  Speaker 8: usual will produce a deeper impression on others than would
• 4:45:39
  Speaker 8: any ordinary suggestion the suggestive manner. In view of the above,
• 4:45:45
  Speaker 8: you will see why it is that those familiar with
• 4:45:48
  Speaker 8: the subject deem it important to cultivate the suggestive instruments,
• 4:45:52
  Speaker 8: Beginning with a the suggestive manner. You will see why
• 4:45:56
  Speaker 8: it is that we are impressed with the manner of
• 4:45:59
  Speaker 8: a man who manifest energy, self confidence, and power in
• 4:46:03
  Speaker 8: every motion, and also why we have confidence in a
• 4:46:06
  Speaker 8: man whose manner indicates that he is a person used
• 4:46:09
  Speaker 8: to being trusted by others, accustomed to having confidence reposed
• 4:46:13
  Speaker 8: in him. And so I might mention hundreds of examples
• 4:46:17
  Speaker 8: tending to show that if a man's manner conveys the
• 4:46:20
  Speaker 8: impression that he is used to being treated in a
• 4:46:23
  Speaker 8: certain way, and that he is accustomed to acting in
• 4:46:26
  Speaker 8: a certain way, we are very apt to accept the
• 4:46:29
  Speaker 8: suggestion of manner and fall into line with the rest
• 4:46:32
  Speaker 8: of people. And if the man happens to be a
• 4:46:35
  Speaker 8: good actor, we may be imposed upon and fooled by
• 4:46:38
  Speaker 8: his suggestive manner. The rule works both ways. Not only
• 4:46:44
  Speaker 8: does this law hold good in the case of the
• 4:46:46
  Speaker 8: manner and appearance of success, strength, confidence, et cetera, but
• 4:46:50
  Speaker 8: it also operates along the lines of the appearance and
• 4:46:53
  Speaker 8: manner of failure, weakness, and distrust. Do you not know
• 4:46:58
  Speaker 8: of cases wherein you have felt that certain persons were
• 4:47:01
  Speaker 8: not worthy of confidence or were not to be depended upon,
• 4:47:04
  Speaker 8: where strength of character was required or were not likely
• 4:47:08
  Speaker 8: to succeed. Of course you have, and you acted upon
• 4:47:12
  Speaker 8: the suggestion too. An illustration. In illustrating this point, I
• 4:47:17
  Speaker 8: have frequently used the illustration of the two dogs, the
• 4:47:20
  Speaker 8: one carrying himself in a manner betokening self respect and
• 4:47:24
  Speaker 8: an ability to prevent and resent undue liberties, and the
• 4:47:28
  Speaker 8: other carrying his tail between his legs in a manner
• 4:47:32
  Speaker 8: and appearance indicating that he expected to be kicked and cuffed.
• 4:47:36
  Speaker 8: The first dog is almost invariably treated with respect, even
• 4:47:40
  Speaker 8: by the most mischievous youngsters, while the second one almost
• 4:47:44
  Speaker 8: always invites to himself the kicks, tin cans and brick
• 4:47:47
  Speaker 8: bats of the young hoodlums of the neighborhood. And this
• 4:47:51
  Speaker 8: illustration is as true in the case of people as
• 4:47:54
  Speaker 8: in the case of dogs. Better take the hint how
• 4:47:57
  Speaker 8: to acquire this manner? But you may, I say, how
• 4:48:00
  Speaker 8: is one to acquire the proper suggestive manner? My answer
• 4:48:04
  Speaker 8: is that there is but one sure way, and that
• 4:48:07
  Speaker 8: is to begin to think out the part, visualize it,
• 4:48:11
  Speaker 8: and act it out. You will see the philosophy of
• 4:48:14
  Speaker 8: this in my lesson on mental architecture, in my work
• 4:48:17
  Speaker 8: on mental magic. In other words, if you wish to
• 4:48:21
  Speaker 8: convey a suggestive manner of confidence, you must begin to
• 4:48:25
  Speaker 8: think confidence from morning until night, and you must also
• 4:48:30
  Speaker 8: begin to visualize confidence when you have the chance to
• 4:48:33
  Speaker 8: do so. That is, you must make a mental picture
• 4:48:36
  Speaker 8: of yourself as manifesting confidence, and you must also begin
• 4:48:40
  Speaker 8: to act out the part acting out your part. Now,
• 4:48:45
  Speaker 8: about this acting out, I would say that I mean
• 4:48:48
  Speaker 8: not only the playing the part in your interviews with people,
• 4:48:52
  Speaker 8: but I also mean an actual series of rehearsals in private,
• 4:48:56
  Speaker 8: just as you would do if you were preparing to
• 4:48:59
  Speaker 8: play a part on the stage in public, you must
• 4:49:02
  Speaker 8: form a mental image of how you would look and
• 4:49:05
  Speaker 8: act if you were filled with confidence and were approaching people.
• 4:49:09
  Speaker 8: You will find that practice will improve you very much
• 4:49:12
  Speaker 8: in this way, and that you will soon acquire a
• 4:49:15
  Speaker 8: manner that will be like second nature and will really
• 4:49:19
  Speaker 8: serve to give the suggestion of your manner to others
• 4:49:23
  Speaker 8: with whom you come in contact. And more than this,
• 4:49:26
  Speaker 8: it will actually tend to build up confidence in yourself.
• 4:49:30
  Speaker 8: Imagine yourself as approaching strange people, and then act out
• 4:49:34
  Speaker 8: the part the best you know how, improving a little
• 4:49:37
  Speaker 8: in ease and smoothness of action. Each day, think of
• 4:49:42
  Speaker 8: how the actor on the stage impresses you, and then
• 4:49:45
  Speaker 8: remember that the manner was acquired by constant practice and work,
• 4:49:50
  Speaker 8: and you may do the same, and may manage to
• 4:49:53
  Speaker 8: impress other people just as the actor does you. And
• 4:49:57
  Speaker 8: what is true in the case of confidence is true
• 4:50:00
  Speaker 8: regarding any character that you wish to play. Any and
• 4:50:03
  Speaker 8: all characters may be played out in this way, and
• 4:50:07
  Speaker 8: an appearance and manner acquired which will give the suggestion
• 4:50:10
  Speaker 8: to others. I wish I could make you realize how
• 4:50:14
  Speaker 8: much there is in this method. If you could realize
• 4:50:17
  Speaker 8: how some men have used it to acquire qualities that
• 4:50:20
  Speaker 8: have enabled them to prey upon the public, you would
• 4:50:23
  Speaker 8: realize how important it might be for you for legitimate
• 4:50:27
  Speaker 8: and honorable use. Practice makes perfect. In this acting out,
• 4:50:32
  Speaker 8: you must remember that the practice will make you so
• 4:50:34
  Speaker 8: perfect that the part will appear natural when you play
• 4:50:37
  Speaker 8: it in public. But without practice, an attempt to play
• 4:50:41
  Speaker 8: it in public will make one ridiculous. Remember the illustration
• 4:50:45
  Speaker 8: of the real actor, and you will have the secret
• 4:50:48
  Speaker 8: of acting out. And also remember this that in the
• 4:50:51
  Speaker 8: measure that you throw your mind into the part, so
• 4:50:54
  Speaker 8: will be your success. When you practice. You must throw
• 4:50:58
  Speaker 8: your mind into the acting, just as you would if
• 4:51:01
  Speaker 8: you were in earnest. It is the mind back of
• 4:51:04
  Speaker 8: it all. Remember the suggestive tone. The suggestive instrument is
• 4:51:10
  Speaker 8: the suggestive tone. This too may be acquired by acting out.
• 4:51:15
  Speaker 8: You must practice until you are able to express your
• 4:51:17
  Speaker 8: meaning with feeling that all who hear may be impressed.
• 4:51:22
  Speaker 8: You should begin your practice by choosing some simple words
• 4:51:25
  Speaker 8: in every day use good morning, for instance. Try it
• 4:51:29
  Speaker 8: now and see how roughly, clumsily and crudely you give
• 4:51:32
  Speaker 8: the morning greeting. Then try to imagine that you are
• 4:51:36
  Speaker 8: full of good, cheer, energy and brightness, and then throw
• 4:51:39
  Speaker 8: your feeling into your good morning, and see how different
• 4:51:43
  Speaker 8: it seems. Practice this a while, and you will soon
• 4:51:46
  Speaker 8: acquire a natural, cheery, bright and invigorating tone when you
• 4:51:50
  Speaker 8: say good morning. You will not need a teacher in
• 4:51:54
  Speaker 8: elocution to tell you how to do this. Try to
• 4:51:57
  Speaker 8: feel the part and you will express it naturally. Make
• 4:52:01
  Speaker 8: your feelings more flexible, and your tones will reflect them.
• 4:52:05
  Speaker 8: After you have mastered the simpler terms of expression, work
• 4:52:09
  Speaker 8: up to larger sentences and speeches. Try them on the
• 4:52:13
  Speaker 8: chairs in your room, in imagining that people are seated
• 4:52:16
  Speaker 8: therein speak to them feelingly and with expression. Until you
• 4:52:20
  Speaker 8: acquire the art, you will not realize how much you
• 4:52:24
  Speaker 8: may gain by such practice until you actually try it.
• 4:52:27
  Speaker 8: I wish that you could hear the testimony of some
• 4:52:30
  Speaker 8: people to whom I have taught this thing the importance
• 4:52:34
  Speaker 8: of it. There is nothing more important in personal influence
• 4:52:38
  Speaker 8: than a good suggestive tone. Think of the people that
• 4:52:41
  Speaker 8: you know, and then remember what an influence their voices
• 4:52:44
  Speaker 8: have on you, not only the quality of the voice,
• 4:52:47
  Speaker 8: but the tone. You readily recognize the difference between the
• 4:52:51
  Speaker 8: tone of the hesitating, timid, self doubting person and that
• 4:52:55
  Speaker 8: of the confident, self reliant individual. There is a subtle
• 4:52:59
  Speaker 8: vibration of the tone of the latter that causes one
• 4:53:02
  Speaker 8: to feel confidence and respect, and which exects obedience in
• 4:53:06
  Speaker 8: a quiet, calm way, devoid of bluster or rant. Read
• 4:53:10
  Speaker 8: what I have said on this subject in my lesson
• 4:53:13
  Speaker 8: on personal influence, in my work on mental magic, examples
• 4:53:18
  Speaker 8: of its use. If you will read the part of
• 4:53:21
  Speaker 8: the present book dealing with psychological experimentation, you will see
• 4:53:25
  Speaker 8: that much depends upon the tone. You will see that
• 4:53:28
  Speaker 8: when you say to a subject, you can't the tone
• 4:53:32
  Speaker 8: in which you say can't goes a long way toward
• 4:53:35
  Speaker 8: producing the response. And so it is with the suggestive tone.
• 4:53:39
  Speaker 8: No matter what it is made to express, it always
• 4:53:43
  Speaker 8: impresses upon one that the speaker using it means what
• 4:53:46
  Speaker 8: he says. And that is why many public men practice
• 4:53:49
  Speaker 8: year after year in mastering this instrument of influence, the
• 4:53:53
  Speaker 8: suggestive tone. Again, I would refer you to the example
• 4:53:57
  Speaker 8: of the actor. See how he manages to throw feeling
• 4:54:00
  Speaker 8: into his tone, and you may do likewise if you
• 4:54:03
  Speaker 8: will but practice in earnest and throw your mind into
• 4:54:06
  Speaker 8: the work. Think of the thing you wish to express,
• 4:54:09
  Speaker 8: visualize it, and then act it out in your tone.
• 4:54:13
  Speaker 8: You will be surprised at the rapid progress that you
• 4:54:15
  Speaker 8: will make. Remember, always, though the tone is but the
• 4:54:19
  Speaker 8: instrument of expression of the mind back of it. Use nerves,
• 4:54:24
  Speaker 8: not muscles. Many people make the mistake of speaking with
• 4:54:28
  Speaker 8: the muscles instead of with their nerves, as one writer
• 4:54:32
  Speaker 8: has expressed it. In other words, they seem to throw
• 4:54:35
  Speaker 8: muscular force into their tones instead of nervous energy, and
• 4:54:39
  Speaker 8: in so doing they make a great mistake, for the
• 4:54:42
  Speaker 8: former has a dull, non penetrating effect, whereas the latter
• 4:54:47
  Speaker 8: vibrates subtly and reaches the feeling part of one's mind.
• 4:54:51
  Speaker 8: Feel Feel feel when you wish to speak impressively, and
• 4:54:55
  Speaker 8: your tones will reflect the same and induce a corresponding
• 4:54:59
  Speaker 8: feeling in it others the suggestive word. The third form
• 4:55:04
  Speaker 8: of the suggestive instrument is the suggestive word. I may
• 4:55:09
  Speaker 8: be able to explain this more clearly when I call
• 4:55:11
  Speaker 8: your attention to the fact that each word is a
• 4:55:14
  Speaker 8: crystallized In every word, there is an imprisoned thought. And
• 4:55:19
  Speaker 8: when you lodge a word in the mind of another person,
• 4:55:22
  Speaker 8: the crystal covering is dissolved and the released thought manifests itself.
• 4:55:27
  Speaker 8: And this being so, it becomes important for one to
• 4:55:29
  Speaker 8: carefully choose the crystallized thoughts or words which he wishes
• 4:55:34
  Speaker 8: to implant in the mind of another. I have spoken
• 4:55:37
  Speaker 8: of this in my larger work, in my lesson on
• 4:55:40
  Speaker 8: mental suggestion, to which I refer you, But I wish
• 4:55:44
  Speaker 8: here to say to you again that you should study
• 4:55:47
  Speaker 8: words until you are able to distinguish between those which
• 4:55:51
  Speaker 8: carry a live, active, feeling thought and those less strong. Examples.
• 4:55:57
  Speaker 8: Take the word strong, for instance, does it not make
• 4:56:00
  Speaker 8: you feel strength when you hear it? Forcibly and feelingly pronounced.
• 4:56:05
  Speaker 8: Take the word kind and see what feelings it arouses
• 4:56:09
  Speaker 8: in you. Pronounce the words lion and lamb, and see
• 4:56:14
  Speaker 8: the different feelings you experience from the differing sounds. Take
• 4:56:18
  Speaker 8: the word crash and see how it suggests the crashing, crunching, tearing,
• 4:56:23
  Speaker 8: startling thing for which it stands. Compare the sound of
• 4:56:28
  Speaker 8: the words rough and smooth, and you will see what
• 4:56:31
  Speaker 8: I mean. The only way that I can point out
• 4:56:34
  Speaker 8: to you to acquire the use of suggestive words is
• 4:56:38
  Speaker 8: to study words themselves. Listen to the words used by
• 4:56:42
  Speaker 8: others and note their effect on you. Take a small
• 4:56:45
  Speaker 8: dictionary and run over its pages, and you will soon
• 4:56:48
  Speaker 8: have a collection of good, strong, effective terms for handy
• 4:56:52
  Speaker 8: use when occasion demands. A man does not have to
• 4:56:55
  Speaker 8: be highly educated in the usual sense of that term
• 4:56:59
  Speaker 8: in order to use strong suggestive words. Some instinctively choose
• 4:57:04
  Speaker 8: vital words charged with feeling, and such make their words felt.
• 4:57:09
  Speaker 8: Think over this matter nutshell instructions and the use of
• 4:57:14
  Speaker 8: all the three suggestive instruments. Remember that the object is
• 4:57:18
  Speaker 8: to make others feel the mental state you are expressing.
• 4:57:22
  Speaker 8: That is the whole thing in a nutshell I expression. Next,
• 4:57:29
  Speaker 8: in order in our list of instruments of mentative expression.
• 4:57:32
  Speaker 8: Is the eye, that most wonderful of all the human organs,
• 4:57:37
  Speaker 8: and which is as much an instrument for all the
• 4:57:40
  Speaker 8: expression of mentative force as it is an instrument for
• 4:57:44
  Speaker 8: receiving the sense impression of sight. Let us consider it
• 4:57:48
  Speaker 8: in its former aspect, the eye as a suggestive instrument.
• 4:57:54
  Speaker 8: In the first place, the eye is one of the
• 4:57:56
  Speaker 8: most potent and effective instruments of suggestion. Although I have
• 4:58:01
  Speaker 8: not included it in that class, the expression of the
• 4:58:04
  Speaker 8: eye will induce mental conditions in others along the lines
• 4:58:08
  Speaker 8: of suggestion, and those who understand and have mastered this
• 4:58:12
  Speaker 8: art of using the eyes have at their disposal a
• 4:58:16
  Speaker 8: wonderful instrument of suggestive influence. Those of us who have
• 4:58:21
  Speaker 8: ever met a very magnetic man or a charming and
• 4:58:24
  Speaker 8: fascinating woman have carried away with us a lively recollection
• 4:58:29
  Speaker 8: of the expression of the eyes of such a person.
• 4:58:33
  Speaker 8: Actors and public speakers, as well as those whose business
• 4:58:37
  Speaker 8: it is to meet and impress people, often make a
• 4:58:39
  Speaker 8: close study of eye impression in order to produce a
• 4:58:43
  Speaker 8: heightened effect along these lines. While this phase of the
• 4:58:46
  Speaker 8: subject belongs more properly to the various schools of expression
• 4:58:51
  Speaker 8: in various parts of the country. It may be worth
• 4:58:54
  Speaker 8: while to pause a moment and examine some of the
• 4:58:56
  Speaker 8: leading principles of this art of eye expression, considered without
• 4:59:01
  Speaker 8: reference to the phase of menative energy. Exercises in eye
• 4:59:06
  Speaker 8: expression begin by studying your eyes in a mirror. You
• 4:59:11
  Speaker 8: will see that in the center of the eyeball there
• 4:59:13
  Speaker 8: is a black spot. This is called the pupil of
• 4:59:15
  Speaker 8: the eye. The larger circle surrounding the pupil is called
• 4:59:19
  Speaker 8: the iris. The white of the eye surrounds the iris.
• 4:59:23
  Speaker 8: The upper eyelid moving over the eyeball produces a variety
• 4:59:27
  Speaker 8: of expressions, each giving to the face a totally different
• 4:59:30
  Speaker 8: appearance expression of suggestive meaning. We all recognize the meaning
• 4:59:36
  Speaker 8: of these different expressions, but very few of us understand
• 4:59:40
  Speaker 8: the mechanism producing the expression. Standing before your mirror, study
• 4:59:45
  Speaker 8: these various expressions. The following exercises may help you. Eyelid exercises. One,
• 4:59:53
  Speaker 8: hold the upper eyelid in such a position that its
• 4:59:57
  Speaker 8: edge rests half way between the pupil and top of
• 5:00:00
  Speaker 8: the iris. This gives an expression of calmness. Two, rest
• 5:00:05
  Speaker 8: the edge of the upper eyelid at the top of
• 5:00:08
  Speaker 8: the pupil. This gives an expression of indifference. Three, the
• 5:00:14
  Speaker 8: edge of the eyelid resting at the top of the
• 5:00:16
  Speaker 8: iris gives an expression of strong interest. Four the edge
• 5:00:21
  Speaker 8: of the eyelid resting halfway over the pupil gives an
• 5:00:24
  Speaker 8: expression of deep thought. Five the edge of the eyelid
• 5:00:29
  Speaker 8: resting just above the edge of the iris, and thus
• 5:00:33
  Speaker 8: showing a narrow strip of white between the edge of
• 5:00:35
  Speaker 8: the lid and the edge of the iris, gives an
• 5:00:38
  Speaker 8: expression of emotional activity. Six The above position exaggerated so
• 5:00:45
  Speaker 8: as to show as much of the white as possible
• 5:00:48
  Speaker 8: between the edge of the iris and the edge of
• 5:00:50
  Speaker 8: the lid, will give an expression of emotional excitement. How
• 5:00:56
  Speaker 8: to practice the exercises. Teachers of the article expression instruct
• 5:01:01
  Speaker 8: their pupils to practice the above expressions and positions. They
• 5:01:05
  Speaker 8: find that with a little practice, nearly everyone may easily
• 5:01:08
  Speaker 8: acquire the art of expression in the first four exercises,
• 5:01:12
  Speaker 8: but that the last two are more difficult of acquirement.
• 5:01:16
  Speaker 8: The last exercise, emotional excitement, especially, is found to be
• 5:01:21
  Speaker 8: quite difficult at attainment, and teachers claim that but a
• 5:01:25
  Speaker 8: small percentage are able to produce the expression without considerable practice,
• 5:01:31
  Speaker 8: practice these movements until you can reproduce them without the
• 5:01:35
  Speaker 8: aid of the mirror, just as a man may learn
• 5:01:37
  Speaker 8: to shave without a mirror by constant practice before one.
• 5:01:42
  Speaker 8: The exercises will not only enable you to express the
• 5:01:45
  Speaker 8: different mental states easily and freely, but will also tend
• 5:01:49
  Speaker 8: to strengthen the muscles and nerves of the eyes themselves,
• 5:01:52
  Speaker 8: providing that you proceed gradually and do not overtask the
• 5:01:57
  Speaker 8: eyes at the beginning. Do not scale or contract the
• 5:02:00
  Speaker 8: brows in the practices. A few minutes at a time
• 5:02:04
  Speaker 8: is all that you should use in practicing the seventh exercise.
• 5:02:10
  Speaker 8: When you have mastered the above exercises, especially numbers five
• 5:02:14
  Speaker 8: and six, you may try the following, which is the
• 5:02:17
  Speaker 8: most difficult of all seven. Rest the eyelid in the
• 5:02:22
  Speaker 8: position of strong interest number three, and then, at the
• 5:02:26
  Speaker 8: same time lift the edge of the under lid to
• 5:02:29
  Speaker 8: the lower edge of the pupil. This position gives the
• 5:02:33
  Speaker 8: expression of close scrutiny the power of expression. You will
• 5:02:40
  Speaker 8: be surprised at the added power of expression that the
• 5:02:43
  Speaker 8: careful practice of the above exercises will give you. You
• 5:02:46
  Speaker 8: will be able to manifest more suggestive feeling and will
• 5:02:50
  Speaker 8: induce emotional states of feeling in others. A little practice
• 5:02:54
  Speaker 8: will give you such convincing proof of this that you
• 5:02:57
  Speaker 8: will not need urging to further perfect yourself in them.
• 5:03:01
  Speaker 8: The expressions of emotional activity and emotional excitement especially, will
• 5:03:06
  Speaker 8: produce a startling result if used on appropriate occasions when
• 5:03:10
  Speaker 8: you wish to exhibit the appearance of the deepest emotional
• 5:03:14
  Speaker 8: excitement and force development exercises. The following development exercises are
• 5:03:23
  Speaker 8: highly recommended by teachers who have devoted years of study
• 5:03:26
  Speaker 8: and practice along these lines. One open the eyes quite widely,
• 5:03:32
  Speaker 8: but not so widely as to strain them, and hold
• 5:03:35
  Speaker 8: them in that position for a few seconds, gazing into
• 5:03:38
  Speaker 8: your mirror, which must be directly in front of you,
• 5:03:41
  Speaker 8: on a level with your eyes. While gazing, open them
• 5:03:44
  Speaker 8: a trifle wider still without straining, and throw an intense
• 5:03:49
  Speaker 8: expression into them. Do not move the eyebrows, but allow
• 5:03:52
  Speaker 8: them to remain normal. Two. Resume the above position, and
• 5:03:57
  Speaker 8: then change to the expression of strong interest see previous
• 5:04:01
  Speaker 8: exercises looking at yourself in the glass just as you
• 5:04:05
  Speaker 8: would and looking at another person with that expression. Three
• 5:04:10
  Speaker 8: resume position one, and then gradually change to the expression
• 5:04:15
  Speaker 8: of emotional activity. See previous exercises gazing at yourself in
• 5:04:20
  Speaker 8: the mirror. Four Resume position one, and then gradually changed
• 5:04:26
  Speaker 8: to the expression of emotional excitement. See previous exercises gazing
• 5:04:31
  Speaker 8: at yourself in the mirror. Five Resume position one, and
• 5:04:35
  Speaker 8: then gradually change to the expression of close scrutiny See
• 5:04:40
  Speaker 8: previous exercises gazing at yourself in the mirror. In the
• 5:04:45
  Speaker 8: above exercises, you must act as if the reflection of
• 5:04:49
  Speaker 8: yourself in the mirror were in reality another person whom
• 5:04:52
  Speaker 8: you wished to influence. The better you act the south,
• 5:04:56
  Speaker 8: the better your results will be. Six. Practice the expression
• 5:05:01
  Speaker 8: of strong interest on persons to whom you are listening
• 5:05:04
  Speaker 8: until you feel that you have awakened a response in them.
• 5:05:07
  Speaker 8: I may add that the expression of deep interest consists
• 5:05:11
  Speaker 8: of but the same expression heightened by more feeling behind it,
• 5:05:16
  Speaker 8: and the expression of loving interest is the same, only
• 5:05:20
  Speaker 8: more so. This more feeling may be either real or assumed,
• 5:05:25
  Speaker 8: as in the case of the good actor. Seven. Practice
• 5:05:30
  Speaker 8: the expression of close scrutiny upon other persons upon appropriate
• 5:05:34
  Speaker 8: occasions in which you desire to appear as taking a
• 5:05:37
  Speaker 8: deep critical interest in some proposition undertaking theory, et cetera.
• 5:05:44
  Speaker 8: Many persons have built up a reputation for being good
• 5:05:47
  Speaker 8: listeners and keen observers by this practice. I mention it
• 5:05:52
  Speaker 8: for what it may be worth to you. I am
• 5:05:55
  Speaker 8: merely giving you the rules of the game, not necessarily
• 5:05:59
  Speaker 8: advising you to play it.
• 5:06:01
  Speaker 9: Mental Fascination by William Walker Atkinson. And now I have
• 5:06:06
  Speaker 9: reached the part of my subject in which I must
• 5:06:08
  Speaker 9: speak of the power of the eye to convey manative force.
• 5:06:13
  Speaker 9: Owing to some law of nervous mechanism not fully understood
• 5:06:16
  Speaker 9: as yet, the eye is one of the most effective
• 5:06:18
  Speaker 9: mediums for the passage of menative currents from one person
• 5:06:21
  Speaker 9: to another. I shall not attempt to indulge in any
• 5:06:24
  Speaker 9: special theory on the subject, but shall proceed to the
• 5:06:27
  Speaker 9: description of the facts of the case. I may add, however,
• 5:06:31
  Speaker 9: that advanced occultist inform us that portions of the human
• 5:06:35
  Speaker 9: brain during a manifestation or strong emotional effort or exercise
• 5:06:39
  Speaker 9: of will, resembles an incandescent surface, glowing and phosphorescent, and
• 5:06:45
  Speaker 9: that also there are seeing great beams of this incandescent
• 5:06:49
  Speaker 9: energy streaming out out from the eyes of the person
• 5:06:54
  Speaker 9: and reaching the mind of other persons. And more than this,
• 5:06:58
  Speaker 9: these beams of energy transmit mental state thoughts, et cetera
• 5:07:02
  Speaker 9: of the person. Just as scientists have found that beams
• 5:07:04
  Speaker 9: of light will carry waves of electricity and have thus
• 5:07:08
  Speaker 9: been able to send telegraphic and even telephonic messages over
• 5:07:13
  Speaker 9: such beams of light, menative beams of energy. One who
• 5:07:17
  Speaker 9: has mastered the fascination of the eye is able to
• 5:07:20
  Speaker 9: convey most readily to others the mentative currents which tend
• 5:07:24
  Speaker 9: to produce similar mental states by menative induction, as explained
• 5:07:29
  Speaker 9: elsewhere in this book and in Mental magic. If you
• 5:07:32
  Speaker 9: will but remember the above illustration of the beam of light,
• 5:07:36
  Speaker 9: along with the electric and magnetic currents travel and will
• 5:07:39
  Speaker 9: form a mental picture of these mentative beams from the eye,
• 5:07:42
  Speaker 9: you will understand the process much better, and you will,
• 5:07:45
  Speaker 9: at the same time tend to give to your own
• 5:07:48
  Speaker 9: mentative beams a substantial reality along the lines of visualization.
• 5:07:54
  Speaker 9: That is, when you wish to use these mentative beams,
• 5:07:57
  Speaker 9: you should imagine them as actually existing in full force
• 5:08:01
  Speaker 9: and reality. This will tend to cause to give them
• 5:08:05
  Speaker 9: a material reality and thus render them a highly efficient
• 5:08:10
  Speaker 9: medium for the passage of your menative currents the fascinating gaze,
• 5:08:15
  Speaker 9: And now right here is the best place to instruct
• 5:08:17
  Speaker 9: you in the proper use of the eye in what
• 5:08:19
  Speaker 9: has been called the magnetic gaze, but which would be
• 5:08:23
  Speaker 9: more properly styled the fascinating gaze. There has been much
• 5:08:28
  Speaker 9: nonsense written on this subject, and in some of my
• 5:08:31
  Speaker 9: own earlier writings I gave directions along these lines, which
• 5:08:34
  Speaker 9: I am now able to replace with more approved methods
• 5:08:37
  Speaker 9: and later discoveries coming from the study and experimentation of
• 5:08:41
  Speaker 9: myself and others. Along these lines. I am willing to
• 5:08:45
  Speaker 9: improve upon my own methods as well as upon those
• 5:08:47
  Speaker 9: of others. I have no false pride upon this subject,
• 5:08:50
  Speaker 9: and if tomorrow I find that I can improve upon
• 5:08:53
  Speaker 9: my work of to day, I will do so and
• 5:08:55
  Speaker 9: give my students the benefit of the change, instead of
• 5:08:58
  Speaker 9: stubbornly sticking to it just because I had once stated
• 5:09:02
  Speaker 9: a theory, fact or result. There is no standing still
• 5:09:06
  Speaker 9: in scientific work. He who stands still really goes backward.
• 5:09:11
  Speaker 9: The former method. The former instructions regarding the magnetic gaze
• 5:09:15
  Speaker 9: told the student to concentrate his gaze at the root
• 5:09:18
  Speaker 9: of the nose of the other person, that is right
• 5:09:21
  Speaker 9: between his two eyes. Now, this was all very well,
• 5:09:24
  Speaker 9: but there is a far better plan. This Focusing the
• 5:09:27
  Speaker 9: gaze between the eyes of the other person really results
• 5:09:30
  Speaker 9: in crossing your gaze and thus robbing it of a
• 5:09:33
  Speaker 9: portion of the direct electromagnetic power that it possesses. You
• 5:09:37
  Speaker 9: may prove this by holding up a pencil before your
• 5:09:40
  Speaker 9: eyes and focusing your eyes upon it as you jar
• 5:09:43
  Speaker 9: it nearer and nearer to your eyes. The nearer you
• 5:09:46
  Speaker 9: get to the pencil or to the other person, the
• 5:09:49
  Speaker 9: more will your gaze be crossed and the effect impaired.
• 5:09:53
  Speaker 9: A gaze from a pair of crossed eyes is not
• 5:09:55
  Speaker 9: nearly so fascinating as one from a pair of straight eyes,
• 5:09:58
  Speaker 9: giving out a direct, forceful impression. The new method, the
• 5:10:03
  Speaker 9: new fascinating gaze, is performed as follows. You do not
• 5:10:07
  Speaker 9: focus your gaze at a point between the two eyes
• 5:10:09
  Speaker 9: of the other person, but instead you gaze directly and
• 5:10:13
  Speaker 9: straightly into his two eyes with your two eyes. You
• 5:10:16
  Speaker 9: will find this difficult and tiring if you perform it
• 5:10:20
  Speaker 9: in the ordinary way, and herein lies the secret. Instead
• 5:10:24
  Speaker 9: of focusing your eyes upon his as if you really
• 5:10:26
  Speaker 9: wish to see the color of his eyes, you might
• 5:10:28
  Speaker 9: so focus your eyes that you are really gazing through him,
• 5:10:33
  Speaker 9: as if you were transparent, and you wish to see
• 5:10:35
  Speaker 9: something beyond him. A little practice before a mirror will
• 5:10:39
  Speaker 9: show you what I mean better than I can explain
• 5:10:42
  Speaker 9: it to you in words. Practice at gazing through objects
• 5:10:46
  Speaker 9: will aid you in acquiring this gaze. Try, for instance,
• 5:10:49
  Speaker 9: focusing your eyes upon the wall opposite you as you
• 5:10:52
  Speaker 9: raise your eyes from this page. Then, as you look
• 5:10:55
  Speaker 9: at the wall, slowly pass your hand before your eyes
• 5:10:58
  Speaker 9: at a distance of about two feet, but don't change
• 5:11:02
  Speaker 9: your focus. Don't see the hand plainly, but keep your
• 5:11:05
  Speaker 9: gaze focused on the wall as if you could see
• 5:11:08
  Speaker 9: it through the hand. How to practice this case must
• 5:11:13
  Speaker 9: not consist of a blank, vacant, stupid state, but must
• 5:11:16
  Speaker 9: be intense and earnest. Practice on objects as above stated,
• 5:11:21
  Speaker 9: and with your mirror will aid you in perfecting the gaze.
• 5:11:25
  Speaker 9: It will help you if you have some friend with
• 5:11:27
  Speaker 9: whom you can practice the effect upon others. The other
• 5:11:31
  Speaker 9: person will not be aware that you are not seeing
• 5:11:34
  Speaker 9: him and are gazing through him. To him, it will
• 5:11:37
  Speaker 9: appear that you are giving him a very deep, intense, steady,
• 5:11:39
  Speaker 9: earnest glance. He will see your pupils dilate as they
• 5:11:43
  Speaker 9: always do when looking at a distant object, and your
• 5:11:46
  Speaker 9: expression will be one of calm, serene power. It does
• 5:11:50
  Speaker 9: not tire the eyes. And another important point about this
• 5:11:54
  Speaker 9: gaze is that you may maintain it a long time
• 5:11:57
  Speaker 9: without tiring the eyes, and without the eye watering or blinking.
• 5:12:02
  Speaker 9: You may outstair another person or animal in this way
• 5:12:05
  Speaker 9: without fatigue, while the other's eyes grow tired and weak.
• 5:12:10
  Speaker 9: So much is this true that the results of my
• 5:12:12
  Speaker 9: own investigation of the subject have convinced me that the
• 5:12:15
  Speaker 9: animals who manifest the fascinating gaze as mentioned in the
• 5:12:18
  Speaker 9: previous chapter really focus their eyes beyond the object in
• 5:12:23
  Speaker 9: just this way. If ever, you get a chance to
• 5:12:26
  Speaker 9: observe an animal fascinating another, you will see that I
• 5:12:30
  Speaker 9: am right in this theory. The scientific explanation this gazing
• 5:12:35
  Speaker 9: through the other person is accomplished by a certain accommodation
• 5:12:38
  Speaker 9: of the eye, as oculist and opticians call it. And
• 5:12:41
  Speaker 9: while you are performing it, you cannot examine distinctly or
• 5:12:44
  Speaker 9: see distinctly the eyes of the other person because your
• 5:12:47
  Speaker 9: focus is different. To show you why you are able
• 5:12:50
  Speaker 9: to maintain this caze such a long time without tiring
• 5:12:53
  Speaker 9: your eyes. I would remind you of the case with
• 5:12:55
  Speaker 9: which you may maintain the expression of being wrapped in thought,
• 5:13:00
  Speaker 9: lost in a brown study, just thinking about things, et cetera,
• 5:13:05
  Speaker 9: with which you all are familiar. In such a mental state,
• 5:13:09
  Speaker 9: you're able to gaze into space for a long time
• 5:13:12
  Speaker 9: without the slightest fatigue, while a few seconds focusing your
• 5:13:16
  Speaker 9: eyes upon a nearby subject will tire them very much. Indeed,
• 5:13:20
  Speaker 9: and then again, you know how long you are able
• 5:13:22
  Speaker 9: to gaze at an object far out at sea, or
• 5:13:25
  Speaker 9: far across the desert, or far down or across the
• 5:13:28
  Speaker 9: mountain without tiring your eyes. The whole secret is that
• 5:13:32
  Speaker 9: short range focusing upon an object tires the eyes much
• 5:13:37
  Speaker 9: more than does long range gazing into space. This being
• 5:13:41
  Speaker 9: the case, it will tire you far less seeing through
• 5:13:45
  Speaker 9: a person than gazing at him and seeing him at
• 5:13:48
  Speaker 9: a short range. Rules for practice in practicing the maintaining
• 5:13:53
  Speaker 9: of the gaze for a long time, I would advise
• 5:13:55
  Speaker 9: against tiring the eyes by gazing at short range objects.
• 5:13:58
  Speaker 9: Better practice at game at distant objects until you are
• 5:14:02
  Speaker 9: able to maintain the gaze a long time, as you
• 5:14:05
  Speaker 9: will be able to do after a little practice In fact,
• 5:14:08
  Speaker 9: I advise you to practice the gazing into space, because
• 5:14:11
  Speaker 9: proficiency in that will enable you to perfect the fascinating gaze.
• 5:14:16
  Speaker 9: After you have practices gazing through method a bit, you
• 5:14:20
  Speaker 9: will be able to look at an object a couple
• 5:14:22
  Speaker 9: of feet away and gaze right through it. And that
• 5:14:25
  Speaker 9: is you will not consciously see it objectively, although apparently
• 5:14:30
  Speaker 9: staring hard at it. Make haste, slowly, avoid all exercising
• 5:14:38
  Speaker 9: tiring the eyes, and proceeds slowly working from trifling successes
• 5:14:42
  Speaker 9: to more important ones. You will be surprised how a
• 5:14:44
  Speaker 9: little intelligent practice along these lines will give you a
• 5:14:48
  Speaker 9: penetrating glance, firm, earnest, and full of magnetism and fascination,
• 5:14:53
  Speaker 9: without the slightest sense of strain, fatigue, or effort. You
• 5:14:57
  Speaker 9: have long wished for such an expression. Here it is
• 5:15:01
  Speaker 9: for you.
• 5:15:03
  Speaker 8: The use of the mentative instruments in the use of
• 5:15:07
  Speaker 8: the eyes for the purpose of conveying mentative currents. You
• 5:15:11
  Speaker 8: should always remember that the feeling is the real power
• 5:15:14
  Speaker 8: behind these currents of force, and that the brain is
• 5:15:18
  Speaker 8: the dynamo from which the currents originate. The brain, you know,
• 5:15:23
  Speaker 8: is the great transformer or converter of the menative energy
• 5:15:28
  Speaker 8: and acts just as does a dynamo in the direction
• 5:15:32
  Speaker 8: of sending forth great waves of force. Consequently, if you
• 5:15:36
  Speaker 8: wish to send out mentative currents for the purpose of
• 5:15:39
  Speaker 8: inducing feeling in others, you must first have feeling generated
• 5:15:43
  Speaker 8: in your mental dynamo. Valuable exercises, it will be well
• 5:15:48
  Speaker 8: for two people to practice the eye exercises together, but
• 5:15:52
  Speaker 8: in the absence of a friend in whom you have confidence,
• 5:15:55
  Speaker 8: you may obtain excellent results by practicing before your friendly mirror.
• 5:16:00
  Speaker 8: In either case, you must first arouse in your mind
• 5:16:03
  Speaker 8: the feeling that you wish to express in mentative currents.
• 5:16:07
  Speaker 8: Put your feeling into your glance, and it will be felt.
• 5:16:12
  Speaker 8: Exercise one, Look into the eyes of your friend or
• 5:16:15
  Speaker 8: your own in the mirror, and then say, mentally, I
• 5:16:19
  Speaker 8: am stronger than you. Throw into your glance as much
• 5:16:22
  Speaker 8: of the feeling of strength as you can. Exercise two
• 5:16:27
  Speaker 8: say mentally, I am more positive than you. I am
• 5:16:31
  Speaker 8: out gazing you, throwing as much positivity as possible into
• 5:16:37
  Speaker 8: your gaze, the same being inspired, of course by your feeling.
• 5:16:42
  Speaker 8: Exercise three, say and feel you are afraid of me,
• 5:16:47
  Speaker 8: I am making you feel my strength, throwing the feeling
• 5:16:51
  Speaker 8: into your gaze actual practice. After you have acquired the
• 5:16:57
  Speaker 8: faculty of making your strength felt by the exercises, you
• 5:17:01
  Speaker 8: may use same upon other people when the occasion renders
• 5:17:05
  Speaker 8: it advisable. If you are addressed by some person whom
• 5:17:09
  Speaker 8: you think is trying to master you menatively, or whose
• 5:17:13
  Speaker 8: strong influence you wish to ward off, you may use
• 5:17:16
  Speaker 8: the above method on him. As a rule, the person
• 5:17:20
  Speaker 8: who is doing the talking has a slight advantage over
• 5:17:22
  Speaker 8: the listener, all else being equal, the speaker is the
• 5:17:27
  Speaker 8: more positive because he is expressing more energy. But you
• 5:17:31
  Speaker 8: may counteract this if you are the listener by simply
• 5:17:34
  Speaker 8: sending him a glance accompanied by the feeling of I
• 5:17:38
  Speaker 8: scatter your force into bits you cannot affect me. Points
• 5:17:44
  Speaker 8: of practice in resisting an attack of this sort, keep
• 5:17:47
  Speaker 8: your mouth closed with the teeth touching, for this bite
• 5:17:52
  Speaker 8: denotes strength and firmness and brings into play the parts
• 5:17:56
  Speaker 8: of the brain manifesting these qualities, and thus charges your
• 5:17:59
  Speaker 8: manative currents with these feelings. At the same time, gaze
• 5:18:04
  Speaker 8: firmly and steadily into the eyes of the other, using
• 5:18:08
  Speaker 8: the fascinating gaze. I would bid you remember my remarks
• 5:18:12
  Speaker 8: and mental magic about the person standing having the advantage
• 5:18:17
  Speaker 8: of the one sitting avoid the sitting position when the
• 5:18:20
  Speaker 8: other person is standing. Do not give him this advantage,
• 5:18:24
  Speaker 8: but take it for yourself if you can. Mental commands
• 5:18:28
  Speaker 8: and refusals. In speaking to persons and requesting them to
• 5:18:33
  Speaker 8: do something, you should accompany the verbal request by a
• 5:18:36
  Speaker 8: mental command. For instance, if you say you will do
• 5:18:40
  Speaker 8: this for me, won't you? This is the suggestive form
• 5:18:44
  Speaker 8: of questioning. Remember you should accompany the question with the
• 5:18:49
  Speaker 8: command made mentally, with the proper glance you will do this.
• 5:18:55
  Speaker 8: If you are the person requested to do something that
• 5:18:58
  Speaker 8: you do not wish to do, you should answer no,
• 5:19:01
  Speaker 8: I do not care to do this, or I do
• 5:19:04
  Speaker 8: not see my way clear to do it, or I
• 5:19:08
  Speaker 8: am unable to oblige you, et cetera, et cetera. But
• 5:19:13
  Speaker 8: at the same time you must send the mental answer
• 5:19:16
  Speaker 8: with its accompanying glance, I will not do it, and
• 5:19:19
  Speaker 8: you cannot make me certain dangerous teaching. A well known
• 5:19:25
  Speaker 8: teacher along these lines several years ago taught his pupils
• 5:19:29
  Speaker 8: to gaze into the eyes of persons whom they wished
• 5:19:31
  Speaker 8: to affect, at the same time saying mentally, I am
• 5:19:35
  Speaker 8: looking at you. I am looking through your eyes into
• 5:19:38
  Speaker 8: your brain. My willpower is stronger than yours. You are
• 5:19:42
  Speaker 8: under my control. I will compel you to do what
• 5:19:45
  Speaker 8: I wish. You must do what I say. You shall
• 5:19:48
  Speaker 8: do this, Do it at once. It will readily be
• 5:19:52
  Speaker 8: seen that this will generate a powerful mentative current if
• 5:19:56
  Speaker 8: there is a sufficiently strong feeling, will and disaire behind it.
• 5:20:01
  Speaker 8: But right here I shall give you an antidote for
• 5:20:04
  Speaker 8: this kind of influence. In all cases where you are
• 5:20:07
  Speaker 8: attacked mentally in this way, you may dissolve the force
• 5:20:11
  Speaker 8: by a positive denial. The positive denial, the positive denial
• 5:20:17
  Speaker 8: is the powerful force that scatters into tiny bits, the
• 5:20:20
  Speaker 8: force directed against one. It is a destructive agent, just
• 5:20:25
  Speaker 8: as is the positive statement a constructive or creative one.
• 5:20:30
  Speaker 8: One who understands the scientific use of this destructive force
• 5:20:34
  Speaker 8: may undo the mentative work of others to a surprising degree.
• 5:20:38
  Speaker 8: Someday I shall have more to say regarding these two
• 5:20:41
  Speaker 8: warring forces along the broader lines of the entire subject
• 5:20:45
  Speaker 8: of telementation. But at present I shall confine myself to
• 5:20:49
  Speaker 8: their use in personal influence. By a strong positive denial,
• 5:20:54
  Speaker 8: you may scatter and disintegrate any mentative influence directed against you.
• 5:21:00
  Speaker 8: This formula will give you a general idea of it.
• 5:21:04
  Speaker 8: Suppose that you are repelling a statement such as given above.
• 5:21:08
  Speaker 8: In that case, you should say mentally accompanying it with
• 5:21:11
  Speaker 8: the proper glance, with feeling back of it, I deny
• 5:21:16
  Speaker 8: positively your power over me. I deny it out of existence.
• 5:21:21
  Speaker 8: I will not do your bidding, and I deny your
• 5:21:24
  Speaker 8: right and power to command me. I deny your power,
• 5:21:28
  Speaker 8: and I affirm my own. How to cultivate this power?
• 5:21:35
  Speaker 8: You may cultivate this power to use the positive denial
• 5:21:38
  Speaker 8: by practicing on an imaginary person whom you may suppose
• 5:21:42
  Speaker 8: is trying to influence you. Imagine the strong, positive person
• 5:21:46
  Speaker 8: before you trying to influence you, and then start in
• 5:21:50
  Speaker 8: to practice the positive denial on him until you feel
• 5:21:53
  Speaker 8: that you have beaten him off and have sent him
• 5:21:56
  Speaker 8: flying away in retreat. These imaginary mental battles will develop
• 5:22:01
  Speaker 8: a great power of menative resistance in you, and I
• 5:22:05
  Speaker 8: advise you to strengthen yourself along these lines. If you
• 5:22:09
  Speaker 8: feel that you are weak, you may improve on the
• 5:22:12
  Speaker 8: above exercise by imagining that after your enemy is in
• 5:22:16
  Speaker 8: full retreat, you follow him up and poor statement after
• 5:22:20
  Speaker 8: statement into him, changing your position from a defender into
• 5:22:24
  Speaker 8: an attacking force. The secret of effective speaking. In personal
• 5:22:29
  Speaker 8: conversation with another you will find it of the greatest
• 5:22:32
  Speaker 8: value to see as clearly as possible a mental picture, chart,
• 5:22:36
  Speaker 8: or map of what you are saying to him. By
• 5:22:39
  Speaker 8: so doing, you will impress most forcibly upon his mind
• 5:22:43
  Speaker 8: that which you wish him to see and feel. In
• 5:22:46
  Speaker 8: this statement is compressed the secret of effective speaking. In
• 5:22:52
  Speaker 8: the degree that you see and feel the thought that
• 5:22:55
  Speaker 8: you are expressing in words will be the degree of
• 5:22:58
  Speaker 8: impression made upon and mentative induction produced in the other person.
• 5:23:04
  Speaker 8: The secret, of course, lies in the law of visualization,
• 5:23:07
  Speaker 8: as explained in Mental Magic, and in this book Psychological Experiments.
• 5:23:14
  Speaker 8: You may find an evidence of your increasing mentative influence
• 5:23:18
  Speaker 8: by trying the physiological experiment of willing people to move
• 5:23:22
  Speaker 8: this way or that way by gazing intently at them.
• 5:23:26
  Speaker 8: In this experiment, it is not necessary for you to
• 5:23:29
  Speaker 8: gaze into their eyes. Gazing at their back, preferably at
• 5:23:33
  Speaker 8: the upper part of the neck at the base of
• 5:23:35
  Speaker 8: the brain, will answer. You may try willing persons to
• 5:23:39
  Speaker 8: look around on the street or in public places, et cetera,
• 5:23:43
  Speaker 8: or you may will that they turn to the right
• 5:23:46
  Speaker 8: or left of you when approaching each other on the
• 5:23:49
  Speaker 8: street or in stores. You may will that a certain
• 5:23:52
  Speaker 8: clerk from out of a number will step forward to
• 5:23:55
  Speaker 8: wait upon you. These and many similar experiments have an
• 5:23:59
  Speaker 8: interest to the majority of students, and are accomplished with
• 5:24:03
  Speaker 8: comparative ease after sufficient practice. The whole theory and practice
• 5:24:08
  Speaker 8: consist of a steady gaze and the mental command and
• 5:24:12
  Speaker 8: will that the person will act so and so, together
• 5:24:15
  Speaker 8: with the earnest expectation that they will obey the command
• 5:24:19
  Speaker 8: and the mental picture of their doing. So that is
• 5:24:22
  Speaker 8: all there is to it. General advice and the use
• 5:24:27
  Speaker 8: of the eye as a menative instrument. Remember, first, last,
• 5:24:31
  Speaker 8: and all the time that desire and will are the
• 5:24:35
  Speaker 8: phases of the mentative energy, and that in the degree
• 5:24:38
  Speaker 8: that desire is kindled and will is exerted, so will
• 5:24:42
  Speaker 8: be the power expressed by yourself and impressed upon others.
• 5:24:46
  Speaker 8: Read mental magic over a number of times until you
• 5:24:50
  Speaker 8: have fully grasped the underlying principles. Then reread the present
• 5:24:54
  Speaker 8: book and commit its exercises and instructions to memory. Then
• 5:24:59
  Speaker 8: practice frequently and perfect yourself and the methods pointed out.
• 5:25:03
  Speaker 8: Until you render them second nature, you will be conscious
• 5:25:08
  Speaker 8: of a gradual growth and development along the lines of
• 5:25:11
  Speaker 8: mentative power and influence. The flame of electromagnetic power, once lit,
• 5:25:16
  Speaker 8: will never die out. Tend the flame carefully, keep the
• 5:25:20
  Speaker 8: trimmed clean, and fill the lamp with oil, and it
• 5:25:23
  Speaker 8: will ever burn bright and emit heat and light and power.
• 5:25:28
  Speaker 8: The magnetic touch. The last mentative instrument mentioned in a
• 5:25:32
  Speaker 8: previous chapter is the touch. There was a time in
• 5:25:36
  Speaker 8: my early stages of experimentation and psychological research when I
• 5:25:41
  Speaker 8: laughed at the idea of the touch playing any real
• 5:25:44
  Speaker 8: part in the work of mentative influence. Of course, I
• 5:25:47
  Speaker 8: saw the effect of the touch in certain phases of
• 5:25:50
  Speaker 8: psychological work, but I believe that it was all merely suggestion.
• 5:25:55
  Speaker 8: But I soon learned that the touch was really a
• 5:25:58
  Speaker 8: most potent instrument of mentative energy. I now explain it
• 5:26:02
  Speaker 8: by the idea of the nerves being like the wires
• 5:26:05
  Speaker 8: upon which the electric current travels. The brain is the
• 5:26:09
  Speaker 8: dynamo or converter of the energy. And while the latter
• 5:26:12
  Speaker 8: travels in waves and currents without any wires, just as
• 5:26:16
  Speaker 8: does the wave of the wireless telegraph. Still, if there
• 5:26:19
  Speaker 8: is a wire to be had. Then it follows the
• 5:26:22
  Speaker 8: lines of least resistance and takes the advantage of the
• 5:26:26
  Speaker 8: nerve wire. Certain parts of the body have nerve cells
• 5:26:31
  Speaker 8: very highly developed in them, and are in fact miniature brains.
• 5:26:35
  Speaker 8: In the cases of some persons of sensitive and trained touch,
• 5:26:39
  Speaker 8: there exist little clusters of nerve cells at the ends
• 5:26:42
  Speaker 8: of the fingers that act like miniature brains. The lips
• 5:26:46
  Speaker 8: are also highly developed in this respect, as the well
• 5:26:50
  Speaker 8: known phenomena of kissing evidences, the fingers in hand are
• 5:26:55
  Speaker 8: excellent polar mediums for conveying the manative energy that pours
• 5:26:59
  Speaker 8: down over the nerves from the brain and through which
• 5:27:03
  Speaker 8: it passes to the other person. How to use the
• 5:27:08
  Speaker 8: hands The use of the touch of the hands as
• 5:27:11
  Speaker 8: a channel for conveying mentative energy depends greatly upon the
• 5:27:15
  Speaker 8: development of the hands by the individual. Those who understand
• 5:27:19
  Speaker 8: this matter develop the conductivity of the hands by treating
• 5:27:23
  Speaker 8: them as follows. Think of your hands as excellent conductors
• 5:27:28
  Speaker 8: of mentative energy, and imagine that you can feel the
• 5:27:31
  Speaker 8: energy pouring down the nerves of your arms and out
• 5:27:34
  Speaker 8: your hands obeying your will. When you shake hands with people,
• 5:27:38
  Speaker 8: you will soon develop your hands to such a degree
• 5:27:41
  Speaker 8: that some sensitive persons will actually feel the current passing
• 5:27:45
  Speaker 8: into them. Always accompany the passage of the current with
• 5:27:49
  Speaker 8: the thought or feeling that you wish to induce in
• 5:27:51
  Speaker 8: the other person, just as you do when you use
• 5:27:54
  Speaker 8: the fascinating gaze. In fact, the gaze and the hand
• 5:27:58
  Speaker 8: clasp should be used together when possible, for by doing
• 5:28:02
  Speaker 8: so you double the effect the magnetic hand clasp. When
• 5:28:07
  Speaker 8: you shake hands with a person, throw mind and feeling
• 5:28:10
  Speaker 8: into it, and do not fall into the mechanical lifeless
• 5:28:14
  Speaker 8: method so common among people. Throw your feeling down to
• 5:28:18
  Speaker 8: your hand, and at the same time make a mental
• 5:28:20
  Speaker 8: command or statement appropriate to the case. For instance, grasp
• 5:28:25
  Speaker 8: the person's hand with feeling and interest, saying mentally at
• 5:28:29
  Speaker 8: the same time you like me. Then, when you draw
• 5:28:33
  Speaker 8: your hand away, if possible, let your fingers slide over
• 5:28:36
  Speaker 8: the palm of his hand in a caressing manner, allowing
• 5:28:40
  Speaker 8: his first finger to pass between your thumb and forefinger,
• 5:28:44
  Speaker 8: close up in the crotch of the thumb. Practice this
• 5:28:47
  Speaker 8: well until you can perform it without thinking of it,
• 5:28:51
  Speaker 8: that is, make it your natural way of shaking hands.
• 5:28:54
  Speaker 8: You will find that this method of shaking hands will
• 5:28:57
  Speaker 8: open up a new interest in people toward you, and
• 5:29:00
  Speaker 8: in other ways you will discover its advantage. You will
• 5:29:04
  Speaker 8: never know a fascinating person who did not have a
• 5:29:07
  Speaker 8: good hand clasp. It is a part of the fascinating personality.
• 5:29:13
  Speaker 8: Other uses of the hands. There are many persons well
• 5:29:17
  Speaker 8: grounded on the psychological principles underlying mental fascination, who use
• 5:29:21
  Speaker 8: the hands as a medium formentative energy without shaking hands.
• 5:29:26
  Speaker 8: For instance, they sit near the other person and place
• 5:29:29
  Speaker 8: their hands so that their fingers will point toward him.
• 5:29:32
  Speaker 8: At the same time, willing that the current flow through
• 5:29:36
  Speaker 8: the fingers and toward the other. They also use their
• 5:29:39
  Speaker 8: hands in conversation so as to have the tips of
• 5:29:42
  Speaker 8: their fingers pointing toward the other. This last plan becomes
• 5:29:46
  Speaker 8: highly effective when used with the appropriate gestures, for it
• 5:29:50
  Speaker 8: is akin to the mesmeric pass of the hands. In
• 5:29:54
  Speaker 8: this connection, I would say, beware of the person who
• 5:29:57
  Speaker 8: is always trying to put his hands on you, of
• 5:30:00
  Speaker 8: the pawing over process avoided in the ordinary way, if possible,
• 5:30:04
  Speaker 8: or else deliberately practice the positive denial toward the person
• 5:30:09
  Speaker 8: holding the idea and mental statement that I deny the
• 5:30:13
  Speaker 8: power of your magnetism. I scatter it by my denial.
• 5:30:18
  Speaker 8: A warning to women. In concluding this chapter, I would
• 5:30:22
  Speaker 8: especially caution young women and older ones for that matter,
• 5:30:26
  Speaker 8: against allowing men to be familiar with them in the
• 5:30:29
  Speaker 8: direction of holding hands or similar practices. Not only does
• 5:30:33
  Speaker 8: this familiarity breed contempt, but there are good psychological reasons
• 5:30:38
  Speaker 8: why the practice is to be condemned. You have seen
• 5:30:42
  Speaker 8: what part the hands play in magnetizing, as it is called,
• 5:30:46
  Speaker 8: and is it not clearly discernible how one may use
• 5:30:49
  Speaker 8: the hands in this petting and all that sort of
• 5:30:52
  Speaker 8: thing in order to psychologically affect another person. I am
• 5:30:56
  Speaker 8: not speaking now of the caresses indulged in by allnvulnerable
• 5:31:00
  Speaker 8: true lovers, for all the talk in the world would
• 5:31:03
  Speaker 8: not change that sort of thing. But I am alluding
• 5:31:06
  Speaker 8: to the indiscriminate pawing over on the part of strange
• 5:31:09
  Speaker 8: men that some young girls allow. There is a danger
• 5:31:12
  Speaker 8: in this sort of thing, and I want you to
• 5:31:14
  Speaker 8: know it. If you have daughters or young female relatives,
• 5:31:18
  Speaker 8: warn them against this thing and tell them the reasons why.
• 5:31:23
  Speaker 8: A caution to men, and the same thing is true
• 5:31:26
  Speaker 8: of the man who is always patting other men on
• 5:31:29
  Speaker 8: the shoulder or resting his arm around them, or else
• 5:31:32
  Speaker 8: taking hold of them in a friendly caressing way during
• 5:31:36
  Speaker 8: a conversation. Such men may not know the psychology of
• 5:31:40
  Speaker 8: the thing, but they have found out that this sort
• 5:31:43
  Speaker 8: of padding up makes other men more impressionable and amenable
• 5:31:47
  Speaker 8: to their influence, and so they practice it. Make them
• 5:31:51
  Speaker 8: stop it, either by moving away or by positive denial.
• 5:31:56
  Speaker 8: The protective armor now once more the power of this
• 5:32:01
  Speaker 8: positive denial as a disperser and disintegrator of adverse influence.
• 5:32:07
  Speaker 8: If this book taught you nothing else, it would still
• 5:32:09
  Speaker 8: be with while to you because of this one point
• 5:32:12
  Speaker 8: of instruction for this positive denial is a menative armor
• 5:32:17
  Speaker 8: that will protect you, a menative sword that will defend you,
• 5:32:21
  Speaker 8: a menative lightning flash that will clear the mental atmosphere.
• 5:32:25
  Speaker 8: Learn the secretive positive statement and positive denial, and your
• 5:32:29
  Speaker 8: clad in an invulnerable armor and armed with the weapon
• 5:32:33
  Speaker 8: of strength. And so you may, like the warrior bold,
• 5:32:37
  Speaker 8: go gayly to the fray. May the victory be yours.
• 5:32:41
  Speaker 8: Concluding instruction, We have now reached the end of our
• 5:32:46
  Speaker 8: consideration of the subject of mental fascination in this book,
• 5:32:50
  Speaker 8: but you have reached only the beginning of the subject.
• 5:32:53
  Speaker 8: When you close these pages, for the real subject rests
• 5:32:56
  Speaker 8: in the action of the principles in real life the
• 5:33:01
  Speaker 8: effect of the instruction. Though you may not feel disposed
• 5:33:05
  Speaker 8: to put into operation much of the instruction given herein,
• 5:33:08
  Speaker 8: yet from your very acquaintance with what has been taught
• 5:33:11
  Speaker 8: in these pages, you will be compelled to see the
• 5:33:14
  Speaker 8: operation of the principles in the every day life around you.
• 5:33:19
  Speaker 8: You will see them in operation on every side, now
• 5:33:22
  Speaker 8: that you are familiar with their laws of operation, and
• 5:33:25
  Speaker 8: you will find yourself instinctively guarding against its influence, just
• 5:33:29
  Speaker 8: as you would guard against a threatened physical blow. And
• 5:33:32
  Speaker 8: you will be surprised and perhaps pained sometimes at seeing
• 5:33:36
  Speaker 8: people trying to influence you in this way whom you
• 5:33:39
  Speaker 8: would not have suspected of doing so. On the whole,
• 5:33:43
  Speaker 8: you will be a much stronger man or woman by
• 5:33:46
  Speaker 8: reason of the information herein given you, and you will
• 5:33:49
  Speaker 8: have the advantage of knowing how to resist, defeat, and
• 5:33:52
  Speaker 8: dispel the adverse influences that may be used to influence you.
• 5:33:57
  Speaker 8: Remember the assertion of the positive will and the use
• 5:34:00
  Speaker 8: of the positive denial additional information. There is one thing
• 5:34:06
  Speaker 8: more that I wish to call your attention to before closing,
• 5:34:10
  Speaker 8: although strictly speaking it forms part of the subject of
• 5:34:13
  Speaker 8: telemental influence rather than that of mental fascination. I have
• 5:34:19
  Speaker 8: mentioned this matter in my work on mental magic. In
• 5:34:22
  Speaker 8: my lesson on the Science of Telementation, I allude to
• 5:34:27
  Speaker 8: the use of telementation for the purpose of mental fascination,
• 5:34:31
  Speaker 8: which is performed by some persons who have become acquainted
• 5:34:34
  Speaker 8: with the subject distant fascination. The person wishing to influence
• 5:34:41
  Speaker 8: another at a distance, just as he would in the
• 5:34:43
  Speaker 8: case of personal interview, forms a mental image of the
• 5:34:47
  Speaker 8: person whom he wishes to influence, and then proceeds just
• 5:34:51
  Speaker 8: as if the person was actually before him, according to
• 5:34:54
  Speaker 8: the methods mentioned in this book, I know of at
• 5:34:58
  Speaker 8: least one teacher who advises his students to treat prospective
• 5:35:01
  Speaker 8: customers and others with whom they expect to have dealings
• 5:35:05
  Speaker 8: or relations as follows. Imagine your prospective customer or other
• 5:35:10
  Speaker 8: person as seated in a chair before you which you
• 5:35:12
  Speaker 8: are standing. Make the imagined picture as strong as possible,
• 5:35:17
  Speaker 8: for upon this depends your success. Then proceed to treat
• 5:35:22
  Speaker 8: the person just as you would if he were actually present.
• 5:35:26
  Speaker 8: Concentrate your will upon him, and tell him just what
• 5:35:29
  Speaker 8: you expect to tell him when you meet him. Use
• 5:35:33
  Speaker 8: all of the arguments that you can think of, and
• 5:35:35
  Speaker 8: at the same time hold the thought that he must
• 5:35:37
  Speaker 8: do as you say. Try to imagine him as complying
• 5:35:41
  Speaker 8: with your wishes in every respect, for this imagining will
• 5:35:45
  Speaker 8: tend to come true when you really meet the person.
• 5:35:48
  Speaker 8: This rule may be used not only in the case
• 5:35:51
  Speaker 8: of prospective customers, but also in the cases of persons
• 5:35:54
  Speaker 8: whom you wish to influence in any way whatsoever, How
• 5:35:59
  Speaker 8: to counteract the influence? Now, all this is very plain
• 5:36:02
  Speaker 8: to the student of this book and of my work
• 5:36:05
  Speaker 8: on mental magic, for the principles employed are familiar to
• 5:36:08
  Speaker 8: my students. The result of a practice like the above
• 5:36:11
  Speaker 8: would undoubtedly tend to clear a menative path in the
• 5:36:15
  Speaker 8: other person's mind and make easier the effect of a
• 5:36:18
  Speaker 8: subsequent interview. For the other person would be thus accustomed
• 5:36:23
  Speaker 8: to the idea of thought or feeling, and the work
• 5:36:25
  Speaker 8: of clearing away the mental underbrush would be done in advance.
• 5:36:29
  Speaker 8: But fortunately for us all we have the antidote for
• 5:36:32
  Speaker 8: this bane. If we have acquainted ourselves with the underlying
• 5:36:36
  Speaker 8: principles of the subject so important do I regard this
• 5:36:40
  Speaker 8: matter of self protection against this telemental influencing that I
• 5:36:45
  Speaker 8: propose adding to my remarks on the subject several paragraphs
• 5:36:48
  Speaker 8: from my book on Mental Magic, which, although you have
• 5:36:52
  Speaker 8: already read them, should appear right in this place in
• 5:36:55
  Speaker 8: order to be impressed upon your mind and connection with
• 5:36:59
  Speaker 8: what I have just said, I want you all to
• 5:37:02
  Speaker 8: read again what I have said on this subject of
• 5:37:04
  Speaker 8: self protection. So here is the reproduction of a few
• 5:37:08
  Speaker 8: rules to use on occasions when you think that someone
• 5:37:11
  Speaker 8: is trying to treat or influence you better study them carefully.
• 5:37:16
  Speaker 8: Here they are valuable rules. One in the first place,
• 5:37:21
  Speaker 8: steady your mind and calm your feelings. Then pause for
• 5:37:25
  Speaker 8: a moment and say the words I am calmly and forcibly.
• 5:37:30
  Speaker 8: At the same time, forming a mental picture of yourself
• 5:37:33
  Speaker 8: as a center of force and power in the great
• 5:37:36
  Speaker 8: ocean of mind. See yourself as standing alone and full
• 5:37:40
  Speaker 8: of power. Then mentally form a picture of your aura
• 5:37:44
  Speaker 8: extending about a yard on all sides of you in
• 5:37:47
  Speaker 8: an egg shaped form. See that this aura is charged
• 5:37:52
  Speaker 8: with your will power, which is flowing outward, repelling any
• 5:37:56
  Speaker 8: adverse mental suggestions that are being sent to you and
• 5:38:00
  Speaker 8: causing them to fly back to the source from whence
• 5:38:02
  Speaker 8: they came. A little practice will enable you to perfect
• 5:38:07
  Speaker 8: this picture, which will greatly aid you in creating a strong,
• 5:38:11
  Speaker 8: positive aura of will, which will prove to be a
• 5:38:14
  Speaker 8: magnetic armor and shield. It has helped many. I assert
• 5:38:19
  Speaker 8: my individuality as a center of force, power and being.
• 5:38:24
  Speaker 8: Nothing can adversely affect me. My mind is mine own,
• 5:38:29
  Speaker 8: and I refuse admittance to unwelcome suggestions for influences. My
• 5:38:34
  Speaker 8: desires are my own, and refuse to admit undesirable variations
• 5:38:39
  Speaker 8: by induction or otherwise. My will is my own, and
• 5:38:43
  Speaker 8: I charge it with power to beat off and repel
• 5:38:46
  Speaker 8: all undesirable influences. I am surrounded by an aura of
• 5:38:51
  Speaker 8: positive will which protects me absolutely. A useful denial the
• 5:38:57
  Speaker 8: following denial has proved of the great greatest value to many.
• 5:39:02
  Speaker 8: I deny to all or any the power to influence
• 5:39:05
  Speaker 8: me against my best interest. I am my own master.
• 5:39:11
  Speaker 8: These words may seem simple, but if you will use them,
• 5:39:14
  Speaker 8: you will be surprised at their efficacy. You realize, of course,
• 5:39:19
  Speaker 8: that it is the mental state aroused by the words
• 5:39:21
  Speaker 8: that does the work, rather than any special virtue. In
• 5:39:25
  Speaker 8: the words themselves guard against impulses. Two, guard yourself from
• 5:39:32
  Speaker 8: acting upon impulses. When you feel a sudden or unaccountable
• 5:39:36
  Speaker 8: impulse to do this thing or that thing, stop and
• 5:39:40
  Speaker 8: assert your positive individuality, and then drive out all outside
• 5:39:45
  Speaker 8: influences by repeating the affirmations et cetera given above, and
• 5:39:50
  Speaker 8: by creating the proper mental picture. Then, when you have
• 5:39:54
  Speaker 8: recovered your balance, consider the impulse and decide whether it
• 5:39:58
  Speaker 8: is to your best interests or otherwise. You will be
• 5:40:02
  Speaker 8: able to see this clearly by reason of your mental
• 5:40:05
  Speaker 8: house cleaning a moment before. Then, if the impulse seems
• 5:40:10
  Speaker 8: to be against your best interests, drive it from you,
• 5:40:13
  Speaker 8: saying I drive you away from me, you do not
• 5:40:16
  Speaker 8: belong to me, return to those who sent you, or
• 5:40:19
  Speaker 8: other words to that effect. This may be rendered more
• 5:40:23
  Speaker 8: forceful if you will but create a mental picture of
• 5:40:26
  Speaker 8: the discarded idea flying away from you in the shape
• 5:40:29
  Speaker 8: of a tiny thought wave. These mental pictures aid one
• 5:40:33
  Speaker 8: very materially in such matters, both in the sending forth
• 5:40:37
  Speaker 8: of an idea as well as in the discarding of one.
• 5:40:41
  Speaker 8: The positive ara. Three, cultivate the picture and idea of
• 5:40:45
  Speaker 8: a positive ara, and always think of yourself as being
• 5:40:50
  Speaker 8: encased in such a one see yourself as a strong
• 5:40:53
  Speaker 8: positive eye, a center of power encased in an impregnable
• 5:40:57
  Speaker 8: sheath of auric force. You will thus be able to
• 5:41:01
  Speaker 8: build up yourself into a mighty center. You will be
• 5:41:04
  Speaker 8: surprised at the confused manner of people who try to
• 5:41:07
  Speaker 8: influence you when they come in contact with this aura
• 5:41:11
  Speaker 8: and find their suggestions and menative currents being cast back
• 5:41:15
  Speaker 8: upon themselves. Such people find themselves all broken up when
• 5:41:19
  Speaker 8: they meet a condition like this, which they do not understand,
• 5:41:22
  Speaker 8: for a very few of them are practical occultists. The
• 5:41:27
  Speaker 8: mental picture of yourself as a center of power surrounded
• 5:41:30
  Speaker 8: with a positive aura, will, if persisted in, render you
• 5:41:34
  Speaker 8: extremely positive, so that your influence is sure to be
• 5:41:37
  Speaker 8: felt by the world with which you come in contact.
• 5:41:42
  Speaker 8: Amusing sequels, you will often be amused by occurrences following
• 5:41:47
  Speaker 8: after the rejection of these stray impulses, etc. You will
• 5:41:52
  Speaker 8: find that if you have had an impulse to buy
• 5:41:54
  Speaker 8: a certain thing or sell a certain thing at a sacrifice,
• 5:41:58
  Speaker 8: that in a day or so, perhaps an hour or so,
• 5:42:01
  Speaker 8: you will be approached by some person who will advise
• 5:42:03
  Speaker 8: you personally to do that same thing. The person being
• 5:42:07
  Speaker 8: likely to be benefited by the scheme or plan. I
• 5:42:11
  Speaker 8: do not mean that such person has necessarily tried to
• 5:42:14
  Speaker 8: influence you by mentative currents, for he may not have
• 5:42:18
  Speaker 8: consciously done so. But nevertheless, that is just what has happened,
• 5:42:23
  Speaker 8: and his desire or will has caused these currents to
• 5:42:27
  Speaker 8: flow in your direction, and you have felt them. Now
• 5:42:30
  Speaker 8: that your eyes have been open to this fact, you
• 5:42:32
  Speaker 8: will be amused and surprised to see how many cooberative
• 5:42:35
  Speaker 8: proofs you will receive. But always insert your individuality as
• 5:42:40
  Speaker 8: a center of power, and all will be well with
• 5:42:43
  Speaker 8: you in these matters. The protective agent. I hope that
• 5:42:48
  Speaker 8: the above reproduction of the advice given in mental magic
• 5:42:52
  Speaker 8: will do you good. And once more, remember the power
• 5:42:55
  Speaker 8: of the positive denial as a protective agent. Use you
• 5:43:00
  Speaker 8: may disperse and scatter the mentative currents of others and
• 5:43:03
  Speaker 8: surround yourself with an impregnable armor of mentative energy. And
• 5:43:09
  Speaker 8: also remember this which I have not said elsewhere, that
• 5:43:13
  Speaker 8: the law of life is concerned with the protection of
• 5:43:16
  Speaker 8: the individual and gives to each the weapons with which
• 5:43:19
  Speaker 8: to preserve his individuality. So true is this that occultists
• 5:43:25
  Speaker 8: know that there is the greatest difference in the use
• 5:43:27
  Speaker 8: of the mentative power as an attacking force and as
• 5:43:31
  Speaker 8: a protective force. I will illustrate this briefly protective individuality.
• 5:43:38
  Speaker 8: A man's mentative force is immensely more powerful when he
• 5:43:42
  Speaker 8: uses it to protect his individuality than when he uses
• 5:43:46
  Speaker 8: it to attack the individuality of another. In fact, if
• 5:43:50
  Speaker 8: everyone understood the laws of mentative defense and would avail
• 5:43:54
  Speaker 8: himself of the information given by me under this head,
• 5:43:58
  Speaker 8: there would be almost a total absence of mentative attack,
• 5:44:01
  Speaker 8: for the futility of the same would soon be recognized.
• 5:44:06
  Speaker 8: The only reason that the strong individuals are able to
• 5:44:09
  Speaker 8: affect the weaker ones so frequently is because the other
• 5:44:12
  Speaker 8: do not know their inner power and make no defense.
• 5:44:16
  Speaker 8: In fact, the majority of people do not know of
• 5:44:19
  Speaker 8: these laws at all, and if one tells them, they
• 5:44:22
  Speaker 8: sneer and smile, knowingly tapping their foreheads to indicate that
• 5:44:26
  Speaker 8: their informant is just a little off. Poor sheep and geese,
• 5:44:32
  Speaker 8: they are so happy in their ignorance and conceit that
• 5:44:35
  Speaker 8: it almost seems a pity to disturb them Nature's protective armor.
• 5:44:41
  Speaker 8: But to return to my subject, you will find that
• 5:44:44
  Speaker 8: it will require a much less effort of will to
• 5:44:47
  Speaker 8: protect your individuality than at will to attack the individuality
• 5:44:52
  Speaker 8: of another. You will find that the law is on
• 5:44:54
  Speaker 8: your side. When you say I won't be influenced, I
• 5:44:58
  Speaker 8: deny the power of another to weaken my individuality. For
• 5:45:02
  Speaker 8: you have then called into operation that law of nature
• 5:45:06
  Speaker 8: which is always in operation, and which she gives to
• 5:45:09
  Speaker 8: her creatures in the way of an instinctive protective force.
• 5:45:13
  Speaker 8: So there is no occasion to be afraid. You are
• 5:45:16
  Speaker 8: immune from attacks if you will but assert the force
• 5:45:19
  Speaker 8: within you, the glory of individuality. And Now, friends, in conclusion,
• 5:45:26
  Speaker 8: I beg of you to remember that you are individuals,
• 5:45:30
  Speaker 8: centers of mind, power, force and energy. Yes, centers of
• 5:45:35
  Speaker 8: life in the great ocean of being. Each of you
• 5:45:38
  Speaker 8: is something different from any other sinner, and the law
• 5:45:42
  Speaker 8: wishes you to live your own life, develop your own individuality,
• 5:45:47
  Speaker 8: assert your own birthright. And in the measure that you
• 5:45:51
  Speaker 8: do so, so will the law be on your side.
• 5:45:54
  Speaker 8: Do not let the snare of personal pride trip you
• 5:45:57
  Speaker 8: up and entangle you in its meshes, for it is
• 5:46:01
  Speaker 8: but an illusion, but glory in your pride of individuality.
• 5:46:05
  Speaker 8: And do not be frightened, coaxed, seduced, lured or driven
• 5:46:10
  Speaker 8: by the race thought into the condition of the worm
• 5:46:13
  Speaker 8: of the dust person. Do not be a human doormat.
• 5:46:17
  Speaker 8: Do not be a human sheep or goose following some
• 5:46:21
  Speaker 8: fool leader in a stately goose step, or the sheep
• 5:46:24
  Speaker 8: like follow my leader fashion. Remember that you are men
• 5:46:29
  Speaker 8: and women, That you are individuals for which the cosmic
• 5:46:33
  Speaker 8: machinery has been laboring for ages in order to evolve
• 5:46:37
  Speaker 8: the statement of individuality. The statement of individuality, that I
• 5:46:43
  Speaker 8: am here now is a mighty one. It will always
• 5:46:47
  Speaker 8: be I am with you. It will always be here
• 5:46:51
  Speaker 8: with you. It will always be now with you, no
• 5:46:55
  Speaker 8: matter what state your individuality may reach, no matter what
• 5:46:59
  Speaker 8: point of space you may occupy, no matter what period
• 5:47:03
  Speaker 8: of time it may be, it will always be true
• 5:47:06
  Speaker 8: that I am here now, For it will always be
• 5:47:11
  Speaker 8: your eye that is speaking. It will always be am
• 5:47:15
  Speaker 8: with you. Everywhere, place will be here to you. All
• 5:47:19
  Speaker 8: time will be now with you. May you unfold into
• 5:47:24
  Speaker 8: a perception of this statement of individuality, for when you do,
• 5:47:28
  Speaker 8: you will have reached a mental plain where even the
• 5:47:31
  Speaker 8: principles herein taught will seem elementary to you, for you
• 5:47:35
  Speaker 8: will have soared above them and their operation. May this
• 5:47:39
  Speaker 8: and other works of mine be as ladders upon which
• 5:47:41
  Speaker 8: you may mount, and which you may then kick away
• 5:47:45
  Speaker 8: from under your feet as no longer needed students, I
• 5:47:49
  Speaker 8: thank you and bid you off Wiedersen. May the law
• 5:47:53
  Speaker 8: protect you till we meet again.